Google
 

Trailing-Edge - PDP-10 Archives - tops10v704_docc - 10,7/docupd/oclrm.mem
There is 1 other file named oclrm.mem in the archive. Click here to see a list.
















                                  TOPS-10
                             Operator's Command
                         Language Reference Manual


|                        Electronically Distributed
|  
|  
|  
|            This manual describes  the  commands  an  operator
|            needs.  These include commands to the OPR program,
|            the OPSER program, and the monitor  commands  that
|            require operator privileges.  It also includes the
|            following OPR command subsets:   CATALOG,  CONFIG,
|            LCP, NCP, QUOTA.
|  
|            This  manual  supercedes  the  TOPS-10  Operator's
|            Command  Language  Reference  Manual  published in
|            October, 1988.  The order number for that  manual,
|            AA-H599C-TB, is obsolete.



             Operating System:             TOPS-10 Version 7.04

             Software:                       GALAXY Version 5.1










   digital equipment corporation               marlborough, massachusetts



|  TOPS-10 Update Tape No. 03, September 1990

   First Printing, July 1982
   Revised, April 1986
   Revised, October 1988



   The information in this document is subject to change  without  notice
   and  should  not  be  construed  as  a commitment by Digital Equipment
   Corporation.  Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no  responsibility
   for any errors that may appear in this document.

   The software described in this document     is   furnished   under   a
   license and may be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such
   license.

   No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software or
   equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its
   affiliated companies.



|  Copyright C 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990 Digital Equipment Corporation.

   All Rights Reserved.



   The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

   CI             DECtape     LA50             SITGO-10
   DDCMP          DECUS       LN01             TOPS-10
   DEC            DECwriter   LN03             TOPS-20
   DECmail        DELNI       MASSBUS          TOPS-20AN
   DECnet         DELUA       PDP              UNIBUS
   DECnet-VAX     HSC         PDP-11/24        UETP
   DECserver      HSC-50      PrintServer      VAX
   DECserver 100  KA10        PrintServer 40   VAX/VMS
   DECserver 200  KI          Q-bus            VT50
   DECsystem-10   KL10        ReGIS
   DECSYSTEM-20   KS10        RSX              d i g i t a l




                                      CONTENTS



   PREFACE


   CHAPTER 1       THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR

           1.1     INTRODUCTION TO OPR  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-i
           1.2     RUNNING OPR  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
           1.2.1     Starting OPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
           1.2.2     Exiting from OPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
           1.2.3     Issuing OPR Commands to/from Remote Stations . . 1-3
           1.2.4     Multiple Operators on the System . . . . . . . . 1-3
           1.3     OPR COMMAND FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
           1.3.1     Listing Available Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
           1.3.2     Using ESCape Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
           1.3.3     Reprinting Faulty Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
           1.3.4     Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
           1.3.5     Line Continuation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
           1.4     CONTROLLING SYSTEM EVENTS  . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
           1.5     CONTROLLING FAL  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
           1.6     CONTROLLING NQC STREAMS  . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-10
           1.7     ORION TO OPR MESSAGES  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-11
           1.7.1     Controlling OPR Message Output . . . . . . . .  1-12
           1.8     OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . .  1-13


   CHAPTER 2       OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

           2.1     ABORT  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
           2.2     ALIGN  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
           2.3     BACKSPACE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
           2.4     CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-11
           2.5     CLOSE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-15
           2.6     CONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-17
           2.7     DEFINE FILE-ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-20
           2.8     DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-21
           2.9     DEFINE NODE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-22
           2.10    DISABLE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-26
           2.11    DISMOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-32
           2.12    ENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-35
           2.13    ENTER  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-41
           2.14    EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-43
           2.15    FORWARDSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-44
           2.16    HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-47
           2.17    HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-49
           2.18    IDENTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-51
           2.19    LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-53
           2.20    MODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-56


                                    iii



           2.21    MOUNT  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-60
           2.22    NEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-62
           2.23    PUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-64
           2.24    RECOGNIZE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-65
           2.25    RELEASE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-67
           2.26    REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-69
           2.27    REQUEUE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-71
           2.28    RESPOND  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-74
           2.29    RESTRICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-76
           2.30    ROUTE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-77
           2.31    SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-81
           2.32    SET  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-83
           2.33    SET BATCH-STREAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-84
           2.34    SET CARD-PUNCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-88
           2.35    SET FAL-STREAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-91
           2.36    SET JOB  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-92
           2.37    SET KSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-94
           2.38    SET NODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-97
           2.39    SET NQC-STREAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-99
           2.40    SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
           2.41    SET PLOTTER  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
           2.42    SET PRINTER  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
           2.43    SET SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
           2.44    SET TAPE-DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
           2.45    SET TERMINAL TYPE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
           2.46    SET USAGE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
           2.47    SHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
           2.48    SHOW ALLOCATION  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
           2.49    SHOW CONTROL-FILE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
           2.50    SHOW MESSAGES  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
           2.51    SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
           2.52    SHOW OPERATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133
           2.53    SHOW PARAMETERS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
           2.54    SHOW QUEUES  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
           2.55    SHOW ROUTE-TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
           2.56    SHOW STATUS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-143
           2.57    SHOW SYSTEM  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
           2.58    SHOW TIME  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150
           2.59    SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
           2.60    START  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-154
           2.61    STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
           2.62    SUPPRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
           2.63    TAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
           2.64    UNLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167
           2.65    UNRESTRICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
           2.66    WAIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-170


   CHAPTER 3       OPR COMMAND SUBSETS

           3.1     ENTERING AND EXITING OPR COMMAND SUBSETS . . . . . 3-1


                                     iv



           3.2     TOP-LEVEL COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
           3.3     CATALOG COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
           3.4     CONFIG COMMANDS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-20
           3.5     LCP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-44
           3.6     NCP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-59
           3.7     QUOTA COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-61


   CHAPTER 4       TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS

           4.1     ATTACH CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
           4.2     ATTACH DEVICE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
           4.3     ATTACH DISK-UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
           4.4     ATTACH JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
           4.5     DETACH DEVICE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
           4.6     DETACH DISK-UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-11
           4.7     INITIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-13
           4.8     SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-14
           4.9     SET BREAK  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-16
           4.10    SET CORMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-18
           4.11    SET CORMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-19
           4.12    SET CPU  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-20
           4.13    SET DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-22
           4.14    SET DAYTIME  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-23
           4.15    SET MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-24
           4.16    SET NOMESSAGE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-26
           4.17    SET OPR  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-28
           4.18    SET SCHED  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-29
           4.19    SET TTY  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-30
           4.20    SET VMMAX  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-36
           4.21    XCHNGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-37


   CHAPTER 5       OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE

           5.1     INTRODUCTION TO OPSER  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
           5.2     STARTING OPSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
           5.2.1     Commands to the OPSER Program  . . . . . . . . . 5-2
           5.2.2     Commands Directly to Subjobs . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
           5.3     OPSER COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
           5.3.1     OPSER Commands for the Operator  . . . . . . . . 5-5
           5.3.2     OPSER Commands for All Users . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
           5.4     OPSER OPERATOR MESSAGES  . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-12


   APPENDIX A      OPR ERROR MESSAGES


   INDEX




                                     v



   TABLES

           3-1     NCP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-60
           4-1     Number of Fillers by Character and Filler Class   4-32















                                  PREFACE



   The TOPS-10 Operator's Command Language Reference Manual describes the
   following command groups:

         o  Operator command language commands (OPR)

         o  Disk and tape cataloging commands (CATALOG)

         o  System device configuration commands (CONFIG)

         o  LAT control program commands (LCP)

         o  DECnet network control program commands (NCP)

         o  Disk space quota commands (QUOTA)

         o  Operator privileged monitor commands

         o  OPSER program commands

   Chapter 1 provides  an  introduction  to  OPR,  the  operator  command
   language.   Each  of  the  following  chapters covers one of the above
   command groups.  For easy reference, the commands in each chapter  are
   arranged in alphabetical order.

   This manual is for the beginning operator as well as  the  experienced
   operator.   It  assumes  that  the  reader has SYSTEM, HOST, or REMOTE
   operator privileges and knows how to log in as an operator.

   This manual assumes that you, the operator, have read all or parts  of
   the following manuals:

        Getting Started with TOPS-10

        TOPS-10 Operator's Guide



                                    vii



        TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Operator's Hardware Device and Maintenance Guide

   In addition, you may need to read  the  following  manuals  to  obtain
   additional information related to the tasks you must perform:

        TOPS-10 Software Installation Guide

        TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual

        TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual

        TOPS-10 DECnet and PSI System Manager's and Operator's Guide

        Local Area Transport (LAT) Architecture Network Manager's Guide

        TOPS-10 IBM Emulation/Termination Manual


                      Conventions Used in this Manual


        Symbol       Meaning

        OPR>HELP     What you type is underscored.

        <RET>        Press the key labeled RETURN or CR.

        <ESC>        Press the key labeled ESC, ESCape, ALT, or PRE.

        <CTRL/x>     Press the CTRL and x keys simultaneously.

        hh:mm:ss     Specifies a time in twenty-four hour  clock  format,
                     where hh is hours, mm is minutes, and ss is seconds.
                     For example, 15:00:00 is 1:00 p.m., and 15:15:00  is
                     1:15 p.m.

        dd-mmm-yy    Specifies a date, where dd is the day,  mmm  is  the
                     month,  and  yy is the year.  For example, 15-Sep-88
                     is September 15, 1988.

                                    NOTE

           Commands that specify a  node-name  as  a  keyword  or
           argument  no  longer  require  that you include double
           colons after the node name.








                                    viii











                                 CHAPTER 1

                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR



   1.1  INTRODUCTION TO OPR

   The Operator Command Language (OPR) enables you  to  communicate  with
   the programs that make up the GALAXY batch and spooling system.  These
   programs are:

         o  QUASAR, the  nucleus  of  the  GALAXY  and  mountable  device
            allocation systems

         o  BATCON, the batch job controller

         o  CATALOG, the system catalog manager

         o  LPTSPL, the line printer spooler

         o  CDRIVE, the card reader spooler

         o  SPRINT, the reader interpreter

         o  SPROUT, the card punch, paper tape punch, and plotter spooler

         o  PULSAR, the label processor for tapes and structures

         o  NEBULA, the output job router between DECnet nodes

         o  QUEUE, the user interface to submit print and batch jobs

   In addition, you use  OPR  to  communicate  with  programs  requesting
   operator  action,  such  as  the  PLEASE program, or with users on the
   system.

   The program that receives the OPR commands and communicates  with  all
   the  other  system programs is ORION.  ORION also logs messages in the
   operator's log file, OPERAT.LOG.





                                    1-1
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                                RUNNING OPR


   1.2  RUNNING OPR

   To run OPR, you must have one of the following privileges.  (See  your
   system manager to obtain one of these privileges if you do not already
   have them.)

        1.  SYSTEM operator  privileges,  which  enable  you  to  control
            devices and tasks on the host system and on any remote nodes.

        2.  HOST operator privileges, which enable you to control devices
            and tasks at your local host system only.

        3.  REMOTE operator  privileges,  which  enable  you  to  control
            devices  and  tasks  at the remote station node where you are
            located.

   The tasks in this chapter and in following chapters  assume  that  you
   have  more  than  one terminal available to perform them.  If you have
   more than one terminal available to you, you may want to dedicate  one
   terminal  to  running  only  OPR,  and  use another terminal for other
   tasks, for example, running BACKUP.

   The following sections explain how to start and exit from OPR.



   1.2.1  Starting OPR

   To start OPR type the following:

        .R OPR<RET>

        OPR>

   If your installation has  more  than  one  terminal  assigned  to  its
   operators,  you  can  run separate OPRs from different terminals.  All
   OPRs work the same way.  ORION, OPR's controlling program, can  handle
   an unlimited number of OPRs.



   1.2.2  Exiting from OPR

   To exit from OPR, press <CTRL/Z> or type EXIT.  OPR returns  your  job
   to  monitor  command  level.  The period prompt (.) indicates that you
   are at monitor command level.  For example:

        OPR>EXIT<RET>

        .



                                    1-2
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                                RUNNING OPR


   1.2.3  Issuing OPR Commands to/from Remote Stations

   The system operator at the host system has control  of  all  jobs  and
   devices  at  all nodes within the network system.  If you are a Remote
   Station Operator, you can control only  the  devices  at  your  remote
   station.   In addition, you have complete control over all active jobs
   and jobs queued for devices at your node.  All your  commands  default
   to  your  location  or  node.  Some OPR commands, however, include the
   /NODE switch which enables you to send commands to other nodes in  the
   network.   The /NODE switch is available with many of the OPR commands
   described in later sections of this manual.  The /NODE  switch  allows
   you  to  specify  the  logical identifier of any remote station or any
   node in the network system.  The format of the /NODE switch is:

        /NODE:node-id

   where node-id is the number or the name of the remote station.



   1.2.4  Multiple Operators on the System

   You can have more than one OPR running on the same  operating  system.
   ORION   keeps   track   of   each   OPR   and  sends  the  appropriate
   acknowledgement messages to the OPR who sent the command.

   If you have networking software at your installation, messages sent to
   a node from a user (with the SEND OPR monitor command) are sent to all
   OPRs running on the node.

   You can enable or disable messages displayed at each terminal  running
   OPR.   See  Section  1.7.1  for information on controlling OPR message
   output.



   1.3  OPR COMMAND FEATURES

   OPR has features that enable you to:

         o  List available commands

         o  Use ESCape recognition

         o  Obtain help text

         o  Reprint faulty commands

         o  Continue long command lines

   The following sections describe these command features in detail.


                                    1-3
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                            OPR COMMAND FEATURES


   In addition, other CTRL/character commands, such  as  CTRL/R,  CTRL/U,
   and  CTRL/W,  function  at  OPR  command  level  as they do at monitor
   command level.

                                    NOTE

           These OPR command features are not applicable when OPR
           is a subjob of OPSER.



   1.3.1  Listing Available Commands

   To list all available OPR commands, type a question mark  (?)  to  the
   OPR>  prompt.   You  can  type  ?   whenever you need help with an OPR
   command.  For example:

         o  When you type ?  while entering a command, OPR lists  command
            keywords, arguments, or switches for the OPR command and then
            redisplays your OPR command up to the point where  you  typed
            the ?.

         o  When you type  ?   after  the  OPR>  prompt,  OPR  lists  the
            available commands.

         o  When you type ?  after an OPR command, OPR lists the keywords
            to that command and redisplays the command.

         o  When you type ?  after the keyword,  OPR  lists  the  values,
            arguments, and/or switches to that keyword and redisplays the
            command and keywords up to the point where you typed ?.

         o  When you type ?  after an entire OPR  command,  OPR  displays
            the  message  "Confirm with carriage return", redisplays your
            entire command, and waits for you to press the RETURN key.

   Example

   After you have started OPR and the system displays  the  OPR>  prompt,
   type ?.

        .R OPR <RET>
        OPR>? one of the following:
        ABORT        ALIGN         BACKSPACE     CANCEL        CLOSE
        CONTINUE     DEFINE        DISABLE       DISMOUNT      ENABLE
        ENTER        EXIT          FORWARDSPACE  HELP          HOLD 
        IDENTIFY     LOCK          MODIFY        MOUNT         NEXT 
        PUSH         RECOGNIZE     RELEASE       REPORT        REQUEUE 
        RESPOND      RESTRICT      ROUTE         SEND          SET 
        SHOW         SHUTDOWN      START         STOP          SUPPRESS



                                    1-4
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                            OPR COMMAND FEATURES


        TAKE         UNLOCK        UNRESTRICT    WAIT

            or one of the following:

        CATALOG      CONFIG        LCP           NCP           QUOTA

        OPR>

                                    NOTE

           The NCP command applies only if your installation uses
           DECnet  software.   See  the  TOPS-10  DECnet  and PSI
           System  Manager's  and  Operator's  Guide   for   more
           information about NCP.

           The LCP command applies only if your installation uses
           LAT  software.   See  the  LAT Terminal Server Network
           Manager's Guide for more information about LCP.



   1.3.2  Using ESCape Recognition

   ESCape recognition helps you to enter commands by:

         o  Completing command keywords and switches to  the  point  that
            they become unambiguous with other keywords and switches

         o  Allowing you to type shortened versions of commands

         o  Providing guide words that prompt you for more information

   You can press the  ESCape  key  as  soon  as  you  have  typed  enough
   characters  to  uniquely  identify  a  command  to OPR.  The number of
   characters necessary for OPR to accept the command varies and requires
   some experimentation on your part.

                                    NOTE

           The terminal bell rings when you press the ESCape  key
           if  you  have  not typed enough characters to uniquely
           identify a command.  If  this  happens,  type  another
           character  and  press  the ESCape key.  Continue to do
           this until the characters you have  typed  identify  a
           specific command.

   The following keyword table and dialog illustrate the  ESCape  command
   completion feature:

        DEVICE-A-TABLE-OFF
        DEVICE-A-TABLE-ON


                                    1-5
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                            OPR COMMAND FEATURES


        DEVICE-B-TABLE-OFF
        DEVICE-B-TABLE-ON

        1.  Type D<ESC>.

            OPR>D<ESC>EVICE-

            OPR responds by providing "EVICE-" and then beeps.

        2.  Type A<ESC>.

            OPR>D<ESC>EVICE-A<ESC>-TABLE-O

            OPR responds by providing "-TABLE-O" and then beeps.

        3.  Type F<ESC>.

            OPR>D<ESC>EVICE-A<ESC>-TABLE-OF<ESC>F

            OPR responds by providing  "F"  and  completes  the  keyword,
            "DEVICE-A-TABLE-OFF".

   The following example illustrates the ESCape recognition feature:

        1.  Type the ABORT command.

        2.  Press the ESCape key to display the ABORT guide words.   (The
            characters <ESC> are not echoed on your terminal.)


   Example

        OPR>ABORT<ESC>(current job on)BATCH-STREAM<ESC>(stream number) 0<RET>

        10:37:21 Batch-Stream 0  -- Abort request queued --

        OPR>
        10:37:42 Batch-Stream 0  -- End --
          Job TBUILD Req  145 for HURLEY [33,2623]
        OPR>




   1.3.3  Reprinting Faulty Commands

   When you issue a correct command to OPR, OPR  passes  the  command  to
   ORION.   If  the  command is incorrect, OPR displays an error message.
   If you receive an  error  message,  you  can  retype  the  entire  OPR
   command,  or  press  <CTRL/H>  to  reprint the command up to the point
   where the error occurred.


                                    1-6
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                            OPR COMMAND FEATURES


   To use the <CTRL/H> feature do the following:

        1.  Press <CTRL/H> to redisplay the command up to the point where
            the  error  occured.   (The characters <CTRL/H> and <ESC> are
            not echoed on your terminal.)

        2.  Enter the correct information.


   Example

        OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER<ESC>(unit number) 0 /PAGES:3) <RET>
        ? Not confirmed: "3"

        OPR><CTRL/H>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 0 (unit number) /PAGES:30 <RET>

        OPR>
        13:25:04        Printer 0  -- Forwardspaced 30 Pages --

        OPR>



   1.3.4  Getting Help

   The OPR HELP command provides  information  about  specific  commands.
   When  you type HELP, followed by an OPR command name, OPR displays the
   command's function and its format, keywords, arguments, and switches.

   The following example illustrates the HELP feature:

   If you specify  HELP  RELEASE,  OPR  displays  the  function,  format,
   keywords, and arguments of the RELEASE command.

        OPR>HELP<ESC>(with) RELEASE <RET>

   The RELEASE command allows you to release a job request that was  held
   with the HOLD command.  The format is:

        RELEASE keyword

   where keyword must be one of the following:

        BATCH-JOBS
        CARD-PUNCH-JOBS
        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS
        PLOTTER-JOBS
        PRINTER-JOBS





                                    1-7
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                            OPR COMMAND FEATURES


   followed by one of these arguments:

        <request-id-number>    (for a single job)
        [user name]            (for all jobs of a user)
        *                      (for all job requests)

        OPR>



   1.3.5  Line Continuation

   Commands to OPR are often long and cumbersome, especially if  you  use
   ESCape recognition.  The OPR program enables you to continue a command
   on the next line.  To continue a  command  line,  type  a  hyphen  (-)
   before  you  press  <RET>.  This prevents OPR from processing the line
   until it reaches a <RET> that is not preceded by a hyphen.  (You  must
   include  the  entire  command  name,  keyword, argument, or switch and
   value before you type the hyphen.)

   For example, the following command line uses line continuation:

        OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: INITIALIZE /LABEL-TYPE:ANSI- <RET>

        /OWNER:[31,5723]/TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD/VOLUME-ID:TAPE01 <RET>

        OPR>




   1.4  CONTROLLING SYSTEM EVENTS

   OPR  enables  you  to  control  certain  system  activities  known  as
   "events".  These events are:

         o  Billing file closure (BILCLS)

         o  Scheduled system shutdown (KSYS)

         o  ORION log file closure (OPRFIL)

         o  Command file execution (TAKFIL)

         o  Usage file closure (USGFIL)

   You can use the following commands to control system events:

         o  CLOSE

         o  SET KSYS


                                    1-8
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                         CONTROLLING SYSTEM EVENTS


         o  SET USAGE

         o  TAKE

   To specify a time, day,  or  date  argument  with  any  of  the  above
   commands, use one of the following formats:

        NOW                causes the event to occur immediately.

        +hh:mm:ss          schedules the event to occur in the number  of
                           hours  from  the current time, as specified by
                           hh:mm:ss.  (Specifies a relative time for  the
                           event to occur.)

        hh:mm:ss           schedules the  event  to  occur  at  the  time
                           specified by hh:mm:ss.  (Specifies an absolute
                           time for the event to occur.)

        dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss

                           schedules the event to occur on the  date  and
                           time specified by dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss.

        DAILY hh:mm:ss     schedules the event to occur every day at  the
                           time specified by hh:mm:ss.

        EVERY "DAY" hh:mm:ss

                           schedules the event to occur every week on the
                           day  and  time  you  specify.  DAY specifies a
                           particular day of the week.

   Other commands that control system events  are  the  CANCEL  and  SHOW
   QUEUES EVENTS commands.



   1.5  CONTROLLING FAL

   FAL, the File Access Listener, provides network remote access  to  the
   TOPS-10   file   system,   and   is   an   integral  part  of  network
   communications.  FAL makes network  file  transfers  possible  in  the
   following ways:

         o  It acts as a target for NFT (Network File Transfer)  programs
            on other DECnet and ANF-10 hosts.

         o  It determines a user's access privileges to a requested file.





                                    1-9
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                              CONTROLLING FAL


   You can  use  the  following  OPR  commands  to  control  the  network
   connections known as FAL-STREAMS:

         o  SET

         o  START

         o  ABORT

         o  SHOW

         o  SHUTDOWN

         o  STOP

         o  CONTINUE

         o  DEFINE

   These commands function  much  as  the  commands  that  control  batch
   streams.   For  example,  to  define the type of network (DECnet) with
   which FAL stream 2 will communicate, use the SET command as follows:

        OPR>SET FAL-STREAM 2 NETWORK DECNET
   OPR>
   16:10:48        Fal-Stream 2  -- Set Accepted --

   OPR>



   1.6  CONTROLLING NQC STREAMS

   The Network  Queue  Controller  (NQC),  using  the  Distributed  Queue
   Service  (DQS)  protocol,  allows  output  requests  to be sent to the
   output queue of a remote node.

   NQC streams control spooling requests for the  NEBULA  remote  queuing
   software.    Current   versions   of  NEBULA  run  as  internal  ORION
   applications that are available with the standard monitor distribution
   and GALAXY CUSPs.  However, in order to implement remote queuing, your
   system must be running DECnet-10 Version 3 and the remote queuing node
   must be a VAX/VMS system running DQS software Version 1.0, or later.

   You can use the following OPR commands to control NQC streams:

         o  ABORT           - Terminates active NQC stream requests

         o  CONTINUE        - Continues stopped NQC stream requests

         o  DEFINE          - Defines network nodes and remote queues for
                              NQC streams.

                                    1-10
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                          CONTROLLING NQC STREAMS


         o  SET             - Sets NQC parameters

         o  START           - Starts NQC streams

         o  SHOW PARAMETERS - Displays NQC stream parameters

         o  SHOW STATUS     - Displays NQC stream status

         o  SHUTDOWN        - Shuts down NQC streams

         o  STOP            - Stops NQC streams

   See  the  TOPS-10  Operator's  Guide  for   more   information   about
   controlling NQC streams.



   1.7  ORION TO OPR MESSAGES

   ORION to OPR messages are one of the two types of  messages  displayed
   on  your  OPR  terminal,  the  other  type are OPR messages indicating
   errors in your  commands  (see  Section  1.8).   The  types  of  ORION
   messages displayed are:

         o  Error  messages  showing  that  ORION  does  not   have   the
            appropriate  devices,  streams,  nodes,  or jobs to process a
            command

         o  Messages from jobs that start processing in a stream or on  a
            device

         o  Messages from jobs that end processing in a stream  or  on  a
            device

         o  Messages  specifying  actions  you  must  take  for   various
            devices, streams, or jobs

         o  Messages to which you must RESPOND

         o  Results from TAKE command files

   The first eight characters of the message ORION displays is  the  time
   stamp.  ORION time-stamps each OPR command it accepts and executes, as
   well as all error messages.

   In the following example, ORION displays the time (in hours,  minutes,
   and seconds) that it accepted and executed the SET PRINTER command.

        OPR>SET PRINTER 0 FORMS-TYPE NARROW <RET>


        12:00:00        Printer 0  -- Set Accepted --

                                    1-11
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                           ORION TO OPR MESSAGES


   ORION displays error messages in the same format.   In  the  following
   example,  ORION  acknowledges  the SHOW MESSAGES command by displaying
   the information message shown below:

        OPR>SHOW MESSAGES <RET>

        12:00:00        -- No Outstanding Messages --

   When a particular job starts to process in a  batch  stream  or  on  a
   device,  ORION  displays  a  message  to notify you that the stream or
   device is active.  For example, ORION displays the  following  message
   when  a  job  named  TEST begins to process in batch stream 0 for user
   ZINA:

        hh:mm:ss        Batch-stream 0  -- Begin --
                        Job TEST Req #274 for ZINA [27,1234]

        OPR>

   Likewise, when a particular job  ends  processing,  ORION  displays  a
   message  to notify you that the stream or device is not active and the
   job has completed.  For example, ORION displays the following  message
   when  a  job  named  TEST  ends the process in batch stream 0 for user
   ZINA.

        hh:mm:ss        Batch-stream 0  -- End --
                        Job TEST Req #274 for ZINA [27,1234]

        OPR>




   1.7.1  Controlling OPR Message Output

   You may want to control  the  types  of  messages  displayed  at  your
   terminal.   For  example,  if you have multiple terminals running OPR,
   you can set the OUTPUT-DISPLAY to suit the  needs  of  each  OPR.   To
   control  OPR  message  output,  enter  the  ENABLE  or DISABLE command
   followed by the keyword,  OUTPUT-DISPLAY,  and  one  or  more  of  the
   following arguments:

        ALL-MESSAGES (the default argument)
        BATCH-MESSAGES
        CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
        CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
        FAL-MESSAGES
        MOUNT-MESSAGES
        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
        PLOTTER-MESSAGES
        PRINTER-MESSAGES
        READER-MESSAGES
        USER-MESSAGES
                                    1-12
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                           ORION TO OPR MESSAGES


   The  ENABLE  and  DISABLE  commands  also  have  the  following  three
   switches.  If you do not specify one of these switches with one of the
   above arguments, the system assumes all three types of messages.

        /INFORMATION-MESSAGES
        /JOB-MESSAGES
        /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES

   Because the default is ALL-MESSAGES,  you  must  disable  ALL-MESSAGES
   then  enable the specific types of messages you want to see.  For more
   information about these commands and switches see Chapter 2.



   1.8  OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS

   OPR error messages are also displayed on your terminal.  All OPR error
   messages begin with "?" and are followed by the message explaining the
   error.  Note that "?" does not represent a fatal error in OPR,  as  it
   does in some other system programs.

   When you receive an OPR error message, you can type <CTRL/H> to retype
   your  OPR  command  up  to  the  point where you entered the incorrect
   keyword, switch, or  value  and  specify  the  correct  input  to  the
   command.

   Each error message described in this section gives an  explanation  of
   the cause of the error message and the possible solution.


   ERROR:         ?  Ambiguous

   Reason:        You issued an OPR command, but  did  not  complete  it.
                  For  example,  you  may  have  left  out  the necessary
                  keyword or switch that would make the  command  execute
                  properly.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the necessary keyword or switch.


   ERROR:         ?  Ambiguous switch or keyword

   Reason:        Same as above.

   Recovery:      Same as above.







                                    1-13
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                       OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS


   ERROR:         ?  CONFIRMATION Required

   Reason:        You gave a command but the command syntax is not valid.

   Recovery:      Check the command to  see  if  you  have  provided  all
                  necessary  keywords, arguments, and/or switches.  Check
                  that the hardware is available or that  the  device  is
                  ready  for  use.   Then  give  the command again.  (See
                  Chapter 2 for the command's correct keywords, arguments
                  and switches.)


   ERROR:         ?  Device Name name:  Does Not Exist

   Reason:        You specified a device name (name:) in an  OPR  command
                  that  is  currently not recognized by the system.  Such
                  devices are tape drives or disk drives.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype  the  command  and  specify  a
                  device  name  that  the  system acknowledges.  Give the
                  SHOW STATUS command to  find  those  devices  that  the
                  system recognizes.


   ERROR:         ?  Does not match switch or keyword

   Reason:        You specified a switch or keyword for  an  OPR  command
                  that can not take the switch or keyword specified.

   Recovery:      Type the command again and then specify a valid  switch
                  or keyword for that command.


   ERROR:         ?  Filename was not specified

   Reason:        You  specified  an  OPR  command  that  takes  a   file
                  specification  as  a  keyword or value to a switch, but
                  did not specify the file name.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the file name.


   ERROR:         ?  File not found

   Reason:        You  specified  an  OPR  command  that  takes  a   file
                  specification  as  a  keyword or value to a switch, but
                  the file was not found.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the correct file specification.


                                    1-14
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                       OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS


   ERROR:         ?  First nonspace character is not a digit

   Reason:        You specified a keyword or switch value  that  must  be
                  numeric,  but the first character is alphabetic or is a
                  special character.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
                  numeric   keyword   or   switch   value   with  numeric
                  characters.


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid device terminator

   Reason:        You specified a device with an illegal character in its
                  name or you did not include the colon (:) at the end of
                  the device name.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the device name with the correct characters and include
                  the colon (:).


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid HELP command specified

   Reason:        You specified an invalid OPR command as  a  keyword  to
                  the HELP command.

   Recovery:      Give the HELP HELP command  to  get  a  list  of  valid
                  keywords (OPR commands) to the HELP command.


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid guide word

   Reason:        You specified a guide word that does not pertain to the
                  OPR  command  that  you  specified,  you misspelled the
                  guide word, or you  used  <ESC>  recognition  and  then
                  typed <CTRL/H> before you pressed <RET>.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command.  If you must have
                  guide  words with the OPR command, use recognition with
                  the ESCape key.


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid node name

   Reason:        You specified a node name or number to the /NODE switch
                  for  a  node that has not been enabled, does not exist,
                  or has been misspelled.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the  correct  node  name or number to the /NODE switch.
                  You might have to ENABLE the node  before  you  reissue
                  the command.
                                    1-15
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                       OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid OPR command specified

   Reason:        You specified an invalid command.

   Recovery:      Type a question mark to the OPR prompt to get a list of
                  valid OPR commands.


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid token found

   Reason:        You specified an OPR command, such as HOLD or  RELEASE,
                  but  did  not give one of the necessary arguments.  The
                  necessary  arguments  are  the  request-id-number,  the
                  project-programmer number, or an asterisk.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and include one of
                  the required arguments to the command.


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid wildcard designator

   Reason:        You specified a wildcard character (* or  %)  within  a
                  file specification for a keyword or switch value.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the file specification without any wildcard characters.
                  OPR/ORION does not accept wildcard characters within  a
                  file specification.


   ERROR:         ?  Negative number improper

   Reason:        You specified a negative number for a device or  stream
                  number.  OPR does not accept negative numbers.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
                  positive integer as a device or stream number.


   ERROR:         ?  No such filename

   Reason:        You specified a file name as a keyword or switch value,
                  but the file name does not exist as you specified it.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the correct file name as the keyword or switch value.







                                    1-16
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                       OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS


   ERROR:         ?  No such file type

   Reason:        You specified a file extension as a keyword  or  switch
                  value,  but  the  file  extension does not exist as you
                  specified it.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the  correct  file  extension  as the keyword or switch
                  value.


   ERROR:         ?  Not a quoted string - does  not  begin  with  double
                  quote

   Reason:        You specified a message text, but did  not  include  it
                  within double quotes ("message text").

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the message text within the required double quotes.


   ERROR:         ?  Not confirmed

   Reason:        You specified too many keywords or switches to  an  OPR
                  command.   OPR  expected a carriage return after one of
                  the keywords or switches specified.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>; OPR retypes the command up to the  point
                  where carriage return is expected.  Then press <RET>.


   ERROR:         ?  Only one file allowed

   Reason:        You specified the  BACKSPACE  or  FORWARDSPACE  command
                  with  the /FILE switch and a numeric value greater than
                  1.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>; OPR retypes the command up to the  point
                  where  you  entered  the number of files.  You can then
                  enter 1 or press <RET> .  The /FILE switch defaults  to
                  1.


   ERROR:         ?  Priority not in range

   Reason:        You specified a priority number in the SET JOB-PRIORITY
                  command that is not in the range from 1 to 63.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
                  priority number from 1 to 63.



                                    1-17
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                       OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS


   ERROR:         ?  Too many characters in node name

   Reason:        You  specified  too   many   characters   in   a   name
                  specification  to the /NODE switch.  The /NODE name can
                  have only from one to six alphanumeric characters.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the  correct  node name for the /NODE switch.  The name
                  must be six characters or less.


   ERROR:         ?  Value missing in date/time

   Reason:        You specified an OPR command that requires an  argument
                  of date and/or time, such as the SET USAGE command.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the  command  and  supply  the
                  date  and/or time as an argument.  To check whether the
                  date and/or time is needed give the "?" command to list
                  your options.

































                                    1-18











                                 CHAPTER 2

                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS



   This chapter describes each of the OPR commands in  detail.   All  OPR
   commands  must end with a carriage return (that is, you must press the
   key labeled RETURN or CR).

   There are seven possible headings in each command description.   These
   headings  are  listed  and  explained  in  the  following text and are
   omitted when not applicable to the command:

        Function            Contains  one  or   two   sentences   briefly
                            describing what the command does.

        Format              Describes  the   syntax   of   the   command,
                            including   its   command   name,   keywords,
                            switches, and switch values.

        Keywords            Describes the attributes or values that  must
                            be supplied with the command.

        Switches            Describes the attributes that are preceded by
                            a  slash  (/) and are optional to the command
                            string.  Switches that have values  can  also
                            have default values (supplied by <ESC>).

        Arguments           Describes  the  additional   attributes   and
                            values  that  are  optional  to  the  command
                            string.  An argument that takes a  value  (or
                            word)  can  also  have  a  default  value (or
                            word)(supplied by <ESC>).

        Restrictions        Describes the limitations  and  peculiarities
                            of  the  command.   It  also  explains common
                            error messages you can  receive  while  using
                            the command.

        Examples            Shows a few common ways to use the command.




                                    2-1
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ABORT


                            2.1  ABORT




   Function

        The ABORT  command  terminates  the  following  types  of  active
        requests:

              o  input/output device requests

              o  batch stream requests

              o  FAL stream requests

              o  NQC stream requests


   Format

        OPR>ABORT keyword argument /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       aborts the specified batch  stream.   A  batch
                           stream  is  a  pseudo-terminal  that interacts
                           with the system to execute a batch job.

        CARD-PUNCH         aborts the specified card punch job.

        FAL-STREAM         aborts the specified FAL stream.

        NQC-STREAM         aborts the specified NQC stream.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   aborts the specified paper-tape-punch job.

        PLOTTER            aborts the specified plotter job.

        PRINTER            aborts the specified line printer job.

        READER             aborts the specified card  reader  job.   Jobs
                           read   through  the  card  reader  become  job
                           requests in the batch input queue.








                                    2-2
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ABORT


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies the stream number of the batch, NQC,
                           or  FAL  stream  to  be  aborted,  or the unit
                           number of  the  input/output  device  that  is
                           currently  processing a job.  You must specify
                           an argument.

        n:m                specifies a range of stream or unit numbers.


   Switches

        /NODE:identifier   specifies a remote node for which the  command
                           will   be   effective.    For   example,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026 to specify the node named KL1026.
                           If  you do not specify a node identifier, your
                           own node is the default.  Note that you cannot
                           abort jobs at a remote host node.

        /ERROR-PROCESSING  specifies that any error  recovery  procedures
                           specified  by the user who submitted the batch
                           job will not be ignored.

        /NOERROR-PROCESSING

                           specifies that any error  recovery  procedures
                           provided  by  the user who submitted the batch
                           job be ignored when the batch job is aborted.

        /PURGE             aborts the specified job and all  output  from
                           the  job.   When you purge a batch-stream job,
                           no log file is printed.

        /REASON:comment    allows you to include a comment explaining why
                           the  request  has been canceled.  This comment
                           appears in the  batch  log  file  and  at  the
                           user's  terminal.   If  the  comment is longer
                           than one line, type a hyphen before you  press
                           RETURN  and  continue  the comment on the next
                           line.  If you press RETURN  immediately  after
                           the  colon, OPR responds with the instruction:
                           ENTER TEXT AND TERMINATE  WITH  ^Z.   You  can
                           then enter as many lines of text as necessary.
                           When your comment is complete, press <CTRL/Z>.








                                    2-3
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ABORT


   Restrictions

        The only switches available to the READER keyword are  the  /NODE
        and  /REASON  switches,  because a card reader input job does not
        become a request until the last card ($EOJ card) has been read.

        The only switch available to the NQC-STREAM keyword is /NODE.

        The /ERROR-PROCESSING and /NOERROR-PROCESSING switches are  valid
        only with the BATCH-STREAM keyword.


   Examples

        1.  Use the ABORT command  to  abort  a  batch  stream  job  with
            NOERROR-PROCESSING  because  you  were instructed to do so by
            the user who submitted the job.

            OPR>ABORT BATCH-STREAM 2 /NOERROR-PROCESSING /REASON:<RET>
            Enter text and terminate with ^Z
             OPERATIONS WAS INSTRUCTED TO DO SO BY user HURLEY<RET>
            ^Z

            OPR>
            12:31:05      Batch-stream 2  -- ABORT command queued  --
                          Job TEST09 Req #132 for HURLEY [10,2345]
                           OPERATIONS WAS INSTRUCTED TO DO SO BY user HURLEY
                            with Noerror-processing
            OPR>
            12:31:17      Batch-stream 2  -- End --
                          Job TEST09 Req #132 for HURLEY [10,2345]
                          -- Job Aborted by Operator --
            OPR>

        2.  Use the ABORT command to abort a line printer  job  currently
            printing on printer 1.

            OPR>ABORT PRINTER 1<RET>

            OPR>
            13:24:56      Printer 1  -- Aborting --
                          Job BATCH1 Req #37 for HOVSEPIAN [27,3113]
            OPR>
            13:25:12      Printer 1  -- End --
                          Job BATCH1 Req #37 for HOVSEPIAN [27,3113]
                          -- Job Aborted by Operator --
            OPR>






                                    2-4
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ALIGN


   2.2  ALIGN




   Function

        The ALIGN command prints a "forms-alignment" file  repeatedly  on
        the line printer so that you can align the paper.

        You may have to align special forms for a particular line-printer
        job,  such  as  payroll  checks  or  invoices.  The ALIGN command
        allows you to adjust the forms and the line printer as many times
        as necessary to print the job correctly.


   Format

        OPR>ALIGN keyword nn /switch (or) argument<RET>


   Keyword

        PRINTER nn         specifies the  line  printer  (output  device)
                           unit  number  (nn)  that  will print the forms
                           alignment file (for example, 0 for LPT0, 1 for
                           LPT1,  and  so  forth).   You must specify the
                           PRINTER keyword and the unit number.


   Switches

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.

        /PAUSE:nnnn        specifies the time in seconds (nnnn) that  the
                           line  printer  waits  between  repeats  of the
                           particular print  job.   The  default  of  the
                           /PAUSE switch is 10 seconds.

        /REPEAT-COUNT:nnnn

                           specifies the number of  times  to  print  the
                           file   (starting  from  the  beginning).   The
                           default value of the /REPEAT-COUNT is 25.

        /STOP              specifies that normal printing be resumed  and
                           stops  the  alignment  of  forms  on  the line
                           printer.
                                    2-5
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ALIGN


   Argument

        alignment-filespec

                           specifies a file to be  printed  for  aligning
                           the  forms.  The default file specification is
                           SYS:formsname.ALP, where formsname is the name
                           of  the  form  to  be aligned, such as NARROW.
                           This  alignment  file  has  a  format  of  one
                           printed page of output that can be repeated on
                           the line printer so that  you  can  align  the
                           paper.


   Restrictions

        If you specify the ALIGN command and the alignment file cannot be
        found, the following error message appears:

             hh:mm:ss        Printer n  -- Alignment Error --
                        Cannot read ALIGN file 'filespec'

        If you specify the ALIGN command with the /STOP switch while  the
        print request is printing, the following error message appears:

             hh:mm:ss        Printer n  -- /STOP Illegal --
                        Alignment not in Progress

        If you specify  the  ALIGN  command  while  an  alignment  is  in
        progress, the following error message appears:

             hh:mm:ss        Printer n  -- Alignment already in Progress --


   Examples

        1.  Specify line printer 0 in the ALIGN  command  to  align  some
            special forms and specify a repeat-count of 15.

            OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 0 /REPEAT-COUNT:15<RET>
            OPR>
            10:12:07         Printer 0  -- Alignment Scheduled --
            OPR>










                                    2-6
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ALIGN


        2.  Specify line  printer  0  in  the  ALIGN  command  for  forms
            alignment  with the use of the alignment file PAYCHK.ALP.  By
            the default  values  of  the  /REPEAT-COUNT  and  the  /PAUSE
            switches,  the ALIGN command repeats the file 25 times with a
            pause of 10 seconds between repeats.

            OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 0 PAYCHK.ALP<RET>
            OPR>
            09:34:12        Printer 0  -- Alignment Scheduled --
            OPR>

        3.  Specify line  printer  3  in  the  ALIGN  command  for  forms
            alignment  with  a  pause of 30 seconds between repeats.  The
            forms are aligned after one repeat and you stop the alignment
            of forms on line printer 3.

            OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 3 /PAUSE:30<RET>
            OPR>
            10:34:03        Printer 3  -- Alignment Scheduled --

            OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 3 /STOP<RET>
            OPR>
            10:38:29        Printer 3  -- Alignment Discontinued --
            OPR>





























                                    2-7
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 BACKSPACE


   2.3  BACKSPACE




   Function

        The BACKSPACE command reprints pages in the file currently  being
        printed on the line printer.

        You may have to backspace a file that is currently being  printed
        on  the  line printer, if the forms become jammed in the printing
        mechanism.  The BACKSPACE command allows  you  to  backspace  the
        print  file  so  that  the  pages of the file that were jammed or
        incorrectly printed can be repeated.


   Format

        OPR>BACKSPACE keyword nn /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        PRINTER nn         specifies the  line  printer  (output  device)
                           unit  number  of  the  line  printer that will
                           backspace the  file  currently  being  printed
                           (for  example,  0 for LPT0, 1 for LPT1, and so
                           forth).  You must  specify  the  unit  number;
                           there is no default.


   Switches

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.













                                    2-8
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 BACKSPACE


        You must specify one of the following switches:

        /COPIES:nnnn       specifies the number of additional  copies  to
                           be  printed.   The number you specify is added
                           to the number of copies that the  user  queued
                           with  the  PRINT  command.   For example, if a
                           user issues the command:

                                PRINT FOO.BAR/COPIES:25

                           and  you  issue  the  BACKSPACE  command  with
                           /COPIES:10  while  FOO.BAR is being printed on
                           the line printer, the total number  of  copies
                           printed will be 35.

        /FILE              specifies that one file be backspaced  when  a
                           multi-file  PRINT  request has been given by a
                           user.  For  example,  if  a  user  issues  the
                           command:

                                PRINT FOO1.BAR,FOO2.BAR,FOO3.BAR

                           and you issue the BACKSPACE command with /FILE
                           while  FOO3.BAR  is  being printed on the line
                           printer, FOO2.BAR will be printed again.

        /PAGES:nnnn        specifies the number of pages to be backspaced
                           for  the file that is currently being printed.
                           The  /PAGES  switch  is  the  default  of  the
                           BACKSPACE  command.   If  you  do  not specify
                           either the /COPIES or the /FILE  switch,  then
                           you  must  specify  the  /PAGES  switch.   The
                           number  you  specify  (nnnn)  refers  to   the
                           physical number of pages and not to the number
                           of disk pages used for storing the file.


   Examples

        1.  Specify line printer 0 in the BACKSPACE  command  to  add  an
            additional 15 copies to a print request of 15 copies.

            OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 0 /COPIES:15<RET>
            OPR>

            13:43:53        Printer 0  -- Backspaced 15 Copies --
            OPR>






                                    2-9
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 BACKSPACE


        2.  Specify line printer 2 in the BACKSPACE command to  backspace
            one file from the file currently being printed.

            OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 2 /FILE<RET>
            OPR>
            11:34:23        Printer 2  -- Backspaced 1 File --
            OPR>

        3.  Specify line printer 1 in the BACKSPACE command to  backspace
            12  pages  from the page currently being printed because of a
            paper jam.

            OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 1 /PAGE:12<RET>
            OPR>
            10:23:50        Printer 1  -- Backspaced 12 Pages --
            OPR>





































                                    2-10
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   CANCEL


   2.4  CANCEL




   Function

        The CANCEL command enables you to cancel the following requests:

         o  active or waiting job requests

         o  tape or structure mount requests

         o  event requests

        The system assigns request numbers to all user requests.  The OPR
        command  SHOW  QUEUES displays the requests, the request numbers,
        and the names of the users who submitted the jobs.  To  cancel  a
        specific  request,  supply a request number for the argument.  To
        cancel all requests from a particular user, supply the user's PPN
        for the argument.


   Format

        OPR>CANCEL keyword argument<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-REQUEST      cancels active or waiting batch job requests.

        CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST

                           cancels  active  or  waiting  card  punch  job
                           requests.

        EVENT-REQUEST      cancels any of the following active or pending
                           events:

                            o  billing file closure (BILCLS)

                            o  OPR log file closure (OPRFIL)

                            o  usage file closure (USGFIL)

                            o  scheduled system shutdown (KSYS)

                            o  command file execution (TAKFIL)




                                    2-11
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   CANCEL


        MOUNT-REQUEST      cancels tape or structure mount requests.   If
                           you  specify  a  structure  name,  the  CANCEL
                           command  cancels   all   requests   for   that
                           structure.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST

                           cancels  active  or  waiting  paper-tape-punch
                           requests.

        PLOTTER-REQUEST    cancels active or waiting plotter requests.

        PRINTER-REQUEST    cancels  active  or   waiting   line   printer
                           requests.


   Arguments

        request-id-number  cancels a single request as specified  by  the
                           appropriate  keyword  for  a  particular user.
                           The canceled request can be active or waiting.

        [PPN]              cancels all requests described by the  keyword
                           and     made     by     the    given    user's
                           project-programmer   number    [PPN].     This
                           argument cannot be used with the MOUNT-REQUEST
                           keyword.

        *                  cancels  all  waiting  and   active   requests
                           described by the keyword.

        structure-name:    specifies a 1- to 4-character  disk  structure
                           name  that  a user has requested you to mount.
                           The name must  end  with  a  colon  (:).   The
                           CANCEL  MOUNT-REQUEST  command for a structure
                           name cancels all  waiting  requests  for  that
                           structure   mount.    (See   the  SHOW  QUEUES
                           MOUNT-REQUESTS command.)

                           You   must   cancel   dismounted    structures
                           separately,  using  the  request-id-number for
                           the argument.











                                    2-12
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   CANCEL


   Switches

        /REASON:comment    allows you to include a comment explaining why
                           the  request  has been canceled.  This comment
                           appears in the  batch  log  file  and  at  the
                           user's  terminal.   If  the  comment is longer
                           than one line, type a hyphen before you  press
                           RETURN  and  continue  the comment on the next
                           line.  If you press RETURN  immediately  after
                           the  colon, OPR responds with the instruction:
                           ENTER TEXT AND TERMINATE  WITH  ^Z.   You  can
                           then enter as many lines of text as necessary.
                           When your comment is complete, press <CTRL/Z>.


   Restriction

        You cannot cancel mount requests after the tape or structure  has
        been  mounted  on  the  device.  If you need to do this, you must
        ABORT the job and DISMOUNT the tape or structure.


   Examples

        1.  Use the CANCEL MOUNT-REQUEST command to cancel  all  requests
            for  mounting  the  structure  DSKX:.  All mount requests for
            this structure are currently waiting.

            OPR>CANCEL MOUNT-REQUEST DSKX: /REASON:<RET>
            Enter text and terminate with ^Z
            CANNOT FIND STRUCTURE DSKX<RET>
            THANK YOU - OPERATIONS^Z
            OPR>
            15:32:08        -- 3 Mount Requests Canceled --
            OPR>

        2.  Use the CANCEL BATCH-REQUEST for all batch requests from user
            [10,4733].

            OPR>CANCEL BATCH-REQUEST [10,4733]<RET>
            OPR>
            12:09:34        -- 2 Jobs Canceled --
            OPR>

        3.  Use  the  CANCEL  PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST  to   cancel   all
            requests from all users for that device.

            OPR>CANCEL PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH <RET>
            OPR>
            09:34:56        -- 7 Jobs Canceled --
            OPR>


                                    2-13
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   CANCEL


        4.  Use the CANCEL EVENT-REQUEST  command  to  cancel  a  pending
            ORION log file closure.

            OPR>SHOW QUEUES EVENTS<RET>
            OPR>
            16:06:19        -- System Queues Listing --

            Event Queue:
              Type     Req#       Expiration             Description
            --------  ------  ------------------  -----------------------
              BILCLS      20  19-Nov-88 16:59:59  Prime time rates end
              OPRFIL     282  19-Nov-88 18:00:00  ORION log file closure
              USGFIL      42  19-Nov-88 23:59:30  Usage file closure
              OPRFIL      34  20-Nov-88  0:00:00  ORION log file closure
              BILCLS      12  20-Nov-88  7:59:59  Discount rates end
            * KSYS        21  28-Nov-88  0:00:00  Debug new monitor
            There are 6 events in the queue (1 in progress)

            OPR>CANCEL EVENT-REQUEST 282
            OPR>
            16:06:44         -- 1 Job Canceled --
































                                    2-14
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   CLOSE


   2.5  CLOSE




   Function

        The CLOSE command closes the current ORION log file, renames  it,
        and  creates a new log file.  The command arguments enable you to
        specify a date and time to close the ORION log file.

        The ORION log file, OPERAT.LOG, records all OPR-to-ORION commands
        and  transactions  performed at the operator's console.  When you
        issue  the  CLOSE  command,  OPR  transfers  these  commands  and
        transactions  to  the ORNLOG.nnn file and clears the buffer file,
        OPERAT.LOG.  You can then print the ORNLOG.nnn file to  obtain  a
        hard-copy of all the operating processes for a given time period.
        OPERAT.LOG  is  now  open  for  more  OPR-to-ORION  commands  and
        transactions.

        You may choose a name other than OPERAT.LOG  for  the  ORION  log
        file at GALGEN time.  See the TOPS-10 Software Installation Guide
        for more information about GALGEN.


   Format

        OPR>CLOSE keyword argument<RET>


   Keyword

        LOG                closes the ORION log  file  that  was  created
                           when ORION was started.  You must include this
                           keyword.  You  must  use  the  ENABLE  LOGGING
                           command  for  the  logging  facility to occur.
                           Use the DISABLE LOGGING command  to  stop  the
                           logging  facility.  For more information about
                           enabling and disabling the  logging  facility,
                           see the ENABLE and DISABLE commands.


   Arguments

        NOW                closes the ORION log file immediately.

        +hh:mm:ss          closes the ORION log file in number of  hours,
                           minutes, and seconds that you specify from the
                           current time.  The time must be at least  five
                           minutes from the current time.



                                    2-15
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   CLOSE


        hh:mm:ss           closes the ORION log  file  at  the  time  you
                           enter for hh:mm:ss.

        dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss

                           closes the ORION log file on the  day,  month,
                           year, and time that you enter.

        DAILY hh:mm:ss     closes the ORION log file  every  day  at  the
                           time you enter.

        EVERY "day" hh:mm:ss

                           closes the ORION log file every  week  on  the
                           day  and time that you enter.  "Day" specifies
                           a particular day of the week.


   Example

   Use the CLOSE command to close the ORION log file and open a  new  log
   file automatically.

   OPR>CLOSE LOG NOW<RET>
   OPR>
   15:10:33  Event OPRFIL queued, request #426
   OPR>
   15:10:34  Log file DSKA:OPERAT.LOG[3,3] renamed to DSKA:OPERAT.001[3,3]
   OPR>
























                                    2-16
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  CONTINUE


   2.6  CONTINUE




   Function

        The CONTINUE command continues the following requests  that  were
        stopped using the STOP command:

         o  input/output device requests

         o  batch stream requests

         o  FAL stream requests

         o  NQC stream requests


   Format

        OPR>CONTINUE keyword nn /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       continues the specified batch stream (or range
                           of  batch  streams).   A  batch  stream  is  a
                           pseudo-terminal that interacts with the system
                           to execute a batch job.

        CARD-PUNCH         continues the specified card-punch  (or  range
                           of such devices).

        FAL-STREAM         continues a specified FAL stream or  range  of
                           FAL streams.  You may not use the /NODE switch
                           with this keyword.

        NQC-STREAM         continues a specified NQC stream or  range  of
                           NQC streams.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   continues the specified  paper-tape-punch  (or
                           range of such devices).

        PLOTTER            continues the specified plotter (or  range  of
                           such devices).

        PRINTER            continues the specified line-printer (or range
                           of such devices).

        READER             continues the specified card-reader (or  range
                           of such devices).

                                    2-17
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  CONTINUE


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies the stream number of the batch, NQC,
                           or  FAL  stream  to  be continued, or the unit
                           number of the  input/output  device  that  has
                           been  temporarily stopped.  You must specify a
                           stream/unit number.

        n:m                specifies a range of stream/unit numbers.  You
                           can  specify  this  range  instead of a single
                           stream/unit number.  The colon  must  separate
                           the   two   numbers.   The  n  represents  the
                           low-order number  and  the  m  represents  the
                           high-order number.


   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies a remote node for which the  command
                           will  be  effective.   For example, to specify
                           the node named KL1026, use  /NODE:KL1026.   If
                           you do not specify a node identifier, your own
                           node is the default.


   Examples

        1.  Use the CONTINUE command to continue the card reader after it
            was stopped to prevent a card-reader jam.

            OPR>CONTINUE READER 0<RET>
            OPR>
            09:23:19        Reader 0  -- Continued --
            OPR>

        2.  Use the CONTINUE command to continue a batch stream that  was
            previously stopped.

            OPR>CONTINUE BATCH-STREAM 2<RET>
            OPR>
            12:10:12        Batch-stream 2   -- Continued --
            OPR>











                                    2-18
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  CONTINUE


        3.  Use the CONTINUE command to continue all line printers  after
            they were stopped temporarily.

            OPR>CONTINUE PRINTER 0:1<RET>
            OPR>
            11:40:23        Printer 0   -- Continued --
            OPR>
            11:40:24        Printer 1   -- Continued --
            OPR>












































                                    2-19
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             DEFINE FILE-ACCESS


   2.7  DEFINE FILE-ACCESS




   Function

        The  DEFINE  FILE-ACCESS  command  allows  you  to   define   FAL
        accessibility.   You  can  specify  the  default  [PPN]  for  FAL
        connections, as well as a list of PPNs  or  nodes  that  are  not
        allowed to establish FAL connections.


   Format

        OPR>DEFINE FILE-ACCESS argument<RET>


   Arguments

        DEFAULT-PPN [PPN]

                           specifies a [PPN] to be used if the user  does
                           not   include   one   when  initiating  a  FAL
                           connection.

        REJECTION-LIST node name [PPN]

        specifies nodes or [PPN]s that may not establish FAL connections.


   Examples

     1.  Use the DEFINE FILE-ACCESS command to reject all FAL connections
         for [1,2].

         OPR>DEFINE FILE-ACCESS REJECTION-LIST [1,2]
         OPR>
         11:00:47     -- Rejection list defined for all FAL-Streams --
         OPR>

     2.  Use the DEFINE FILE-ACCESS command to  use  [377777,377777]  for
         FAL connections if no PPN is given.

         OPR>DEFINE FILE-ACCESS DEFAULT-PPN [377777,377777]
         OPR>
         11:08:06     -- Default network PPN defined for all FAL-Streams --
         OPR>





                                    2-20
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE


   2.8  DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE




   Function

        The DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE command  allows  you  to  define  remote
        queue names for NQC streams.


   Format

        OPR>DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE queue REMOTE node object unit<RET>


   Arguments

        queue              specifies the queue name you are defining.

        REMOTE             specifies that the destination node is  remote
                           from your node.  LOCAL is not implemented.

        node               specifies the destination node  to  which  the
                           device is attached.

        object             specifies the type of device.  The object must
                           be PRINTER or PLOTTER.

        unit               specifies the device unit number or name.  The
                           default  unit  is  the  generic  print or plot
                           queue.


   Example

        Use the DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE  command  to  define  a  new  remote
        network queue.

        OPR>DEFINE NODE JUNIPR SERVER
        OPR>
        11:17:49     -- Define for node JUNIPR accepted --
        OPR>

        OPR>DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE LPS40$QUEUE REMOTE JUNIPR PRINTER 0
        OPR>
        11:26:20     -- Define for network queue LPS40$QUEUE accepted --
        OPR>





                                    2-21
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                DEFINE NODE


   2.9  DEFINE NODE




   Function

        The DEFINE  NODE  command  allows  you  to  specify  one  of  the
        following:

         o  A destination server node for NQC streams

         o  A printer on a LAT server

         o  A DN60 node to perform IBM communications


   NQC Stream Format

        OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name SERVER<RET>


   NQC Stream Arguments

        node-name          specifies the name of the destination node.

        SERVER             specifies that the node is for NQC streams.


   LAT-SERVER Format

        OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name LAT-SERVER /NODE-NAME:name /switch<RET>


   LAT-SERVER Arguments

        node-name          specifies the destination node name of the LAT
                           server.

        LAT-SERVER         specifies that the node is a LAT server with a
                           printer.


   LAT-SERVER Switches

        /NODE-NAME         specifies the name  of  the  LAT-SERVER  node.
                           This switch is always necessary.

        /PORT-NAME         specifies the port name on the LAT-SERVER.

        /SERVICE-NAME      specifies the name of the printer service  you
                           request on the LAT-SERVER.

                                    2-22
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                DEFINE NODE


   IBM Communications Formats

        OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name station mode port line /switch<RET>

        OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name station mode CPU n DL10-PORT n -<RET>
        LINE n /switch<RET>

        OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name station mode CPU n DTE n LINE n -<RET>
        /switch<RET>


   IBM Communications Arguments

        node-name          specifies a one- to six-character name  of  an
                           IBM remote station.

        station            specifies  a  remote  station   type.    Valid
                           stations are:

                           2780

                           3780

                           HASP

                           The HASP multileaving remote  station  is  the
                           default type.

        mode               specifies a host  or  a  remote  station  with
                           which  the  IBM node is to communicate.  Valid
                           communication modes are:

                           EMULATION      specifies a host.

                           TERMINATION    specifies a remote station.

                           TERMINATION  is  the  default   communications
                           mode.

        port               specifies the port number from the  front  end
                           to the TOPS-10 host.

        line               specifies the line number from the  front  end
                           to  the  modem  communicating  with the remote
                           site.

        CPU n              specifies which CPU is to communicate.






                                    2-23
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                DEFINE NODE


        DL10-PORT n
         or
        DTE n              specifies which device is to communicate.

        LINE n             specifies the line number from the  front  end
                           to  the  modem  communicating  with the remote
                           site.

        After you specify a node name and type, you can use the SET  NODE
        command  to change the default parameters for the node.  For more
        information about IBM communications software,  see  the  TOPS-10
        IBM Emulation/Termination Manual.


   IBM Communications Switches

        /SIGNON-REQUIRED   specifies that the node  must  send  a  signon
                           card when starting up or starting a job.  This
                           is the default.

        /NO-SIGNON-REQUIRED

                           specifies that the node does not have to  send
                           a signon card.


   Restrictions

        For a KL10, the port number can be either 11 (for DTE1), 12  (for
        DTE2),  or  13  (for  DTE3).   For a KS10, the port number can be
        either 10 (for KMC/DMC line 0) or 11 (for KMC/DMC line  1).   For
        DL10s,  the  port numbers are in a range from 0 through 7.  Never
        use port 10 on a KL10.

        For a KL10, the line number must be from 0 to 5; for a KS10,  the
        line number must be either 0 or 1.

        If you specify a port number other than 11, 12, or 13, or a  line
        number  greater  than  5,  either of the following error messages
        appears:

             ?  First nonspace character is not a digit

             ?  Invalid character in number









                                    2-24
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                DEFINE NODE


   Examples

        1.  Use the DEFINE NODE command to define a  network  server  for
            NQC streams.

            OPR>DEFINE NODE JUNIPR SERVER
            OPR>
            11:17:49     -- Define for node JUNIPR accepted --
            OPR>

        2.  Use the DEFINE NODE command to define  a  printer  on  a  LAT
            server.

            OPR>DEFINE NODE TLN03 LAT-SERVER/NODE:L12/PORT:LN03
            OPR>
            11:32:31     -- Define for Node TLN03 Accepted --
            OPR>

        3.  Use the DEFINE NODE command to define IBM communications node
            IBM2.

            OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM2 HASP EMULATION 11 0<RET>
            OPR>
            09:18:34     -- Define for Node IBM2 Accepted --
            OPR>

        4.  Use the DEFINE NODE command to define a remote station as  an
            IBM 3780 termination node to communicate from the host.

            OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM3 3780 TERMINATION 12 1<RET>
            OPR>
            15:32:09     -- Define for Node IBM3 Accepted --
            OPR>

        5.  Use the DEFINE NODE  command  to  define  IBM  communications
            nodes IBM5 and IBM3 on an SMP system.

            OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM5 2780 EMULATION CPU 2 DTE 1 LINE 2<RET>
            OPR>
            10:46:03         --  Define for node IBM5 accepted  --
            OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM3 2780 EMULATION CPU 1 DL10-PORT 0 -<RET>
            LINE 0<RET>
            OPR>
            10:47:23         --  Define for node IBM3 accepted  --
            OPR>








                                    2-25
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  DISABLE


   2.10  DISABLE




   Function

        The DISABLE command turns off  (or  stops)  the  features  listed
        below.

         o  Scheduling of jobs on specified CPUs.

         o  The ORION logging facility for recording  OPR/ORION  commands
            and transactions.

         o  Output display of messages.

         o  Queue requests so  that  users  cannot  request  jobs  to  be
            processed on certain types of devices.

         o  Structure and  volume  recognition  for  structure  and  tape
            mounts.


   Format

        OPR>DISABLE keyword argument /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        JOB-SCHEDULING     removes a specified CPU from the  system  pool
                           of  available  resources.  The CPU may perform
                           I/O, but it does not schedule user jobs.

        LOGGING            disables the centralized logging  facility  of
                           ORION.    (This  facility  logs  all  messages
                           passing  through  the  operating  system   and
                           stores  these  messages  in  a log file.) When
                           this  facility  is  disabled,  there  are   no
                           records  kept of the messages and interactions
                           between ORION and the  system.   However,  the
                           CTY shows all messages and interactions if you
                           have  not  DISABLEd  the   OUTPUT-DISPLAY   of
                           ALL-MESSAGES  at the CTY.  This keyword has no
                           additional arguments or switches.

        OUTPUT-DISPLAY     disables the display of specified messages  on
                           your  console.   The  message  types  are  the
                           arguments and switches to this keyword.

        QUEUES             disables all users from making queue  requests
                           for the specified devices.
                                    2-26
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  DISABLE


        STRUCTURE-RECOGNITION

                           specifies that the system should not read  the
                           home blocks of all volumes of a structure when
                           it is mounted on a disk  drive.   The  DISABLE
                           STRUCTURE-RECOGNITION   command   affects  all
                           structures to be  mounted,  but  it  does  not
                           affect currently mounted structures.

        VOLUME-RECOGNITION

                           disables volume recognition for labeled  tapes
                           and structures.  Volume recognition allows you
                           to  mount  labeled  tapes  and  structures  on
                           tape/disk  drives  without  having to identify
                           the tape or structure  to  the  system.   When
                           volume  recognition  is  disabled  for  a disk
                           drive (or all disk drives), you must  use  the
                           RECOGNIZE  command  to  force  the  system  to
                           recognize the mounted structure.  When  volume
                           recognition  is  disabled for a tape drive (or
                           all tape drives), you must use  the  RECOGNIZE
                           command  to  force the system to recognize the
                           mounted labeled tape.  (The  IDENTIFY  command
                           is   for  unlabeled  tape  mounts.)  For  more
                           information, see the  IDENTIFY  and  RECOGNIZE
                           commands.


   JOB-SCHEDULING Arguments

        ONLY CPUn          removes the specified CPU from the system pool
                           of  available  resources,  and  enables  other
                           currently disabled CPUs (n = CPU number).

        CPUn               removes the specified CPU from the system pool
                           of  available  resources,  but does not affect
                           other CPUs (n = CPU number).


   OUTPUT-DISPLAY Arguments

        ALL-MESSAGES       disables the display of all operator,  system,
                           user, and error messages on your OPR terminal.
                           ALL-MESSAGES is enabled by default.

        BATCH-MESSAGES     disables the  display  of  messages  generated
                           during batch job processing.

        CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                           disables the display of messages generated  by
                           card-punch jobs.
                                    2-27
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  DISABLE


        CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES

                           disables the display of messages generated  by
                           card  reader jobs or batch jobs submitted with
                           the /READER switch.

        CATALOG-MESSAGES   disables the display of messages generated  by
                           changes to the system tape and disk catalogs.

        CONFIG-MESSAGES    disables the display of messages generated  by
                           changes to the system configuration.

        EVENT-MESSAGES     disables the display of messages generated  by
                           special  events  such as billing file closure,
                           ORION  log  file  closure,  scheduled   system
                           shutdown,  or  Usage  accounting file closure.
                           See the SHOW QUEUES EVENTS  command  for  more
                           information on these event types.

        FAL-MESSAGES       disables the  display  of  messages  generated
                           during network file access requests.

        LCP-MESSAGES       disables the display of messages generated  by
                           the LAT Control Program.

        MOUNT-MESSAGES     disables the  display  of  messages  generated
                           when  users  request tape and structure mounts
                           and dismounts.

        NCP-MESSAGES       disables the display of messages generated  by
                           the DECnet Network Control Program (NCP).

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                           disables the display of messages generated  by
                           paper-tape-punch jobs.

        PLOTTER-MESSAGES   disables the display of messages generated  by
                           plotter jobs.

        PRINTER-MESSAGES   disables the display of messages generated  by
                           line printer jobs.

        QUOTA MESSAGES     disables the display of messages generated  by
                           changes to the system catalogs.








                                    2-28
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  DISABLE


        READER-MESSAGES    disables the display of messages generated  by
                           card reader jobs.

        USER-MESSAGES      disables the  display  of  messages  generated
                           when  users  make  requests to you through the
                           PLEASE program.


   QUEUES Arguments

        ALL-INPUT-OUTPUT   disables      all      batch,      card-punch,
                           paper-tape-punch,  plotter,  and printer queue
                           requests.

        BATCH              disables all batch queue requests.

        CARD-PUNCH         disables all card-punch queue requests.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   disables all paper-tape-punch queue requests.

        PLOTTER            disables all plotter queue requests.

        PRINTER            disables all printer queue requests.


   VOLUME-RECOGNITION Arguments

        DISK-DRIVES        disables  volume  recognition  for  all   disk
                           drives.

        TAPE-DRIVES        disables  volume  recognition  for  all   tape
                           drives.

        disk-drive-name:   disables volume recognition on  the  specified
                           disk  drive.  You must include the colon.  The
                           name is in  the  format  of  xxcn:,  where  xx
                           represents  the  device  type  (RP for RP04 or
                           RP07, and RN for RP20); c represents the  disk
                           controller  identification;  and n is the disk
                           drive number.

        tape-drive-name:   disables volume recognition on  the  specified
                           tape  drive.  You must include the colon.  The
                           name is in the format of MTxn:, where x is the
                           tape  controller  identification  and n is the
                           tape drive number.







                                    2-29
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  DISABLE


   OUTPUT-DISPLAY Switches

        /INFORMATION-MESSAGES

                           disables   the   display   of    informational
                           messages,  such as errors that occur due to an
                           application problem.  Messages that require no
                           operator response are considered informational
                           messages.

        /JOB-MESSAGES      disables the display of messages  that  notify
                           you  when  a  device  or stream begins or ends
                           processing a job request.

        /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES

                           disables the display of messages  that  notify
                           you  of action to be performed as requested by
                           a user or a  processing  job.   Messages  that
                           require  a  response, such as PLEASE messages,
                           will be displayed.

                           If you do not specify one of  these  switches,
                           all  three  types  of  messages are assumed by
                           default.


   Examples

        1.  You have scheduled a system shutdown in two  hours  and  your
            queues have approximately two hours' worth of jobs left to be
            processed.  You disable queue requests so that the queues can
            be emptied before the system shutdown.

            OPR>DISABLE QUEUES<RET>

            OPR>
            16:34:03     -- System Queue's Entry Processing Disabled --

            OPR>













                                    2-30
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  DISABLE


        2.  You  have  started  OPR  on  a  terminal  to   display   only
            information  messages.   By default, when OPR is started, all
            messages are displayed.   Therefore,  you  must  disable  all
            messages except information messages.

            .R OPR<RET>

            OPR>DISABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY ALL-MESSAGES/JOB-MESSAGES<RET>

            OPR>
            08:45:18     -- OUTPUT DISPLAY of OPR Modified --

            OPR>DISABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY ALL-MESSAGES/OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES<RET>

            OPR>
            08:46:07     -- OUTPUT DISPLAY of OPR Modified --

            OPR>

        3.  You DISABLE volume recognition on tape  drive  MTA2:   before
            you mount and prepare a scratch tape to be initialized.

            OPR>DISABLE VOLUME-RECOGNITION MTA2:<RET>

            OPR>
            14:05:12     Device MTA2 -- Volume Recognition is Disabled --

            OPR>

        4.  Use   the   DISABLE   JOB-SCHEDULING   command   to   disable
            job-scheduling on CPU1.

            OPR>DISABLE JOB-SCHEDULING CPU1<RET>

            OPR>
            16:08:02    -- Job scheduling disabled for specified CPU(s) --
            OPR>
















                                    2-31
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  DISMOUNT


   2.11  DISMOUNT




   Function

        The DISMOUNT command  allows  you  to  dismount  (and  remove)  a
        structure  currently  mounted on a disk drive, or a magnetic tape
        currently mounted on a tape drive.

        When  you  issue  the  DISMOUNT  command  for  a  structure,  the
        structure is queued for removal.  If other users have mounted the
        structure,  a  message  appears  listing  statistics  about   the
        structure  and  asks  you  to  respond  with  ABORT to cancel the
        dismount, or PROCEED to permit the dismount.

        When you issue the DISMOUNT command for a tape  drive,  the  tape
        rewinds  itself completely from the take-up wheel, providing that
        no user is currently using the tape.  If a user is using the tape
        on  the  specified  tape  drive,  OPR  will  reject  the DISMOUNT
        command.


   Format

        OPR>DISMOUNT keyword argument /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        STRUCTURE          specifies a disk structure  currently  mounted
                           on a disk drive.

        TAPE-DRIVE         specifies a tape drive  that  has  a  magnetic
                           tape mounted and ready on it.

   Arguments

        structure-name:    specifies the logical name of the structure to
                           be  dismounted and removed.  The colon must be
                           included with the  structure  name  specified.
                           An example of a logical name is DSKC:.

        tape-drive-name:   specifies the logical name of the  tape  drive
                           which   currently  has  the  desired  tape  to
                           dismount on it.  The colon  must  be  included
                           with  the tape drive name.  The name is in the
                           format  of  MTxn:,  where  x   is   the   tape
                           controller  identification  and  n is the tape
                           drive  number.   For  example,  MTA0:   is   a
                           magtape device name.

                                    2-32
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  DISMOUNT


   Switches

        /NOCHECK           specifies  that  the  structure   is   to   be
                           dismounted   without  regard  to  the  current
                           status and/or users on  the  structure.   With
                           the /NOCHECK switch, the system does not check
                           the mount count of the structure or any  other
                           warning  conditions  and  you receive no error
                           messages.    The    dismount    is    executed
                           immediately.

        /REMOVE            specifies that the structure will be  removed.
                           With  the /REMOVE switch, the structure ceases
                           its   rotation   and   comes   to    a    stop
                           automatically,  so that you can remove it from
                           the disk drive.  Without the specification  of
                           the  /REMOVE  switch,  you must press the STOP
                           button on the drive to  stop  and  remove  the
                           structure.


   Restrictions

        When you issue a DISMOUNT command for a structure that is in  the
        Active  Swapping  List,  System  Search  List,  Crash  Dump List,
        contains the STRLST.SYS file, or has the [3,3] UFD directory, you
        receive  a  warning  message.  This message allows you to respond
        with either ABORT to cancel the dismount, or PROCEED  to  proceed
        with  the dismount.  In addition, this warning message appears if
        any other user has  requested  this  structure  mount  (refer  to
        Example 1).

        If there are other users who have mounted the structure  and  you
        really  wish  to remove the structure, it is recommended that you
        send a message to all users of the system before you respond with
        PROCEED,  to  allow  all  users  to  complete their tasks on that
        structure.

        You can  use  the  LOCK  command  to  prevent  other  users  from
        accessing  the  structure.   See the LOCK command description for
        more information.












                                    2-33
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  DISMOUNT


   Examples

        1.  Use the DISMOUNT command to dismount the structure MISC:.

            OPR>DISMOUNT STRUCTURE MISC:<RET>

            OPR>
            16:29:30  <5>  Device MISC:  -- Problem removing structure --
            Mount count = 1
            Type 'RESPOND <number> ABORT' to not dismount structure MISC.
            Type 'RESPOND <number> PROCEED' to dismount structure MISC
            anyway.

            OPR>RESPOND 5 PROCEED<RET>

            OPR>
            16:01:18          -- Structure MISC Dismounted --
                              From Unit: RBA2

            OPR>

        2.  Use  the  DISMOUNT  command  to  dismount  the  tape   volume
            currently mounted on tape drive MTA0:.

            OPR>DISMOUNT TAPE-DRIVE MTA0:<RET>

            OPR>
            16:45:01        Device MTA0  -- Unloading --

            OPR>























                                    2-34
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ENABLE


   2.12  ENABLE




   Function

        The ENABLE command turns  on  (or  starts)  the  features  listed
        below.

         o  It enables you to turn processors on-line in a multiprocessor
            system.

         o  It enables the ORION logging facility for recording OPR/ORION
            commands and transactions.

         o  It enables output display  of  messages  previously  disabled
            with the DISABLE command.

         o  It enables queue requests so that users can request  jobs  to
            be processed.

         o  It enables structure and volume recognition for structure and
            tape mounts.

         o  It enables timesharing.


   Format

        OPR>ENABLE keyword argument /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        JOB-SCHEDULING     adds the specified CPU to the system  pool  of
                           available  resources.  The arguments ALL, ONLY
                           CPUn and CPUn specify which CPUs will schedule
                           jobs.     JOB-SCHEDULING   applies   only   to
                           Symmetric Multi-Processing systems.  To remove
                           a  CPU  from  the  system  pool  of  available
                           resources,  see  the  DISABLE   JOB-SCHEDULING
                           command.

        QUEUES             enables queue requests on the specified  input
                           or output devices.







                                    2-35
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ENABLE


        LOGGING            enables the ORION logging facility.  The ORION
                           logging  facility  logs  all  messages passing
                           through the operating system and stores  these
                           messages in a log file.  LOGGING keeps records
                           of the messages and interactions between ORION
                           and the system.  This keyword has no arguments
                           or switches.

        OUTPUT-DISPLAY     enables the  display  of  specified  types  of
                           messages  on your terminal.  The message types
                           are  the  arguments  and  switches   to   this
                           keyword.

        QUEUE-REQUESTS     enables all  users  to  make  queue  requests.
                           With queue requests enabled, a user can submit
                           a batch or  card  reader  job,  a  card-punch,
                           paper-tape-punch,   plotter,   or   a  printer
                           request to the system.  This  keyword  has  no
                           arguments or switches.

        TIMESHARING        enables timesharing after a KSYS has occurred.
                           To cancel a pending KSYS event, use the CANCEL
                           EVENT-REQUEST command.  For information  about
                           setting  the  KSYS  time,  see  the  SET  KSYS
                           command.

        STRUCTURE-RECOGNITION

                           automatically mounts and makes  accessible  to
                           users the following structures:

                            o  spinning    structures     with     volume
                               recognition enabled

                            o  forcibly RECOGNIZED structures

                           The   ENABLE   STRUCTURE-RECOGNITION   command
                           affects all structures to be mounted.

        VOLUME-RECOGNITION

                           enables volume recognition for tapes and  disk
                           packs.  Volume recognition allows you to mount
                           labeled  tapes  and  structures  on  tape/disk
                           drives  without having to identify the tape or
                           structure to the  system  with  the  RECOGNIZE
                           command.  (See the RECOGNIZE command.)






                                    2-36
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ENABLE


   JOB-SCHEDULING Arguments

        ALL-CPUs           allows all available CPUs to schedule jobs.

        ONLY CPUn          allows only  the  specified  CPU  to  schedule
                           jobs, and disables all currently enabled CPUs.
                           (n = CPU number)

        CPUn               allows the specified CPU to schedule jobs.
                           (n = CPU number)


   OUTPUT-DISPLAY Arguments

        ALL-MESSAGES       displays all operator, system, user, and error
                           messages  on  your OPR terminal.  ALL-MESSAGES
                           is the default.

        BATCH-MESSAGES     displays messages generated during  batch  job
                           processing.

        CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                           displays  messages  generated  by   card-punch
                           jobs.

        CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES

                           displays messages  generated  by  card  reader
                           jobs  or batch jobs submitted with the /READER
                           switch.

        CATALOG-MESSAGES   displays messages generated by changes to  the
                           system catalog.

        CONFIG-MESSAGES    displays messages generated by changes to  the
                           system configuration.

        EVENT-MESSAGES     displays messages generated by special  events
                           such  as  billing file closure, ORION log file
                           closure, scheduled system shutdown,  or  Usage
                           accounting  file closure.  See the SHOW QUEUES
                           EVENTS command for more information  on  these
                           event types.

        FAL-MESSAGES       displays  messages  generated  during  network
                           file access requests.

        LCP-MESSAGES       displays messages generated by the LAT Control
                           Program.

        MOUNT-MESSAGES     displays messages generated when users request
                           tape and structure mounts and dismounts.
                                    2-37
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ENABLE


        NCP-MESSAGES       displays  messages  generated  by  the  DECnet
                           Network Control Program.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                           displays      messages      generated       by
                           paper-tape-punch jobs.

        PLOTTER-MESSAGES   displays messages generated by plotter jobs.

        PRINTER-MESSAGES   displays messages generated  by  line  printer
                           jobs.

        QUOTA-MESSAGES     displays messages generated by changes to  the
                           system catalogs.

        READER-MESSAGES    displays messages  generated  by  card  reader
                           jobs.

        USER-MESSAGES      displays messages generated  when  users  make
                           requests to you through the PLEASE program.

   QUEUES Arguments

        ALL-INPUT-OUTPUT   enables      all      batch,       card-punch,
                           paper-tape-punch,  plotter,  and printer queue
                           requests.

        BATCH              enables all batch queue requests.

        CARD-PUNCH         enables all card-punch queue requests.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   enables all paper-tape-punch queue requests.

        PLOTTER            enables all plotter queue requests.

        PRINTER            enables all printer queue requests.


   VOLUME-RECOGNITION Arguments

        DISK-DRIVES        enables volume recognition on all disk drives.

        TAPE-DRIVES        enables volume recognition on tape drives.

        disk-drive-name:   enables volume recognition  on  the  specified
                           disk  drive.  You must include the colon.  The
                           name  is  in  the  format  xxcn:,   where   xx
                           represents  the  device  type  (RP for RP04 or
                           RP07, and RN for RP20); c represents the  disk
                           controller  identification;  and n is the disk
                           drive number.

                                    2-38
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ENABLE


        tape-drive-name:   enables volume recognition  on  the  specified
                           tape  drive.  You must include the colon.  The
                           name is in the format MTxn:, where  x  is  the
                           tape  controller  identification  and n is the
                           tape drive number.

   OUTPUT-DISPLAY Switches

        /INFORMATION-MESSAGES

                           displays informational messages such as errors
                           that  occur  due  to  an  application problem.
                           Messages that require no operator response are
                           considered informational messages.

        /JOB-MESSAGES      displays  messages  that  notify  you  when  a
                           device  or  stream begins or ends processing a
                           job request.

        /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES

                           displays messages that notify you of action to
                           be  performed  as  requested  by  a  user or a
                           processing  job.   Messages  that  require   a
                           response,  such  as  PLEASE  messages, will be
                           displayed.

                           If you do not specify one of  these  switches,
                           all  three  types  of  messages are assumed by
                           default.
   Examples

        1.  You have previously disabled queue requests  to  allow  those
            requests  in  the  queues  to  be  processed  before  a shift
            turnover.  You can now enable queue requests.

            OPR>ENABLE QUEUES<RET>

            OPR>
            16:34:03       -- System Queue's Entry Processing Enabled --

            OPR>











                                    2-39
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ENABLE


        2.  You have started OPR on a  terminal  to  display  only  mount
            messages.   By default, when OPR is started, all messages are
            displayed.  Therefore, you must disable all messages and then
            enable mount messages.

            .R OPR<RET>

            OPR>DISABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY ALL-MESSAGES<RET>

            OPR>
            08:45:18       -- OUTPUT-DISPLAY of OPR Modified --

            OPR>ENABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY MOUNT-MESSAGES<RET>

            OPR>
            08:45:47       -- OUTPUT-DISPLAY of OPR Modified --

            OPR>

        3.  You ENABLE volume recognition on tape drive MTA2:  after  you
            have disabled volume recognition and initialized some scratch
            tapes.

            OPR>ENABLE VOLUME-RECOGNITION MTA2:<RET>

            OPR>
            15:45:12       Device MTA2 -- Volume Recognition is Enabled --

            OPR>

        4.  Use the ENABLE  JOB-SCHEDULING  command  to  enable  CPU1  to
            schedule jobs.

            OPR>ENABLE JOB-SCHEDULING CPU1<RET>
            OPR>
            15:54:23       -- Job Scheduling Enabled for Specified CPU(s) --

            OPR> 















                                    2-40
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ENTER


   2.13  ENTER




   Function

        The ENTER command allows you to work with the  following  command
        subsets:

         o  CATALOG

         o  CONFIG

         o  LCP (LAT Control Program)

         o  NCP (Network Control Program)

         o  QUOTA

        Each of the  above  has  its  own  set  of  commands.   For  more
        information  about  these  command subsets see Chapter 3.  If you
        are unfamiliar with a command subset, do not attempt  to  use  it
        until you have read the appropriate section of Chapter 3.

        To exit from a command subset  use  either  the  RETURN  or  EXIT
        commands.   The  RETURN  command  returns your job to OPR command
        level.  The EXIT command returns  your  job  to  monitor  command
        level.


   Format

        OPR>ENTER keyword<RET>


   Keywords

        CATALOG            enters the CATALOG command subset.

        CONFIG             enters the CONFIG command subset.

        LCP                enters the LCP command subset.

        NCP                enters the NCP command subset.

        QUOTA              enters the QUOTA command subset.






                                    2-41
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ENTER


   Examples

        1.  Type CATALOG to enter the CATALOG command subset.

            OPR>ENTER CATALOG<RET>

            CATALOG>

        2.  Type RETURN to return to OPR command level

            CATALOG>RETURN<RET>

            OPR>








































                                    2-42
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    EXIT


   2.14  EXIT




   Function

        The EXIT command allows you to exit OPR command level and  return
        to monitor command level.

        To return to OPR command level, you can use the monitor  command,
        CONTINUE, provided that you do not alter memory.  See the TOPS-10
        Operating System Commands Manual for more information  about  the
        CONTINUE command.


   Format

        OPR>EXIT<RET>


   Restriction

        Because OPR takes time to respond to some commands, the immediate
        action  of  the  EXIT  command may prevent you from seeing output
        from previously issued commands.  However, the processing of  the
        previous commands will not be interrupted when you EXIT from OPR.


   Examples

        1.  Use the EXIT command to  leave  OPR  and  return  to  monitor
            command level.

            OPR>EXIT<RET>

            .

        2.  After completing your task with commands that  do  not  alter
            memory, use the monitor command CONTINUE to return to OPR.

            .CONTINUE <RET>

            OPR>









                                    2-43
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                FORWARDSPACE


   2.15  FORWARDSPACE




   Function

        The FORWARDSPACE command  spaces  the  print  file  on  the  line
        printer in a forward direction, so that you can skip the printing
        of a job, file, or page(s).  The FORWARDSPACE command allows  you
        to  forwardspace  the  print  file so that you can save paper and
        print only what is needed as output.

        You may have to forwardspace a particular file that is  currently
        printing  on  the  line  printer if, for example, a user requires
        only a portion of some printed output.


   Format

        OPR>FORWARDSPACE keyword nn /switch<RET>


   Keyword

        PRINTER nn         specifies the line printer (output device) and
                           unit   number   to   forwardspace   the  forms
                           currently printing (for example, PRINTER 0 for
                           LPT0,  PRINTER 1 for LPT1, and so forth).  You
                           must specify  the  PRINTER  keyword  and  unit
                           number.


   Switches

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.












                                    2-44
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                FORWARDSPACE


        You must specify one of the following switches:

        /COPIES:nnnn       specifies the number of copies to  be  skipped
                           over  printing.   The  number  you  specify is
                           subtracted from the  number  that  was  queued
                           with  the  PRINT  command.   For example, if a
                           user issued the command:

                           PRINT FOO.BAR/COPIES:25

                           and you issue the  FORWARDSPACE  command  with
                           /COPIES:10  while  FOO.BAR  is printing on the
                           line  printer,  the  total  number  of  copies
                           printed will be 15.

        /FILE              specifies to  forwardspace  one  file  when  a
                           multifile  PRINT  request  has been given by a
                           user.  For  example,  if  a  user  issues  the
                           command:

                           PRINT FOO1.BAR,FOO2.BAR,FOO3.BAR

                           and you issue the  FORWARDSPACE  command  with
                           /FILE  while  FOO1.BAR is printing on the line
                           printer, FOO2.BAR starts printing on the  line
                           printer.   The remaining pages of FOO1.BAR are
                           skipped.

        /PAGES:nnnn        specifies  the   number   of   pages   to   be
                           forwardspaced  for  the file that is currently
                           being printed.  If you do not  specify  either
                           the /COPIES or the /FILE switch, then you must
                           specify the /PAGES  switch.   The  number  you
                           specify  (nnnn)  refers to the physical number
                           of pages and not to the number of  disk  pages
                           used to store the file.


   Examples

        1.  Specify line printer 0 for the FORWARDSPACE command  to  skip
            15 copies of a print request of 25 copies.

            OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 0 /COPIES:15<RET>

            OPR>
            12:34:34        Printer 0  -- Forward Spaced 15 Copies --

            OPR>




                                    2-45
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                FORWARDSPACE


        2.  Specify line printer  2  with  the  FORWARDSPACE  command  to
            forwardspace one file from the file currently printing.

            OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 2 /FILE<RET>

            OPR>
            13:21:09        Printer 2  -- Forward Spaced 1 File --

            OPR>


        3.  Use the FORWARDSPACE command to forwardspace  12  pages  from
            the  page  currently  printing on line printer 1 because of a
            user request.

            OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 1 /PAGE:12<RET>

            OPR>
            10:20:30        Printer 1  -- Forward Spaced 12 Pages --

            OPR>
































                                    2-46
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    HELP


   2.16  HELP




   Function

        The HELP command prints a paragraph of text about the OPR command
        you specify as the keyword to the HELP command.


   Format

        OPR>HELP keyword<RET>

        where keyword can be any available OPR command.


   Restrictions

        If you specify an invalid OPR command as a keyword with the  HELP
        command, OPR responds with:

        %No help available for "command"

        You can then press  <CTRL/H>  or  retype  the  HELP  command  and
        specify a correct OPR command as a keyword with HELP.

        If you do not specify any OPR command as a keyword  to  the  HELP
        command, OPR prints the text for the HELP command.


   Examples

        1.  Use the HELP command to get more information about HELP.

            OPR>HELP HELP<RET>

            The HELP command allows you to display the function,  format,
            arguments, and switches of any OPR command.

            The format is:

            HELP keyword

            where keyword can be any valid OPR command.







                                    2-47
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    HELP


            A list of OPR commands may  be  obtained  by  typing  "?"  in
            response to the OPR> prompt.

            OPR>? one of the following:
            ABORT       ALIGN        BACKSPACE       CANCEL      CLOSE
            CONTINUE    DEFINE       DISABLE         DISMOUNT    ENABLE
            ENTER       EXIT         FORWARDSPACE    HELP        HOLD
            IDENTIFY    LOCK         MODIFY          MOUNT       NEXT 
            PUSH        RECOGNIZE    RELEASE         REPORT      REQUEUE 
            RESPOND     RESTRICT     ROUTE           SEND        SET
            SHOW        SHUTDOWN     START           STOP        SUPPRESS
            TAKE        UNLOCK       UNRESTRICT      WAIT

                 or one of the following:

            CATALOG     CONFIG        LCP           NCP           QUOTA

            OPR>

        2.  Use the HELP  command  to  get  information  about  the  TAKE
            command.

                 OPR>HELP TAKE<RET>

            The TAKE command allows  you  to  execute  a  series  of  OPR
            commands from a specified command file.

            The format is:

                 TAKE filespec

            where filespec is the name of the command file,

            followed by one of these optional switches:

                      /DISPLAY
                      /NODISPLAY

            OPR>














                                    2-48
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    HOLD


   2.17  HOLD




   Function

        The HOLD command prevents specified batch or output requests from
        being processed.

        Use the RELEASE command to reschedule jobs that  have  been  held
        with the HOLD command.

        To examine jobs waiting in a queue to be processed, use the  SHOW
        QUEUES command.


   Format

        OPR>HOLD keyword argument<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-JOBS         holds one or more  jobs  in  the  batch  input
                           queue that are waiting to be processed.

        CARD-PUNCH-JOBS    holds one or  more  jobs  in  the  card  punch
                           output queue that are waiting to be processed.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS

                           holds one or more jobs in the paper-tape-punch
                           output queue that are waiting to be processed.

        PLOTTER-JOBS       holds one or more jobs in the  plotter  output
                           queue that are waiting to be processed.

        PRINTER-JOBS       holds one or more jobs  in  the  line  printer
                           output queue that are waiting to be processed.

   Arguments

        request-id-number  holds    the    job    specified    by     the
                           request-identification number.

        [PPN]              holds all jobs for  a  particular  user.   The
                           [PPN]  (project-programmer  number) identifies
                           the user.

        *                  holds all  types  of  jobs  specified  by  the
                           keyword for all users.

                                    2-49
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    HOLD


   Restrictions

        The HOLD command is effective only for the jobs currently waiting
        to  be  processed.  Any jobs submitted after the HOLD command was
        issued are not held.

        You cannot hold a job that is  currently  being  processed  in  a
        batch stream or on an output device.  If you need to stop the job
        from processing, use the STOP command.  For more information, see
        the STOP command description.


   Examples

        1.  HOLD a line printer job whose request-id-number is 127.  This
            job  will be rescheduled when you issue a RELEASE command for
            this job.

            OPR>HOLD PRINTER-JOBS 127<RET>

            OPR>
            10:54:07          -- 1 Job Held --

            OPR>

        2.  HOLD all card-punch jobs.

            OPR>HOLD CARD-PUNCH-JOBS <RET>

            OPR>
            11:34:35          -- 10 Jobs Held --

            OPR>

        3.  HOLD all batch jobs for user [27,5107].

            OPR>HOLD BATCH-JOBS [27,5107]<RET>

            OPR>
            12:20:32          -- 15 Jobs Held --

            OPR>











                                    2-50
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  IDENTIFY


   2.18  IDENTIFY




   Function

        The IDENTIFY command allows you to service tape mount requests by
        enabling you to:

         o  Satisfy a user tape mount request for an unlabeled tape.

         o  Assign a volume identification (volid)  for  a  user  who  is
            writing on an unlabeled or labeled tape.

        When a user issues a mount request for  an  unlabeled  tape,  you
        must  physically locate, mount, and prepare the requested tape on
        an available tape drive and then identify the tape mount  request
        to the tape drive.

        If you have volume recognition enabled and your installation uses
        labeled  tapes, you do not need to use the IDENTIFY command after
        you mount and ready a tape on a tape drive.


   Format

        OPR>IDENTIFY keyword argument<RET>


   Keyword

        MTxn:              specifies the physical tape drive unit,  where
                           x  is the tape controller identification and n
                           is the tape drive number.  You must specify  a
                           colon at the end of the unit number.


   Arguments

        REQUEST-ID nn      specifies that you are attempting to  use  the
                           tape     on    drive    MTxn:    to    satisfy
                           tape-mount-request number nn.

        VOLUME-ID volid    specifies the volume identifier (volid) of the
                           tape  volume  you  have  mounted  on  the tape
                           drive.  The volid can consist of from 1  to  6
                           alphanumeric   characters.    If   the   volid
                           contains      nonalphanumeric       characters
                           (characters  other  than  A  through  Z  and 0
                           through 9), the  volid  must  be  enclosed  in
                           double quotes.

                                    2-51
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  IDENTIFY


                                    NOTE

           If someone mounts a tape  and  you  do  not  know  its
           identity, you can use the RECOGNIZE command to display
           the volume identity  before  you  issue  the  IDENTIFY
           command.   For  more  information,  see  the RECOGNIZE
           command description.



   Example

        A user requests that you mount an unlabeled tape.  After the tape
        mount  request  appears,  you mount and prepare the tape and then
        identify the tape to the mount request.

        OPR>
        14:34:20          -- Magtape mount request #43 --
                        User: PERK   [10,5211] job# 27
                        Volume-set-name: MTA-DJ7222

                        Volume-ID   Write   Labels  Track  Density
                        ---------  -------  ------  -----  -------
                        M16Y73      Enabled  No       9     1600

        OPR>
        14:36:12        Device MTA2  -- Unlabeled Volume Mounted --
                        Density 1600 BPI, Write-Enabled

        OPR>IDENTIFY MTA2: REQUEST-ID 43<RET>

        OPR>
        14:36:15        Device MTA2  -- Volume M16Y73 Reassigned --
                        User: PERK [10,5211] Job# 27

        OPR>

















                                    2-52
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    LOCK


   2.19  LOCK




   Function

        The LOCK command prohibits  users  from  accessing  a  disk  file
        structure so that you can remove the structure from the system.

        If a timesharing job is  accessing  the  structure,  the  job  is
        refused  access  after  its  current program has completed.  If a
        batch job is accessing the  structure,  the  LOCK  command  takes
        effect after the batch job is completed.

        When the LOCK command takes effect,  the  structure  is  unloaded
        from the disk drive.

        See the UNLOCK command for information about reversing the action
        of the LOCK command.


   Format

        OPR>LOCK arguments /switch<RET>


   Arguments

        structure-name:    specifies a 1- to 4-character  structure  name
                           that  is  currently  known to the system.  The
                           structure must be mounted  and  on-line.   The
                           name must end with a colon(:).

        date-and-time      specifies an optional date and time  when  the
                           structure  will be LOCKed so that users cannot
                           access it.  The  date  is  in  the  format  of
                           "mm-dd-yy,"  where  mm is the month, dd is the
                           day, and yy is the year, separated by hyphens.
                           The time is in the format of "hh:mm," where hh
                           is the hour and mm is the  minutes,  separated
                           by  a colon.  The time is based on the 24-hour
                           clock.










                                    2-53
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    LOCK


   Switch

        /NOUNLOAD          specifies that the  disk  pack  is  to  remain
                           mounted  and  spinning  on the disk drive, but
                           the file structure is to be dismounted.   This
                           switch  is useful when you must perform a task
                           on the structure, such as refreshing  it  with
                           the  ONCE program, without users accessing the
                           disk pack.  If this switch is  not  specified,
                           the  structure  is  unloaded  (stops spinning)
                           from the disk drive.


   Restrictions

        If you specify a structure name not known to the system, you  get
        the following error message:

             ? No such device

        If you specify a structure name that is currently LOCKed, you get
        the following message:

             hh:mm:ss        --- Structure name: already LOCKed ---

        If you specify an optional date without a time, the time defaults
        to 00:00:00 (or the start of that date).

        If you specify an optional time without a date, the date defaults
        to  the  current  date.  If the time has already occurred for the
        current date, the time applies to the next day.


   Examples

        1.  Use the LOCK command to restrict all users from accessing the
            structure SYS1: so that you can refresh it.

            OPR>LOCK SYS1:  /NOUNLOAD<RET>

            OPR>
             8:23:19        --- Structure SYS1 Locked ---

            OPR>









                                    2-54
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    LOCK


        2.  Use the LOCK command to restrict  all  users  from  accessing
            DSKZ: after 5 o'clock.  When you specify the date or time, no
            message appears at the OPR terminal until that date  or  time
            has occurred.

            OPR>LOCK DSKZ: 3-7-88:17:00:00<RET>

            OPR>
            12:32:09          -- Structure DSKZ --
                            LOCK set for 7-Mar-88 17:00:00

            OPR>

            At 5 o'clock the following messages appear:

            17:00:02          -- Structure DSKZ Locked --

            OPR>

            17:00:02          -- Structure DSKZ Dismounted --
                              From Unit: RPB4

            OPR>






























                                    2-55
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   MODIFY


   2.20  MODIFY




   Function

        The MODIFY command allows you to change either of the following:

         o  The priority  of  a  job  request  waiting  in  a  queue  for
            processing

         o  The disk unit or structure name in one of the system lists.

        When you modify the priority of a job  request,  you  change  the
        importance  of  that job request in relationship to other jobs in
        the queues waiting to be processed.

        When a user submits a job request for  processing,  its  priority
        number  defaults to a value that is set at GALGEN time.  The user
        who requests  the  job  can  set  the  priority  value  with  the
        /PRIORITY:   switch.   However, the MODIFY command permits you to
        override the priority value for any job request.

        When you change a system list, you remove or add a disk-unit name
        (or  structure)  to  either  the active-swapping list, crash-dump
        list, or system-search list.

                                      NOTE

                Consult your  system  manager  before  using  the
                MODIFY  command to change system lists.  Removing
                or adding a structure or disk unit to any of  the
                lists  can greatly affect the performance of your
                system.

        The system lists are determined by the disk HOME blocks when  the
        monitor  is  brought  up.  To check the current system lists, use
        the SHOW SYSTEM command.


   Format

        OPR>MODIFY keyword argument PRIORITY nn<RET>


   Keywords

        ACTIVE-SWAPPING-LIST

                           modifies the list of disk unit names that  the
                           system uses to swap pages of memory.

                                    2-56
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   MODIFY


        BATCH-REQUEST      modifies  one  or  more  batch  job   requests
                           waiting   in  the  batch  input  queue  to  be
                           processed.

        CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST modifies one or more card-punch  job  requests
                           waiting  in  the card-punch output queue to be
                           processed.

        CRASH-DUMP-LIST    modifies the list of structure names that  the
                           system  uses  to  dump  (or copy) all pages of
                           memory during a system crash.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST

                           modifies  one  or  more  paper-tape-punch  job
                           requests   waiting   in  the  paper-tape-punch
                           output queue to be processed.

        PLOTTER-REQUEST    modifies one  or  more  plotter  job  requests
                           waiting  in  the  plotter  output  queue to be
                           processed.

        PRINTER-REQUEST    modifies one or more line-printer job requests
                           waiting in the line-printer output queue to be
                           processed.

        SYSTEM-SEARCH-LIST modifies the list of structure names that  the
                           system  uses to search for file structures and
                           file names.


   Arguments

        request-id-number  modifies a single request  from  a  particular
                           user, as specified by the appropriate keyword.

        [PPN]              modifies  all  jobs  as   specified   by   the
                           appropriate  keyword  for  a  particular user.
                           The    [PPN]    (project-programmer    number)
                           identifies the user.

        *                  modifies  all  requests  from  all  users   as
                           specified by the keyword.

        PRIORITY nn        modifies the priority  number  (nn)  that  the
                           request(s)  will be set to.  The number can be
                           in the range from 1 to  63.   The  higher  the
                           number  is,  the greater the importance of the
                           request.    You   must   specify   the    word
                           "PRIORITY."



                                    2-57
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   MODIFY


        EXCLUDE            specifies  the  name  of  a  disk   unit   (or
                           structure)  that  is to be removed from one of
                           the above system lists.

        INCLUDE            specifies  the  name  of  a  disk   unit   (or
                           structure)  that  is to be added to one of the
                           above system lists.

        disk-unit-name:    specifies the name of  the  disk  unit  to  be
                           excluded  or  included  in the active-swapping
                           list.  The disk unit name can be from 1  to  4
                           alphanumeric characters in length, followed by
                           a colon.

        structure:         specifies the name of the file structure to be
                           excluded  or included in either the crash-dump
                           list or the system-search list.  The structure
                           name   can   be   from  1  to  4  alphanumeric
                           characters in length,  followed  by  a  colon.
                           The  structure  must be mounted before you use
                           the MODIFY command.

   Restriction

        You cannot MODIFY the priority of a job request once it has begun
        to process in a batch stream or on an output device.

        If you attempt to exclude or include a disk unit  (or  structure)
        name  that  has  not  been  recognized by the system, you get the
        following error message:

             ? Unknown device: "device"

        If you specify  a  disk  unit  (or  structure)  that  is  already
        included in the system list, you get the following error message:

             hh:mm:ss     Device "str" -- Is already in "system" list --

        where str is the disk unit name (or structure name) and system is
        the name of the system list.

   Examples

        1.  Modify a printer request so that its priority will be greater
            than  the next request to be printed.  Thus, if print request
            13 was the next print request and you modify print request 15
            to be 50, print request 15 prints before print request 13.

            OPR>MODIFY PRINTER-REQUEST 15 PRIORITY 50<RET>
            OPR>
            13:54:19     -- 1 Job Modified --
            OPR>

                                    2-58
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   MODIFY


        2.  Modify all card-punch requests for  user  [27,3223]  so  that
            these  requests  will  be output on the card punch before any
            other card-punch requests.

            OPR>MODIFY CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST [27,3223] PRIORITY 63<RET>
            OPR>
            16:13:20     -- 8 Jobs Modified --
            OPR>

        3.  You have been instructed by your  system  manager  to  remove
            OPR1:   from  the system-search list and to add OPR2:  to the
            system-search list.

            OPR>MODIFY SYSTEM-SEARCH-LIST EXCLUDE OPR1<RET>
            OPR>
            09:31:57     Device OPR1 -- Removed from System Search List --

            OPR>MODIFY SYSTEM-SEARCH-LIST INCLUDE OPR2:<RET>
            OPR>
            09:32:15     Device OPR2 -- Added to System Search List --

            OPR>































                                    2-59
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   MOUNT


   2.21  MOUNT




   Function

        The MOUNT command mounts a structure and assigns it an alias name
        when structure and/or volume recognition is disabled.

        When both structure and volume recognition  are  disabled,  first
        mount  and prepare the structure.  Then use the RECOGNIZE command
        to force MDA to  read  the  HOME  blocks  of  the  structure  and
        recognize  the volume mounted.  Finally, use the MOUNT command so
        that the system acknowledges the structure as mounted.


   Format

        OPR>MOUNT keyword arguments /switch<RET>


   Keyword

        STRUCTURE          specifies a file structure.  You must  include
                           the keyword STRUCTURE in the MOUNT command.

   Arguments

        structure-name:    specifies the logical  identification  of  the
                           file  structure  you  have  mounted  and  made
                           ready.  The structure name can be from 1 to  4
                           alphanumeric  characters  in  length  followed
                           with  a  colon.   An  example  of  a   logical
                           structure name is DSKA:.

        alias-name:        specifies a 1-to 4-alphanumeric character name
                           when two file structures are of the same name.
                           For example, if two file structures  exist  as
                           DSKA:,  the  second  structure  could  have an
                           alias of ADSK:.

   Switches

        /OVERRIDE-SET-NUMBER

                           specifies that the structure is always mounted
                           even  if  the disk set number is inappropriate
                           for the monitor.




                                    2-60
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   MOUNT


        /WRITE-LOCKED      specifies a read-only state for the  structure
                           you have mounted.


   Restriction

        If you have not  mounted  and/or  prepared  all  structures,  the
        following error message occurs when you use the MOUNT command:

             hh:mm:ss        Device str  -- Invalid Mount Request --
                             All Required Volumes Are Not Spinning

        where str is the structure name in the MOUNT command.


   Examples

        1.  You have structure recognition disabled  and  you  mount  and
            prepare  DSKZ:.   When  the system recognizes the volume, the
            following message appears at your OPR terminal.

            9:45:13  Device RPB0 --Volume DSKZ0 for structure DSKZ Mounted--

            Now use the MOUNT command so that the system  recognizes  the
            structure DSKZ:  as mounted.

            OPR>MOUNT STRUCTURE DSKZ:<RET>

            OPR> 9:45:36         -- Structure DSKZ Mounted --

            OPR>

        2.  You have both structure and volume recognition  disabled  and
            you  are  mounting  a  structure  of the same name as another
            structure on the system.

            OPR>RECOGNIZE RPB1:<RET>

            OPR>
            10:23:12  Device RPB1 --Volume DSKX0 for Structure DSKX Mounted--

            OPR>MOUNT STRUCTURE DSKX: XDSK:<RET>

            OPR>
            10:23:47         -- Structure XDSK Mounted --








                                    2-61
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    NEXT


   2.22  NEXT




   Function

        The NEXT command allows you to specify the request that  will  be
        serviced  next in an input queue.  When you use the NEXT command,
        the request that  you  specified  starts  immediately  after  the
        current request is finished.

   Format

        OPR>NEXT keyword nn REQUEST-ID mm /switch<RET>

   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM nn     specifies the batch stream in which  the  job
                            will run.

        CARD-PUNCH nn       specifies the card punch that will punch  the
                            job.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn specifies the  paper  tape  punch  that  will
                            punch the job.

        PLOTTER nn          specifies the plotter that will plot the job.

        PRINTER nn          specifies the line printer  that  will  print
                            the job.

   Switch

        /NODE:identifier    specifies the name of a node in the  network.
                            It  identifies  a  remote  node for which the
                            command should be effective.  For example, to
                            specify    the   node   named   KL1026,   use
                            /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not specify  a  node
                            identifier, your own node is the default.













                                    2-62
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    NEXT


   Example

        A user (MORRILL) requests that his print job be moved to the  top
        of  the  print  queue  to be printed when a printer is available.
        You   must   examine   the   print   queue    to    obtain    the
        request-identification  number  for  his print request.  Then you
        use the NEXT command to place his request next in the queue.

   OPR>SHOW QUEUES PRINTER<RET>

   OPR>
   11:35:43                         -- System Queues Listing --

   Printer Queue:
   Job Name Req#    Limit            User
   -------- ------  -------  -------------------------------
   * BREAK     14      200   KOVALCIN, D [10,4635] On Unit:0
     MAIL     145       35   MAROTTA, M [27,555]
     SNOOPY    10       65   MORRILL [42,2520]     /After:29-May-88 12:00

   There are 3 jobs in the queue (1 in progress)

   OPR>NEXT PRINTER 0 REQUEST-ID 10<RET>

   OPR>
   11:36:17         Printer 0 -- NEXT request #10 scheduled --

   OPR>

























                                    2-63
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    PUSH


   2.23  PUSH




   Function

        The PUSH command enables  you  to  enter  monitor  command  level
        without  exiting  the  OPR program.  For example, you may want to
        use PUSH  so  that  you  can  enter  operator-privileged  monitor
        commands.  To return to OPR, use the monitor command POP.

        For more information about PUSH and POP, see the CONTEXT  command
        in the TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual.


   Format

        OPR>PUSH<RET>


   Examples

        1.  Use the PUSH command to enter monitor command level  so  that
            you can use the SYSTAT E monitor command.

            OPR>PUSH<RET>

            .SYSTAT E<RET>

            .

        2.  After you use the SYSTAT E command, type POP to return to OPR
            command level.

            .POP<RET>

            OPR>















                                    2-64
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 RECOGNIZE


   2.24  RECOGNIZE




   Function

        The RECOGNIZE command forces the system to read the volume labels
        of  a  tape  or  structure.   This command need only be used when
        hardware restrictions limit the use of  volume  recognition.   In
        addition, this command is useful in the following situations:

         o  When a labeled tape has been mounted on a tape drive after an
            unassigned  labeled  tape  has  been unloaded by pressing the
            UNLOAD button on the tape drive (TU70, 71, 72, 73 only).

         o  When a tape is mounted on a drive  which  does  not  generate
            on-line interrupts (for example, TU40).

         o  When VOLUME-RECOGNITION has been disabled for the tape  drive
            or disk drive.


   Format

        OPR>RECOGNIZE argument<RET>


   Arguments

        MTxn:              specifies the tape-drive name, where x is  the
                           tape  controller  identification  and n is the
                           tape-drive number.

        xxcn:              specifies the disk-drive name  that  currently
                           has  a disk pack mounted and ready on it.  The
                           name is in  the  format  of  xxcn:,  where  xx
                           represents  the device type (RP for RP04, RP06
                           and RP07, RA for RA80, RA81 and RA60,  and  RN
                           for  RP20);  c  represents the disk controller
                           identification;  and  n  is   the   disk-drive
                           number.


   Restriction

        If the tape drive is unavailable, you  must  first  use  the  SET
        TAPE-DRIVE AVAILABLE command, and then the RECOGNIZE command.





                                    2-65
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 RECOGNIZE


        If the tape  volume  is  unlabeled  and  you  use  the  RECOGNIZE
        command, the following message appears:

        hh:mm:ss        Device MTAn  -- Unlabeled Volume Mounted --

        You must then  use  the  IDENTIFY  command  to  have  the  system
        recognize  the  unlabeled  tape volume to a particular tape mount
        request.   See  the  IDENTIFY  command   description   for   more
        information.

        Do not press the UNLOAD button on TU70 tape drives to unload  and
        remove a tape.  Always use either the monitor command DISMOUNT or
        the OPR command DISMOUNT to unload a tape from a TU70 tape drive.


   Examples

        1.  You have volume recognition disabled on tape drive 1  (MTA1:)
            and  you mount a labeled tape on MTA1:  in response to a user
            MOUNT request.  After the tape has been brought to a  "ready"
            state,  you must use the RECOGNIZE command to have the system
            recognize the labeled tape on the tape drive.

            OPR>RECOGNIZE MTA1:<RET>

            OPR>
            12:34:12        Device MTA1  -- Volume BACKUP Reassigned --
                            User: BROWN,E [27,5107] Job  59

            OPR>

        2.  If someone has mounted a disk pack on a disk drive  that  has
            VOLUME-RECOGNITION   disabled,  you  can  use  the  RECOGNIZE
            command to force the system to read the pack's home blocks.

            OPR>RECOGNIZE RPB6:<RET.

            OPR>
             8:16:27  Device RPB6 --Volume GALO0 for Structure GALO Mounted--

            OPR>
             8:16:28         -- Structure GALO Mounted --

            OPR>









                                    2-66
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  RELEASE


   2.25  RELEASE




   Function

        The RELEASE command releases job requests that were held with the
        HOLD  command  or REQUEUE command.  When you RELEASE a previously
        held job request, the job is rescheduled for processing.

        To examine jobs waiting in the queue to be processed or any  jobs
        being held, use the SHOW QUEUES command with the /ALL switch.


   Format

        OPR>RELEASE keyword argument<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-JOBS         releases one or more jobs held  in  the  batch
                           input queue.

        CARD-PUNCH-JOBS    releases  one  or  more  jobs  held   in   the
                           card-punch output queue.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS

                           releases  one  or  more  jobs  held   in   the
                           paper-tape-punch output queue.

        PLOTTER-JOBS       releases one or more jobs held in the  plotter
                           output queue.

        PRINTER-JOBS       releases one or more jobs  held  in  the  line
                           printer output queue.


   Arguments

        request-id-number  releases a single job for a particular user as
                           specified    by   the   request-identification
                           number.

        [PPN]              releases all types of jobs,  as  specified  by
                           the  appropriate  keyword,  for  a  particular
                           user.  The [PPN]  (project-programmer  number)
                           identifies the user.



                                    2-67
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  RELEASE


        *                  releases  all  jobs  held  for  all  users  as
                           specified by the keyword.


   Examples

        1.  Use the RELEASE command to release a line-printer job request
            for user [10,3111].

            OPR>RELEASE PRINTER-JOBS [10,3111]<RET>

            OPR>
            14:23:45          -- 1 Job Released --

            OPR>

        2.  Use  the  RELEASE  command  to  release  all  card-punch  job
            requests held in the queue.

            OPR>RELEASE CARD-PUNCH-JOBS <RET>

            OPR>
            15:23:01          -- 10 Jobs Released --

            OPR>

        3.  Use the RELEASE command to release batch job request 117.

            OPR>RELEASE BATCH-JOBS 117<RET>
            OPR>
            17:18:20          -- 1 Job Released --
            OPR>





















                                    2-68
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   REPORT


   2.26  REPORT




   Function

        The REPORT command allows  you  to  report  various  comments  or
        existing  error  conditions.   These  reports are logged into the
        system log file ERROR.SYS, thus creating a system log entry.   To
        list these entries, you can run the SPEAR program.  (Refer to the
        TOPS-10/20 SPEAR Manual for more information.)


   Format

        OPR>REPORT user-name argument text<RET>


   Arguments

        user-name          specifies the name  of  the  user  making  the
                           report  to ERROR.SYS.  Your project-programmer
                           number  is  automatically  entered  into   the
                           system  log entry.  If you do not specify this
                           keyword, it is not entered into the system log
                           entry.

        device             specifies one of the system  devices  that  is
                           the  subject  of  the report.  This keyword is
                           only  needed  if  the  report   is   about   a
                           particular device.

        text               After specifying the device, you can  enter  a
                           single-  or multiple-line response and confirm
                           with a carriage return,  or  you  can  confirm
                           with  carriage  return  immediately  after the
                           user name or device.  OPR responds with  ENTER
                           TEXT AND TERMINATE WITH ^Z.  You then enter as
                           many lines of text for a response as you need.
                           When  you  press  <CTRL/Z>,  the  OPR>  prompt
                           returns and your report  is  logged  into  the
                           ERROR.SYS file.










                                    2-69
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   REPORT


   Examples

        1.  Use the REPORT command for a previous cancellation of  a  job
            being read into the system through the card reader.

            OPR>REPORT OPR CDR260: TOO MANY PICK CHECKS<RET>

            OPR>
            12:19:00      -- ERROR.SYS entry made by the REPORT command --

            OPR>

        2.  Use the  REPORT  command  to  describe  a  possible  hardware
            problem that seems serious.

            OPR>REPORT OPR<RET>
            Enter text and terminate with ^Z
            THERE WAS JUST A HEAD CRASH ON STRUCTURE MISC:<RET>
            ALL FILES WILL BE RESTORED^Z
            OPR>
            15:18:01      -- ERROR.SYS entry made by the REPORT command --

            OPR>






























                                    2-70
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  REQUEUE


   2.27  REQUEUE




   Function

        The REQUEUE command stops a job request that is in progress, puts
        the  job request back in the queue in the HOLD state, and cancels
        the in-progress job request.  To  reschedule  the  job,  use  the
        RELEASE command.


   Format

        OPR>REQUEUE keyword nn /switch argument<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       requeues a particular batch stream that has  a
                           job currently active within it.

        CARD-PUNCH         requeues a particular card-punch  that  has  a
                           job currently being output on it.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   requeues a  particular  paper-tape-punch  that
                           has a job currently being output on it.

        PLOTTER            requeues a particular plotter that has  a  job
                           currently being output on it.

        PRINTER            requeues a particular line-printer that has  a
                           job currently printing on it.


   Switches

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  the  remote node for which the
                           command is effective.  For example, to specify
                           the  node  named KL1026, use /NODE:KL1026.  If
                           you do not specify a node identifier, your own
                           node is the default.









                                    2-71
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  REQUEUE


        /REASON:comment    allows you to include a comment explaining why
                           the  job  has  been  requeued.   This  comment
                           appears in the  batch  log  file  and  at  the
                           user's  terminal.   If  the  comment is longer
                           than one line, you can end the first line with
                           a  hyphen  and  a carriage return and continue
                           the comment on the next line.   If  you  press
                           RETURN   immediately   after  the  colon,  OPR
                           responds with the instruction:  ENTER TEXT AND
                           TERMINATE WITH ^Z.  You can then enter as many
                           lines of text as necessary.  When  you  finish
                           entering  the  text,  type  a <CTRL/Z> and the
                           OPR> prompt reappears.


   Arguments

        BEGINNING-OF       specifies  that  requeuing   starts   at   the
                           beginning  of  the  COPY,  FILE, or JOB.  This
                           argument is  valid  when  you  requeue  a  job
                           currently  processing on a device, such as the
                           line printer.  This argument is  invalid  with
                           the BATCH-STREAM keyword.

             COPY          specifies  that  requeuing   starts   at   the
                           beginning of the current copy being processed.
                           (Refer  to  the  BACKSPACE  and   FORWARDSPACE
                           commands.)

             FILE          specifies  that  requeuing   starts   at   the
                           beginning of the current file being processed.
                           (Refer  to  the  BACKSPACE  and   FORWARDSPACE
                           commands.)

             JOB           specifies  that  requeuing   starts   at   the
                           beginning  of the current job being processed.
                           With JOB, the entire job is requeued.

        CURRENT-POSITION   specifies the current position  (line  number)
                           of  the  job on unit number nn at the time you
                           issue the REQUEUE command.












                                    2-72
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  REQUEUE


   Examples

        1.  Use the REQUEUE command to hold and cancel  a  job  in  batch
            stream 5.

            OPR>REQUEUE BATCH-STREAM 5 /REQUEST-ID:56<RET>

            OPR>
            10:23:56        Batch Stream 5  -- REQUEUE command queued --
                            Job TEST Req #56 for BROWN [27,5107]

            OPR>
            10:23:57        Batch Stream 5  -- End --
                            Job TEST Req #56 for BROWN [27,5107]
                            -- Job Requeued by Operator --

            OPR>

        2.  Use the REQUEUE  command  to  hold  and  cancel  the  current
            processing job on the card punch.

            OPR>REQUEUE CARD-PUNCH 0 BEGINNING-OF JOB /REASON:<RET>
            Enter text and terminate with ^Z
            JOB REQUEUED BECAUSE OF CARD PUNCH JAM.<RET>
            FIELD SERVICE CALLED.<RET>
            OPERATOR-JONES.^Z
            OPR>
            16:09:43        Card-punch 0  -- Requeued --
                            Job PUNCH9 Req #99 for HOVSEPIAN [12,345]

            OPR>
            16:09:44        Card-punch 0  -- End --
                            Job PUNCH9 Req #99 for HOVSEPIAN [12,345]
                            -- Job Requeued by Operator --

            OPR>

        3.  Use the REQUEUE  command  to  hold  and  cancel  the  current
            processing  job  on  the  line printer, unit number 0, at the
            current position.

            OPR>REQUEUE PRINTER 0 CURRENT-POSITION<RET>

            OPR>
            12:34:09         Printer 0  -- Requeued --
                             Job BATCH1 Req #177 for HURLEY [27,5467]

            OPR>
            12:34:10         Printer 0  -- End --
                             Job BATCH1 Req #177 for HURLEY [27,5467]
                             -- Job Requeued by Operator --

            OPR>
                                    2-73
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  RESPOND


   2.28  RESPOND




   Function

        The RESPOND command allows you to reply to any  message  sent  to
        you  by  means  of  WTOR (Write-To-Operator with Response) from a
        user or from a batch job.

        When a user or software task sends you a message that requires  a
        response,  OPR  assigns the message a number so that you can keep
        track of all messages sent to operations.  Use the SHOW  MESSAGES
        command, to display outstanding messages.

        You must specify a message number with the RESPOND command.


   Format

        OPR>RESPOND nnn text<RET>


   Keywords

        nnn                specifies the message number of a message that
                           was   sent   to   you   by   means   of   WTOR
                           (Write-To-Operator with Response).

        text               specifies a single- or multiple-line response.
                           If you press carriage return immediately after
                           the message number, OPR  responds  with  ENTER
                           TEXT  AND  TERMINATE  WITH  ^Z.   You can then
                           enter as many lines of text as needed.  To end
                           the  text  input,  press <CTRL/Z> and the OPR>
                           prompt returns.


   Examples

        1.  Use the RESPOND command to reply to message number 23,  which
            was a Page Limit Exceeded message for printer 1.

            12:30:00  <23>  Printer 1  -- Page Limit Exceeded --
            Job OPRC Req # 147 for REILLY [30,5111]
            Type 'RESPOND <Number> ABORT' to terminate the job now
            Type 'RESPOND <Number> PROCEED' to allow the job to continue
            printing

            OPR>RESPOND 23 PROCEED<RET>

            OPR>
                                    2-74
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  RESPOND


        2.  Use the RESPOND command to reply to message number 67,  which
            was  a  request  to  remove  a  structure  (monitor  DISMOUNT
            command).

            13:57:01  <67>  Device MISC: -- Problem removing structure --
            Mount count = 1
            Type 'RESPOND <number> ABORT' to not dismount Structure MISC.
            Type 'RESPOND <number> PROCEED' to dismount Structure MISC
            anyway.

            OPR>RESPOND 67 ABORT<RET>

            OPR>
            13:58:31        -- Can't dismount structure OPR2 --

            OPR>

        3.  Use the RESPOND command to reply to message number 12,  which
            was  a  user's inquiry about whether timesharing is available
            after 18:00.

            09:32:54  <12>     -- Message from timesharing user --
                             User: PTAYLOR [27,6761] job# 27
                             WILL TIMESHARING BE AVAILABLE AFTER 18:00

            OPR>RESPOND 12<RET>
            Enter text and terminate with ^Z
            TIMESHARING IS AVAILABLE UNTIL 23:00 TONIGHT^Z

            OPR>























                                    2-75
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  RESTRICT


   2.29  RESTRICT




   Function

        The RESTRICT command limits the use of a specified device to  the
        operator.   The  RESTRICT  command  prevents non-privileged users
        from mounting or assigning the device.  To remove the restriction
        use the UNRESTRICT command.


   Format

        OPR>RESTRICT argument<RET>


   Argument

        dev:               specifies  the  name  of  the  device  to   be
                           restricted.


   Example

        Use the RESTRICT command to restrict device MTA3.

        OPR>RESTRICT MTA3:<RET>
        OPR>
        16:28:52           -- Device MTA3: restricted --






















                                    2-76
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ROUTE


   2.30  ROUTE




   Function

        The ROUTE command changes the destination of output requests,  so
        that  the  output  intended  for  a  specific unit(s) (the source
        unit[s]) will automatically be output  on  another  unit(s)  (the
        destination unit[s]).  The source and destination units may be on
        the same node, or they may be on different nodes.

        This function is useful when a unit malfunctions and  the  output
        from that device is necessary immediately.

        If you are an operator at a central site, you  can  route  output
        from  one  unit  to  another,  on  the  same  or  any other node.
        However, output cannot be processed on another host  system.   If
        you  route  output to another host node, the request(s) remain in
        the queue indefinitely because the request cannot  be  processed.
        If  you  are an operator at a remote node, you can route requests
        from one unit to another on your node.

        All device routing is entered into the system route  table.   You
        can   examine   the  route  table  with  the  OPR  command,  SHOW
        ROUTE-TABLE.

        To end routing and delete the entry from the system route  table,
        use  the ROUTE command and omit the information pertaining to the
        destination unit(s) and node.

        Because the format and arguments  used  with  the  ROUTE  command
        depend  largely  on the keyword you use, it is highly recommended
        that you use the  recognition  feature  (<ESC>)  until  you  feel
        comfortable with the command format.


   Format

        OPR>ROUTE keyword source-argument destination-argument<RET>


   Keywords

        ALL-DEVICES        specifies  all  device   output   (card-punch,
                           paper-tape-punch, plotter, and printer) at the
                           node.

        CARD-PUNCH         specifies card-punch output.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies paper-tape-punch output.

                                    2-77
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ROUTE


        PLOTTER            specifies plotter output.

        PRINTER            specifies printer output.


   Arguments (for ALL-DEVICES)

        source-information

                           specifies the node(s) from which the output is
                           to  be  routed.   The  source-information  for
                           ALL-DEVICES is specified by the node  name  or
                           by the keyword ALL-NODES.

        destination-information

                           specifies the node(s) to which the output will
                           be     routed.      For    ALL-DEVICES,    the
                           destination-information is  specified  by  the
                           node     name.      If     you     omit    the
                           destination-information, any existing  entries
                           in the system route table will be deleted, and
                           the appropriate routing will be ended.


   Arguments (for keywords CARD-PUNCH
                           PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                           PLOTTER
                           PRINTER)

        source-information

                           specifies the unit and  node  from  which  the
                           output  will  be  routed.   The unit number is
                           specified as either n (for a specific unit) or
                           ALL-UNITS,  to  designate  that all output for
                           the appropriate device is to be routed.   Note
                           that  if  you  specify a unit number, only the
                           requests made for that specific unit (with the
                           /UNIT  switch)  will  be  routed.  The node is
                           specified by the switch /NODE:name  (described
                           below).   If  you omit the node specification,
                           the  node  to  which  you  are  connected   is
                           assumed.









                                    2-78
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ROUTE


        destination-information

                           specifies the  unit  and  node  to  which  the
                           output  will be routed.  The unit is specified
                           by n, the unit number, or ALL-UNITS.  The node
                           is  specified  by the switch /NODE:name, which
                           is described below.  If  you  omit  the  /NODE
                           switch, the node to which you are connected is
                           assumed.


   Switch

        /NODE:name         specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.


   Restrictions

        You cannot route output from ALL-UNITS to a specific unit number.
        If you type this command, the following error occurs:

        OPR>ROUTE PRINTER ALL-UNITS/NODE:KL1026 0/NODE:DN200<RET>
        OPR>
        15:15:36        -- Cannot Route a Generic Unit --
        OPR>

        This error is produced to prevent output from being processed  on
        a unit that does not have certain necessary characteristics.  For
        example,  if  printer  0  at  DN200  does  not   have   lowercase
        capability,  and  if  the requests being routed require a printer
        with lowercase capability, then the requests cannot be  processed
        on printer 0 at DN200.


   Examples

        1.  To route the output that is destined for printer  unit  0  to
            printer unit 1, on the same node, use the following command:

            OPR>ROUTE PRINTER 0 1<RET>
            OPR>
            15:33:12  -- Printer 0 [KL1026] Routed to Printer 1 [KL1026] --
            OPR>





                                    2-79
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   ROUTE


        2.  To end the routing for printer 0 and to delete the entry from
            the routing table, use the following command:

            OPR>ROUTE PRINTER 0<RET>
            OPR>
            15:40:10        -- Routing for Printer 0 [KL1026] Deleted --
            OPR>

        3.  To route all the output that is going to node DN200  to  node
            KL1026, use the following command:

            OPR>ROUTE ALL-DEVICES DN200 KL1026<RET>
            OPR>
            15:43:08        -- Node DN200 Routed to KL1026 --
            OPR>






































                                    2-80
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    SEND


   2.31  SEND




   Function

        The SEND command sends single- or  multiple-line  messages  to  a
        specific destination as defined by the keyword.  The SEND command
        allows you to  specify  a  one-line  message  terminated  with  a
        carriage  return  or  a  multiple-line  message terminated with a
        <CTRL/Z>.

        If you specify SEND ALL, you can send only a single-line message.


   Format

        OPR>SEND keyword nn message<RET>


   Keywords

        ALL                sends  a  message  to  all  terminals  on  the
                           system.   If  you specify the ALL keyword with
                           the /NODE switch, all terminals for that  node
                           receive   the   text.    You   can  send  only
                           single-line messages when you specify ALL.

        BATCH-STREAM       sends a message to a particular batch  job  or
                           over  an  IBM  emulation  node to a remote IBM
                           host.  You must  specify  stream  number  with
                           this keyword.

        JOB                sends a message to a particular  job  that  is
                           currently   processing  under  timesharing  or
                           within the batch system.  You  must  supply  a
                           job number with this keyword.

        OPERATOR           sends a message to another operator at another
                           node  with  the  /NODE  switch.  If you do not
                           specify the /NODE switch, the message is  sent
                           to all operators at all nodes.

        TERMINAL           sends a  message  to  a  particular  logged-in
                           terminal.  You must supply the terminal number
                           with this keyword.






                                    2-81
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    SEND


   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.


   Examples

        1.  Use the SEND command to notify  all  users  that  timesharing
            ends in 30 minutes.

            OPR>SEND ALL TIMESHARING ENDS IN 30 MINUTES<RET>

            OPR>
            ;;SYSTEM: - TIMESHARING ENDS IN 30 MINUTES
            <RET>

            OPR>

        2.  Use the SEND command to  notify  all  operators  that  a  new
            stand-alone schedule has been posted.

            OPR>SEND OPERATOR NEW STAND-ALONE SCHEDULE IS POSTED<RET>

            OPR>
            12:05:35 From Operator Terminal 1:
                    =>NEW STAND-ALONE SCHEDULE IS POSTED

            OPR>

        3.  Use the SEND command to notify job 32 to stop queueing  print
            requests  because  of  a problem with the line printer at the
            central site.

            OPR>SEND JOB 32 DO NOT QUEUE ANY PRINT JOBS UNTIL NOTIFIED<RET>

            OPR>
            10:39:05         -- SEND Command Completed --

            OPR>









                                    2-82
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    SET


   2.32  SET




   Function

        The SET command sets parameters for system devices and  features.
        The  SET  command  is  useful  in  the SYSTEM.CMD file for system
        start-up, and it can be used during normal  system  operation  as
        well.

        Because the SET command is complex, the  arguments  and  switches
        for each keyword are described in the following sections.


   Format

        OPR>SET keyword arguments /switches<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM
        CARD-PUNCH
        FAL-STREAM
        JOB
        NODE
        NQC-STREAM
        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
        PLOTTER
        PRINTER
        SYSTEM
        TAPE-DRIVE
        TERMINAL
        USAGE

















                                    2-83
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              SET BATCH-STREAM


   2.33  SET BATCH-STREAM




   Function

        The SET  BATCH-STREAM  command  sets  the  characteristics  of  a
        particular  stream  or a range of streams.  These characteristics
        remain in effect until you reissue the SET BATCH-STREAM command.


   Format

        OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM nn /switch argument<RET>


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies a batch-stream number.   The  number
                           is  usually  from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
                           your  installation   uses   additional   batch
                           streams.

        n:m                specifies a range of batch streams.  You  must
                           include  a  stream  number  or range of stream
                           numbers with the SET BATCH-STREAM command.

        ATTRIBUTE          specifies whether the  batch  stream  operates
                           with the BATCON or the SITGO program.

             BATCON        specifies that the batch stream is to use  the
                           BATCON   controller.    (This  is  the  system
                           default batch controller.)

             SITGO         specifies the  SITGO  batch  processor,  which
                           consists   of  a  fast  FORTRAN  compiler  for
                           compiling FORTRAN programs in a batch stream.

        MEMORY-LIMITS nn   
                      n:m
                           specifies the maximum number of  memory  pages
                           allowed for a batch stream or a range of batch
                           streams.  If you specify  a  range  with  this
                           keyword, the range is from a minimum number of
                           memory pages to a  maximum  number  of  memory
                           pages.






                                    2-84
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              SET BATCH-STREAM


        NOOPR-INTERVENTION 
                           specifies that a user cannot make any requests
                           in  the  batch job that require you to perform
                           an action of some kind or require you to  send
                           a    message.     If    a    batch   job   has
                           NOOPR-INTERVENTION set, any messages it  sends
                           are  ignored, and you are not asked to perform
                           any action.

                           For  example,  If  the  batch   job   requests
                           mountable  devices,  and  if the job must wait
                           until the device is mounted, an error  message
                           results.

        OPR-INTERVENTION   specifies that the user can pass  messages  to
                           you  and  that  you  are  available to perform
                           actions that a user or batch job requests.

        PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                        n:m

                           specifies  the  priority  limits  of  a  batch
                           stream  or  a  range  of  batch streams at the
                           central site or at a node.  The numeric  value
                           associated  with this argument means that only
                           batch  jobs  submitted  by  users   with   the
                           /PRIORITY:   switch  specifying the number (or
                           range)  you  set  for  the  batch  stream  can
                           execute in that stream.  The numeric value for
                           the PRIORITY-LIMITS argument can be from 1  to
                           63.   The  higher  the  number, the higher the
                           priority.

        SYSTEM-OPR-INTERVENTION

                           specifies  that  batch  streams   assume   the
                           OPR-INTERVENTION   state   when   SET   SYSTEM
                           SCHEDULE 400 (no operator coverage)  has  been
                           specified  and  assume  the NOOPR-INTERVENTION
                           state when SET SYSTEM SCHEDULE is not 400.













                                    2-85
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              SET BATCH-STREAM


        TIME-LIMITS nn
                    n:m

                           specifies the maximum execution time limit for
                           a  given  batch  stream  or  a  range of batch
                           streams.  When a  batch  job  enters  a  batch
                           stream,  it receives a default execution time,
                           such as five minutes.  If the job exceeds this
                           time  limit, and if the user who submitted the
                           batch job set up his control  file  to  handle
                           time limits, the batch system gives the job an
                           additional 10% of the allocated time.  If  the
                           job  exceeds  this  additional 10%, the job is
                           canceled.  The TIME-LIMITS argument allows you
                           to specify that batch jobs that are set to run
                           a certain length  of  time  will  run  in  the
                           specified batch-stream number (or range).  The
                           numeric value for the TIME-LIMITS argument can
                           be from 0 to 99999, representing minutes.

   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.


   Examples

        1.  Use the SET BATCH-STREAM command to set stream  number  3  to
            have a priority limit of 63.

            OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 3 PRIORITY-LIMITS 63<RET>

            OPR>
            13:20:54        Batch-stream 3  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>












                                    2-86
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              SET BATCH-STREAM


        2.  Use the SET BATCH-STREAM command to set streams 0  through  2
            for no operator intervention.

            OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 0:2 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>

            OPR>
            16:11:17        Batch-stream 0  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>
            16:11:21        Batch-stream 1  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>
            16:11:24        Batch-stream 2  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>






































                                    2-87
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SET CARD-PUNCH


   2.34  SET CARD-PUNCH




   Function

        The SET CARD-PUNCH command enables you to  specify  the  kind  of
        jobs  to  schedule  on  this  device.  You can set the form type,
        output limits (maximum number of cards), priority limits, and the
        action  to  be taken when a job exceeds the output limit that the
        user specifies.  This command allows you to change the parameters
        that  are set at GALGEN time.  You must supply a unit number or a
        range of unit numbers with this command.

        The card-punch device handles standard 12-row, 80-column cards.

        The defaults for the card punch are set by your system manager at
        software-installation   time   through   the  generation  of  the
        SYS:SPFORM.INI file.


   Format

        OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH nn /switch argument<RET>


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies  a  card-punch  unit  number.    The
                           number  is  usually  from  0  to 5, but can be
                           larger  if   your   installation   uses   more
                           card-punch devices.

        n:m                specifies a range of card-punch unit numbers.

        FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the type of  card-punch  forms.   By
                           setting the FORMS-TYPE, you are specifying the
                           type of forms in the card punch.














                                    2-88
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SET CARD-PUNCH


        LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                           specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                           if a card-punch job that is currently punching
                           exceeds the set limit of output.   (The  limit
                           is  set  by  the  user with /LIMIT.) There are
                           three possible  actions  associated  with  the
                           LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument.  They are:

             ASK           specifies that you be asked what to do if  the
                           card-punch  job  exceeds  the  card  limit  on
                           output.  You then have the option to  continue
                           or  abort  the  card-punch  job.   This is the
                           default.

             ABORT         specifies   that   the   card-punch   job   is
                           automatically canceled when the limit has been
                           exceeded.

             PROCEED       specifies that the  card-punch  job  continues
                           automatically and the limit is ignored.

        OUTPUT-LIMITS cards

                           specifies the maximum card limit  for  punched
                           output.   This  argument  can  also  specify a
                           range of card limits.  The card  limit  refers
                           to   the  number  of  output  cards  that  are
                           punched.  This command restricts the  size  of
                           jobs  that  can  start  on  the card punch you
                           specify.

        PRIORITY-LIMITS nn

                           specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                           importance) of a card punch or a range of card
                           punches at the central site or at a node.  The
                           numeric  value  associated  with this argument
                           means that only card-punch jobs  submitted  by
                           users  with  the /PRIORITY switch specifying a
                           number in the range you set for the card punch
                           can  execute  on that card punch.  The numeric
                           value for the PRIORITY-LIMITS argument can  be
                           from  1  to  63.   The  higher the number, the
                           higher the priority.








                                    2-89
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SET CARD-PUNCH


   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.


   Examples

        1.  Use the SET CARD-PUNCH command to set the forms type to  5081
            for all card-punch devices at your installation.

            OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH 0:2 FORMS-TYPE 5081<RET>

            OPR>
            10:13:17        Card-Punch 0  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>
            10:13:20        Card-Punch 1  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>
            10:13:23        Card-Punch 2  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>

        2.  Use the SET CARD-PUNCH command to set all card-punch jobs for
            a  maximum  output limit of 200 cards per job.  Any jobs with
            limits higher than 200 cards will not be started.

            OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH 0:2 OUTPUT-LIMIT 200<RET>

            OPR>
            10:30:16        Card-Punch 0  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>
            10:30:19        Card-Punch 1  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>
            10:30:22        Card-Punch 2  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>









                                    2-90
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SET FAL-STREAM


   2.35  SET FAL-STREAM




   Function

        The SET FAL-STREAM command specifies the network type  associated
        with a specified FAL stream.  ANF-10 is initially assumed.


   Format

        OPR>SET FAL-STREAM nn NETWORK argument<RET>

        nn is a stream number or range of stream numbers


   Arguments

        ANF-10             specifies  that  the  given  FAL  stream  will
                           perform   input/output   with  ANF-10  network
                           nodes.

        DECnet             specifies  that  the  given  FAL  stream  will
                           perform   input/output   with  DECnet  network
                           nodes.


   Examples

        1.  Use the SET FAL-STREAM command to set DECnet as the  type  of
            network connection accepted by FAL stream 2.

            OPR>SET FAL-STREAM 2 NETWORK DECNET<RET>
            OPR>
            16:10:48            Fal-Stream 2 -- Set Acccepted --
            OPR>

        2.  Use the SET FAL-STREAM command to set ANF-10 as the  type  of
            network connection accepted by FAL stream 0.

            OPR>SET FAL-STREAM 0 NETWORK ANF-10<RET>
            OPR>
            16:11:22            Fal-Stream 2 -- Set Accepted --
            OPR>







                                    2-91
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SET JOB


   2.36  SET JOB




   Function

        The SET JOB command allows you to set the characteristics  for  a
        particular  batch  job  number.  You can set the job for operator
        intervention allowed or for  no  operator  intervention  allowed.
        You must include the job number with this command.


   Format

        OPR>SET JOB nn argument<RET>


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies  a  job  number  currently  in   the
                           system.   The  numeric  value can be from 0 to
                           99999.

        NOOPR-INTERVENTION prohibits the user  associated  with  the  job
                           from  making  requests  that  require operator
                           response.  If the job has a NOOPR-INTERVENTION
                           setting, the messages are ignored; you are not
                           to be asked to perform any action.

        OPR-INTERVENTION   allows the user associated with the  specified
                           job  number  to  pass messages to you to which
                           you must respond.  This is the default.


   Examples

        1.  Use the SET JOB command to allow  operator  intervention  for
            job number 100.

            OPR>SET JOB 100 OPR-INTERVENTION<RET>

            OPR>
            15:55:15        Job 100  -- Modified --

            OPR>







                                    2-92
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SET JOB


        2.  Use the SET JOB command to not  allow  operator  intervention
            for job number 50.

            OPR>SET JOB 50 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>

            OPR>
            16:43:34        Job 50  -- Modified --

            OPR>












































                                    2-93
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SET KSYS


   2.37  SET KSYS




   Function

        The SET KSYS command sets a time for timesharing to end.  You may
        need to stop timesharing so that maintenance or stand-alone tasks
        can be performed.

        The SHOW QUEUES EVENTS command displays the KSYS time, as well as
        the  reason  that  timesharing is scheduled to end.  See the SHOW
        QUEUES command for information on listing the event queue.


   Format

        OPR>SET KSYS keyword /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        NOW                specifies   that    timesharing    will    end
                           immediately.

        +hh:mm:ss          specifies   when   timesharing    will    end,
                           designated  as  the  number of hours, minutes,
                           and seconds from the current time.   The  time
                           must be at least five minutes from the current
                           time.

        hh:mm:ss           specifies that timesharing  will  end  at  the
                           time you enter for hh:mm:ss

        dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss

                           specifies that timesharing  will  end  on  the
                           day, month, year, and time that you enter.

        DAILY hh:mm:ss     specifies that timesharing will end every  day
                           at the time you enter.

        EVERY "day" hh:mm:ss

                           specifies that timesharing will end every week
                           on  the  day  and  time that you enter.  "Day"
                           specifies a particular day of the week.





                                    2-94
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SET KSYS


                                                NOTE

                               You can specify  seconds  in  the  SET
                               KSYS  time, but OPR ignores this value
                               and executes the  KSYS  event  to  the
                               nearest   minute   of   the  time  you
                               specify.


   Switches

        /CM                specifies corrective maintenance as the reason
                           that timesharing will end.

        /FAILSOFT          writes the KSYS  event  queue  entry  time  to
                           disk,  thus  preserving  the  KSYS time across
                           system reloads.

        /FILE:filespec     specifies the name of  a  file  for  ORION  to
                           process when timesharing ends.

        /NEW               specifies a new monitor  as  the  reason  that
                           timesharing will end.

        /PM                specifies  preventative  maintenance  as   the
                           reason that timesharing will end.

        /SA                specifies stand-alone time as the reason  that
                           timesharing will end.

        /SCHED             specifies scheduled  system  shutdown  as  the
                           reason that timesharing will end.

        /REASON:comment    enables you  to  specify  other  reasons  that
                           timesharing will end.

                                                NOTE

                               The above switches  are  displayed  in
                               the  EVENT  QUEUE  and are included in
                               the  first  and  last   KSYS   warning
                               message sent to users.











                                    2-95
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SET KSYS


   Restriction

        To set a KSYS time that is less than one hour  from  the  current
        time,  you  must  specify  the  time  in  hours and minutes.  For
        example, to SET KSYS for five minutes from the current time,  you
        must use the form:

             SET KSYS +0:05

        SET KSYS +5 sets the KSYS time for 5 hours from the current time.


   Example

        Set the KSYS time to midnight for 21-Nov-84.

        OPR>SET KSYS 21-NOV-88:00:00:00<RET>
        OPR>
        16:24:21             -- Event job KSYS queued, request  53 --
        OPR>

        Display the event queue to check the pending KSYS time.

        OPR>SHOW QUEUES EVENTS<RET>

        OPR>
        16:25:37            -- System Queues Listing --

        Event Queue:
          Type     Req#      Expiration           Description           
        --------  ------  ------------------  -----------------------
          BILCLS      24  19-Nov-88 16:59:59  Prime time rates end
          USGFIL      44  19-Nov-88 23:59:30  Usage file closure
          OPRFIL      38  20-Nov-88  0:00:00  ORION log file closure
          BILCLS      15  20-Nov-88  7:59:59  Discount rates end
        * KSYS        53  21-Nov-88  0:00:00  
        There are 4 events in the queue (1 in progress)
















                                    2-96
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SET NODE


   2.38  SET NODE




   Function

        The SET NODE command applies only if your  installation  has  IBM
        Communications software.

        The SET NODE command allows you to specify the modem-related  and
        data-transfer-related  parameters  for  IBM  Communications nodes
        that perform IBM communications.  Before you set  the  parameters
        for  a  node,  you must define the node name, type, and mode with
        the DEFINE command.


   Format

        OPR>SET NODE keyword arguments<RET>

        where keyword

             specifies the node  name  of  the  remote  station  for  IBM
             communications.    The   name   can   be  from  one  to  six
             alphanumeric characters long.


   Arguments

        BYTES-PER-MESSAGE b

                  specifies the number of bytes per message, b, that  the
                  front end uses to communicate with the remote site.

        CLEAR-SEND-DELAY d

                  specifies  a  clear-to-send  delay,  where  d   is   an
                  arbitrary  number of clock ticks used by the front end.
                  This value is not an element of a discrete set.  It can
                  be any positive integer value.












                                    2-97
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SET NODE


        RECORDS-PER-MESSAGE r

                  specifies the number of records per  message,  where  r
                  can equal any positive integer.  The defaults of r are:

                  0 for unlimited number of records (the default for HASP
                    and 3780)

                  2 for a 2780 unit with no multirecord feature

                  7 for a unit like an  IBM  2780  with  the  multirecord
                    feature (the default for 2780)

        TIMEOUT-CATEGORY P/S

                  specifies the timeout category where you specify either
                  P   or  S.   P  represents  PRIMARY  and  S  represents
                  SECONDARY.   Timeout  category  is  used  by  the   BSC
                  protocol  to  determine  how connecting systems bid for
                  use of the line.  Two systems bidding for the use of  a
                  line  may  not  be  in the same timeout category, since
                  this condition can result in simultaneous  bids  for  a
                  line,  which  causes  a deadlock.  To prevent this, one
                  system is placed in the PRIMARY (P)  category  and  the
                  other  in  the  SECONDARY (S) category.  For emulation,
                  the  timeout  category  is  normally  SECONDARY.    For
                  termination, the timeout category is normally PRIMARY.

        TRANSPARENCY ON/OFF

                  specifies a transmission mode where the recognition  of
                  most  control  characters  is  suppressed (TRANSPARENCY
                  ON).  The argument can be  specified  only  when  using
                  HASP.  The default TRANSPARENCY is OFF.


   Example

        Specify the SET NODE command to set the clear-to-send delay of  3
        for node IBM1.

        OPR>SET NODE IBM1 CLEAR-SEND-DELAY 3<RET>

        OPR>
        17:23:45        -- Set for Node IBM1 Accepted --

        OPR>






                                    2-98
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SET NQC-STREAM


   2.39  SET NQC-STREAM




   Function

        The  SET  NQC-STREAM  command  specifies  a  node  or   attribute
        associated with a specified NQC stream or range of NQC streams.


   Format

        OPR>SET NQC-STREAM nn keyword argument /switch<RET>

        nn is a stream number or range of stream numbers


   Keyword

        ATTRIBUTE          specifies  characteristics  of  a  given   NQC
                           stream.


   Argument

        OUTPUT-STREAM      specifies  that  the  given  NQC  stream  will
                           transmit output jobs to remote nodes.  This is
                           the default.


   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.


   Example

        Use the SET  NQC-STREAM  command  to  specify  the  OUTPUT-STREAM
        attribute to NQC stream 0.

        OPR>SET NQC-STREAM 0 ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT-STREAM<RET>

        OPR>
        16:10:48            NQC-Stream 0 -- Set Acccepted --

        OPR>

                                    2-99
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH


   2.40  SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH




   Function

        The SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command specifies the kind of jobs to be
        scheduled  on  this  device.   You can set the forms type, output
        limits (in number of feet of paper tape),  priority  limits,  and
        the action to be taken when a job exceeds its output limit.  This
        command allows you to change  the  parameters  that  are  set  at
        GALGEN  time.  You must specify a specific unit number or a range
        of unit numbers.

        The defaults for the paper-tape punch  are  set  by  your  system
        manager  at  software-installation time through the generation of
        the SYS:SPFORM.INI file.  These defaults are usually referred  to
        as NORMAL in most installations.


   Format

        OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn /switch argument<RET>


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies a paper-tape-punch unit number.  The
                           number  is  usually  from  0  to 5, but can be
                           larger   if   your   installation   has   more
                           paper-tape-punch devices.

        n:m                specifies a range of paper-tape punches.

        FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the name of the type  of  paper-tape
                           forms.   Typically, the normal paper-tape form
                           is 1-inch wide fan-fold, and is referred to as
                           1WFF  or  NORMAL.   Your installation can have
                           different form names for  different  types  of
                           paper tape.












                                   2-100
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH


        LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                           specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                           if a paper-tape job that is currently punching
                           exceeds its limit of output.   (The  limit  is
                           set by the user with the /LIMIT switch.) There
                           are three possible actions associated with the
                           LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument.  They are:

             ASK           specifies that you be asked what to do if  the
                           paper-tape  job  exceeds  the  fold  limit  on
                           output.  You then have the option to  continue
                           or abort the paper-tape job.

             ABORT         specifies   that   the   paper-tape   job   be
                           automatically canceled when the limit has been
                           exceeded.

             PROCEED       specifies that  the  paper-tape  job  continue
                           automatically and the output limit be ignored.

        OUTPUT-LIMITS feet

                           specifies  the  maximum  number  of  feet   of
                           punched  paper-tape  output  for  jobs  on the
                           specified  paper  tape  punch  device.    This
                           command  restricts  the  size of jobs that are
                           sent to the specified paper-tape punch.

        PRIORITY-LIMITS nn

                           specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                           importance)  of  a paper-tape punch or a range
                           of paper-tape punches at the central  site  or
                           at  a node.  The numeric value associated with
                           this argument means that only paper-tape  jobs
                           submitted  by  users with the /PRIORITY switch
                           specifying a number within the range  you  set
                           for the paper-tape punch can be output on that
                           paper-tape punch.  The numeric value  for  the
                           PRIORITY-LIMITS  argument can be from 1 to 63.
                           The  higher  the  number,   the   higher   the
                           priority.










                                   2-101
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH


   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.


   Examples

        1.  Use the SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command to set the default  form
            type   to   1WFF   for  a  paper-tape-punch  device  at  your
            installation.

            OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH 0 FORMS-TYPE 1WFF<RET>

            OPR>
            12:45:09        Papertape 0  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>

        2.  Use   the   SET   PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   command   to   set   all
            paper-tape-punch  jobs for a maximum output limit of 25 folds
            per job.  Jobs that require more than 25 folds  will  not  be
            started.

            OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH 0:1 OUTPUT-LIMIT 25<RET>

            OPR>
            13:45:07        Papertape 0  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>



















                                   2-102
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SET PLOTTER


   2.41  SET PLOTTER




   Function

        The SET  PLOTTER  command  specifies  the  kind  of  jobs  to  be
        scheduled  on  this  device.   You can set the forms type, output
        limits (step limits), priority limits, and the action to be taken
        when  a job exceeds its output limit.  This command allows you to
        change the parameters that are set  at  GALGEN  time.   You  must
        specify a unit number or a range of unit numbers.

        The   plotter   device   draws   (or   plots)   ink   plots    of
        computer-generated data.  Its movement in producing the output is
        measured in "steps." The steps refer to the speed per  second  of
        the  plotter  and the distance (or size) that the pencils move on
        the output paper.  The paper for the plotter is  either  drum-fed
        or bed-fed.

        The defaults for plotter output are set by your system manager at
        software-installation   time   through   the  generation  of  the
        SYS:SPFORM.INI file.  At some installations, the default  setting
        for the plotter form type is referred to as NORMAL.


   Format

        OPR>SET PLOTTER nn /switch argument<RET>


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies a plotter unit number.   The  number
                           is  usually  from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
                           your installation has more plotter devices.

        n:m                specifies a range of plotter unit numbers.

        FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the name  of  the  type  of  plotter
                           forms.   Typically,  the  normal plotter paper
                           form is roll-fed or bed-fed,  but  it  can  be
                           referred  to as type ROLL, DRUM, or BED.  Your
                           installation can have different form names for
                           different plotter types.







                                   2-103
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SET PLOTTER


        LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                           specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                           if a plotter job that is currently plotting on
                           the unit number you specify exceeds the output
                           limit.  (The limit is set by the user with the
                           /LIMIT switch.) There are three possible words
                           associated   with   the  LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION
                           argument.  They are:

             ASK           specifies that you be asked what to do if  the
                           plotter  job  exceeds  the  output limit.  You
                           then have the option to continue or abort  the
                           plotter job.

             ABORT         specifies   that   the    plotter    job    be
                           automatically canceled when the limit has been
                           exceeded.

             PROCEED       specifies  that  the  plotter   job   continue
                           automatically  and  the specified output limit
                           be ignored.

        OUTPUT-LIMIT minutes

                           specifies  the  maximum  number   of   plotter
                           minutes.

        PRIORITY-LIMITS nn specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                           importance)   of  a  plotter  or  a  range  of
                           plotters at the central site  or  at  a  node.
                           The   numeric   value   associated  with  this
                           argument  means   that   only   plotter   jobs
                           submitted  by  users with the /PRIORITY switch
                           specifying the number within the range you set
                           for the plotter can be output on that plotter.
                           The  numeric  value  for  the  PRIORITY-LIMITS
                           argument  can be from 1 to 63.  The higher the
                           number, the higher the priority.


   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.




                                   2-104
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SET PLOTTER


   Examples

        1.  Use the SET PLOTTER command to change the forms type  of  the
            plotter.

            OPR>SET PLOTTER 1 FORMS-TYPE ROLL<RET>

            OPR>
            09:34:12        Plotter 1  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>

        2.  Use the SET PLOTTER  command  to  change  the  output  limit.
            Plotter  jobs  requiring  more  than  8  minutes  will not be
            started on Plotter 0.

            OPR>SET PLOTTER 0 OUTPUT-LIMIT 8<RET>

            OPR>
            10:11:12        Plotter 0  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>































                                   2-105
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SET PRINTER


   2.42  SET PRINTER




   Function

        The SET  PRINTER  command  specifies  the  kind  of  jobs  to  be
        scheduled  on  this  device.   You  can  set the forms type, page
        limits, priority limits, and the action to be taken  when  a  job
        exceeds  its  limit.   This  command  allows  you  to  change the
        parameters that are set at  GALGEN  time.   You  must  specify  a
        specific  unit  number  or a range of unit numbers.  In addition,
        you can specify ranges for the page and priority limits.

        The defaults for the line printers at your installation  are  set
        by  your system manager at software-installation time through the
        generation of the SYS:n-CONFIG.CMD file (where n is  the  TOPS-10
        software  generation  number)  and  the  <SYSTEM>LPFORM.INI file.
        These  defaults  are  usually  referred  to  as  NORMAL  in  most
        installations.


   Format

        OPR>SET PRINTER nn /switch argument<RET>


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies a printer unit number.   The  number
                           is  usually  from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
                           your installation has more printer devices.

        n:m                specifies a range of printer unit numbers.

        FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the name  of  the  type  of  printer
                           forms.   Typically,  the normal paper form for
                           the printer is referred to  as  1-ply-wide  or
                           1-ply-narrow.   These can be abbreviated as 1W
                           or 1N, or can be given some other name by your
                           system  manager.   Your  installation can have
                           different  names  for   different   types   of
                           line-printer forms.









                                   2-106
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SET PRINTER


        LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                           specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                           if a printer job that is currently printing on
                           the unit number you specify exceeds the  limit
                           of  output.  The limit is set by the user with
                           /LIMIT.   There  are  three  possible  actions
                           associated   with   the  LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION
                           argument.  They are:

             ASK           specifies that the operator be asked  what  to
                           do  if  the printer job exceeds the page limit
                           on  output.   You  then  have  the  option  to
                           continue or abort the printer job.

             ABORT         specifies that the print job be  automatically
                           canceled when the limit has been exceeded.

             PROCEED       specifies  that   the   print   job   continue
                           automatically  and  the  specified output page
                           limit be ignored.

        LP20-SIMULATION    sets printer  characteristics  to  simulate  a
                           LP20  print  controller, including loading the
                           same VFU  and  RAM  files  as  LP20  printers,
                           assuming   the  device  driver  supports  LP20
                           characteristics.  The command does not  affect
                           a  printer that is started, but the command is
                           remembered, and if the printer is SHUTDOWN and
                           restarted,  the  new value takes effect.  This
                           is the default for ANF printers.

        MAGTAPE            enables the print spooler to write  non-system
                           defaults for magtape.

        NO LP20-SIMULATION disables LP20 Print Controller simulation.

        PAGE-LIMITS pages  specifies the maximum page limit  for  printed
                           output.   This  argument  can  also  specify a
                           range of page limits.  The page  limit  refers
                           to   the  number  of  output  pages  that  are
                           printed.  This command restricts the  size  of
                           jobs that are sent to the printer you specify.










                                   2-107
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SET PRINTER


        PRIORITY-LIMITS nn specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                           importance)  of  a  line printer or a range of
                           line printers at the  central  site  or  at  a
                           node.   The numeric value associated with this
                           argument  means   that   only   printer   jobs
                           submitted  by  users with the /PRIORITY switch
                           specifying the number within the range you set
                           for  the  line  printer  can be output on that
                           printer.    The   numeric   value   for    the
                           PRIORITY-LIMITS  argument can be from 1 to 63.
                           The  higher  the  number,   the   higher   the
                           priority.

        UNIT-TYPE          specifies a one to six character name  of  the
                           type of printer.


   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.


   Switches for MAGTAPE only

        /DENSITY:nn        specifies the BPI (bits-per-inch)  density  of
                           the  tapes to be initialized.  The number (nn)
                           can be 200, 556, 800, 1600, 6250, or  DEFAULT.
                           If you do not specify the /DENSITY switch, the
                           density defaults to 1600 BPI.  If you  specify
                           200, 556, or 800, you must include /TRACKS:n.

        /DIRECTORY-FILE: (YES, NO, or DEFAULT)

                           specifies whether to  write  record  files  to
                           tape.  The default for this switch is YES.

        /LABEL-TYPE:type   specifies the type of label to be  written  on
                           the  tape.  The type can be ANSI, EBCDIC, IBM,
                           DEFAULT, or UNLABELED.

        /MULTI-REEL: (YES, NO, or DEFAULT)

                           enables output to be written to more than  one
                           reel  of tape.  The default for this switch is
                           YES.



                                   2-108
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SET PRINTER


        /PARITY: (ODD, EVEN, or DEFAULT)

                           specifies an EVEN or ODD parity for the  tape.
                           The default for this switch is ODD.

        /TRACKS: (7, 9, or DEFAULT)

                           sets the number of tracks for a magtape volume
                           set  to 7, 9, or DEFAULT.  If the tape density
                           you specify is 1600 or 6250 BPI, then 9 is the
                           default  number  of  tracks.  You must specify
                           the number of tracks when you specify  any  of
                           these tape densities:  200, 556, or 800 BPI.

        /VOLUME-SET:string

                           specifies the name of the cataloged volume-set
                           ("string").


   Examples

        1.  Use the SET PRINTER command  to  set  the  default  printer's
            forms  type  to  1-ply-wide  for  all  line  printers at your
            installation.  NORMAL has  been  previously  defined  in  the
            LPFORM.INI  file  as  1-ply-wide paper.  Printer requests for
            other types of forms will not be started.

            OPR>SET PRINTER 0:2 FORMS-TYPE NORMAL<RET>

            OPR>
            13:10:10        Printer 0  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>
            13:10:11        Printer 1  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>
            13:10:12        Printer 2  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>













                                   2-109
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SET PRINTER


        2.  Use the SET PRINTER command to set the  LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION
            to  PROCEED.   This  means  that all queued printer jobs that
            exceed their output page limit continue to print and are  not
            aborted.   In  addition, there is no required operator action
            to take except loading paper in the line printer.

            OPR>SET PRINTER 0:1 LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION PROCEED<RET>

            OPR>
            15:43:17         Printer 0  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>
            15:43:18         Printer 1  -- Set Accepted --

            OPR>






































                                   2-110
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 SET SYSTEM


   2.43  SET SYSTEM




   Function

        The SET SYSTEM command sets the following system parameters:

         o  maximum number of batch jobs that can run at one time

         o  minimum number of jobs reserved for batch processing

         o  maximum amount of core per job

         o  minimum amount of core per job

         o  system date

         o  system time

         o  system schedule bits


   Format

        OPR>SET SYSTEM keyword argument<RET>


   Keywords

        BATMAX n           sets the maximum number of batch jobs that can
                           run at one time, where n is a number between 0
                           and 14, inclusive.

        BATMIN n           sets the  minimum  number  of  jobs  that  are
                           reserved  for  batch  processing, where n is a
                           number between 0 and 14, inclusive.

        CORMAX n           sets the maximum core size for a job, where  n
                           is  a  number  from  the  minimum value set by
                           MONGEN (usually 10K)  up  to  the  total  user
                           core.  You can specify CORMIN in K (kilowords)
                           or P (pages).  K is the default.

        CORMIN n           sets the minimum  guaranteed  contiguous  core
                           for  a  job,  where  n  is  a  number from the
                           minimum value set by MONGEN (usually  10K)  up
                           to  the  total  user  core.   You  can specify
                           CORMIN in K (kilowords) or P  (pages).   K  is
                           the default.


                                   2-111
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 SET SYSTEM


        DATE dd-mmm-yy     sets the system date.  SET  SYSTEM  DATE  does
                           not  check  the validity of the date argument,
                           as is done at system initialization.

        DAYTIME hh:mm:ss   sets the  system  time  of  day.   This  is  a
                           potentially  dangerous  command; do not use it
                           except  by  express  request  of  the   system
                           manager.

        DISK-CACHE-SIZE n  sets the size of the monitor  I/O  cache.   If
                           you  do not specify a value for n, the default
                           is the configured size.  (GALGEN)

        LOGMAX n           sets the maximum number of logged-in jobs that
                           can  run on the system simultaneously, where n
                           is a number from 1 through 512, inclusive.

        SCHEDULE nnnn      sets the system schedule bits to one  or  more
                           of   the   specifications  designated  by  the
                           following octal numbers:

                           0    specifies regular timesharing  and  batch
                                operations.

                           1    specifies  that  no  users  can  log  in,
                                except on the CTY.

                           2    specifies that no users can log  in  from
                                remote  terminals,  and data set requests
                                will be rejected.

                           4    specifies batch operation only.

                           10   specifies stand-alone operation only.

                           100  enables  unprivileged  users  to   assign
                                restricted devices.

                           200  allows spooling of output devices.

                           400  specifies no operator coverage.

                           1000 prevents automatic execution of NETLDR.

                           You may specify several  uses  by  adding  the
                           appropriate  values.   For example, the number
                           15  specifies  stand-alone  operations,  batch
                           only operations, and no logins except from the
                           CTY (a combination of 1, 4, and 10).




                                   2-112
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 SET SYSTEM


   Examples

        1.  Use the SET SYSTEM command to set the maximum number of  jobs
            that can log in to the system at one time to 100.

            OPR>SET SYSTEM LOGMAX 100

            OPR>
            17:05:46        -- Set accepted, LOGMAX is now 100 --

            OPR>

        2.  Use the SET SYSTEM command to set the minimum number of  jobs
            reserved for batch processing to 5.

            OPR>SET SYSTEM BATMIN 5<RET>

            OPR>
            17:10:32        -- Set accepted, BATMIN is now 5 --

            OPR>
































                                   2-113
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SET TAPE-DRIVE


   2.44  SET TAPE-DRIVE




   Function

        The SET TAPE-DRIVE command sets the availability  characteristics
        of  a  particular  tape-drive device.  The SET TAPE-DRIVE command
        allows you to do the following:

         o  Allow users to request that tapes be mounted

         o  Disallow users' requests to mount tapes

         o  Initialize tapes

        You must specify the logical tape-drive  name,  and  one  of  the
        keywords:  AVAILABLE, INITIALIZE, or UNAVAILABLE.


   Format

        OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE keyword argument /switch<RET>


   Keyword

        MTxn:              specifies the tape drive name, where x is  the
                           tape-controller  identification  and  n is the
                           tape-drive number.  You must include the colon
                           at  the  end  of  the  name.   An example of a
                           logical tape-drive name is MTA0:  for Magnetic
                           Tape Drive 0.


   Arguments

        AVAILABLE          makes the specified tape drive  available  for
                           user   tape  mount  requests.   This  argument
                           cancels  the   effect   of   the   UNAVAILABLE
                           argument.   The  tape  drive remains AVAILABLE
                           until you set it UNAVAILABLE.










                                   2-114
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SET TAPE-DRIVE


        INITIALIZE         makes the specified tape drive unavailable for
                           user  mount requests so that you can use it to
                           initialize   tapes.    A   labeled   tape   is
                           initialized    when   you   write   a   volume
                           identification at the beginning of the tape in
                           the  standard  ANSI format.  An unlabeled tape
                           is  initialized  when  you  write   a   record
                           containing 80 null characters at the beginning
                           of  the  tape.   When  the  tapes  have   been
                           INITIALIZEd,   the  tape  drive  automatically
                           becomes available  for  user  mount  requests.
                           You   specify   the  number  of  tapes  to  be
                           initialized with the /COUNT switch.

        UNAVAILABLE        makes the specified tape drive unavailable  to
                           user   tape-mount   requests.   This  argument
                           cancels the effect of the AVAILABLE  argument.
                           If  a  user  is currently using a tape on this
                           tape drive, the tape drive becomes unavailable
                           after  the  user  completes  his work.  If the
                           system crashes or is shut  down,  the  command
                           SET  TAPE-DRIVE  MTAn:  UNAVAILABLE remains in
                           effect after the system is in operation again.

                                                NOTE

                               Drives that are set UNAVAILABLE can be
                               ASSIGNed  by  user  jobs.   This could
                               pose a security problem, as  no  label
                               processing    or    verification    is
                               performed  by   the   system   on   an
                               UNAVAILABLE drive.

                           When you specify UNAVAILABLE, you can enter  a
                           single-  or multiple-line reason and terminate
                           it  with  a  carriage  return;  or   you   can
                           terminate   it  immediately  with  a  carriage
                           return after the UNAVAILABLE keyword  and  OPR
                           responds  with  ENTER  TEXT AND TERMINATE WITH
                           ^Z.  You then enter as many lines of  text  as
                           you  need.   When you press <CTRL/Z>, the OPR>
                           prompt returns and your report is logged  into
                           the ERROR.SYS file.










                                   2-115
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SET TAPE-DRIVE


   Switches for INITIALIZE only

        /ABORT             enables   you   to   stop   and   cancel   the
                           initializing process.

        /COUNT:nn          specifies the  number  (nn)  of  tapes  to  be
                           initialized.     The   /COUNT   switch,   when
                           specified,   provides    a    mechanism    for
                           initialization of multiple tapes with the same
                           attributes.  Each tape prompts you with a WTOR
                           message  for the volume identification.  After
                           initialization,  the  tape  is   automatically
                           unloaded and the tape drive is ready to accept
                           the next tape to  initialize.   When  as  many
                           tapes  as  specified by the /COUNT switch have
                           been initialized, the tape  drive  returns  to
                           the AVAILABLE (off-line) state.

                           If you use this switch, the volid you  specify
                           in  the  /VOLUME-ID  switch must have trailing
                           numerics which will allow  the  numeric  value
                           specified by the /INCREMENT switch to be added
                           after each tape is initialized.

        /DENSITY:nn        specifies the BPI (bits-per-inch)  density  of
                           the  tapes to be initialized.  The number (nn)
                           can be 200, 556, 800, 1600, or 6250.   If  you
                           do   not  specify  the  /DENSITY  switch,  the
                           density defaults to 1600 BPI.

        /INCREMENT:nn      specifies the numeric value (nn) by  which  to
                           increment  the  tape volumes .  This switch is
                           valid only when specified with the  /VOLUME-ID
                           switch.   If  you  do not include this switch,
                           the default increment value is 1.   (Refer  to
                           /COUNT.)

        /LABEL-TYPE:type   specifies the type of label to be  written  on
                           the  tape.   The  type can be ANSI, EBCDIC, or
                           UNLABELED.  If  you  specify  any  label  type
                           other  than  unlabeled,  you  must include the
                           /VOLUME-ID switch.











                                   2-116
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SET TAPE-DRIVE


        /OVERRIDE-EXPIRATION: (YES or NO)

                           specifies whether to check for the  expiration
                           date  of the data on the tape.  If you specify
                           NO and attempt to reinitialize a labeled  tape
                           whose  first  file  is not expired, the system
                           issues  an  error   message   and   does   not
                           reinitialize  the  tape.   If you specify YES,
                           each tape  is  reinitialized  unconditionally.
                           If  you  are initializing brand new tapes, you
                           should specify YES to prevent the  tape  drive
                           from  "running away" when PULSAR tries to read
                           a label from the tape.

                           The default for this switch is YES.

        /OWNER:[PPN]

                           specifies the project-programmer number of the
                           owner  of  the  tapes to be initialized.  This
                           switch affects only ANSI  and  EBCDIC  labeled
                           tapes.   If  you  do  not  specify  the /OWNER
                           switch, the  tape  is  initialized  for  owner
                           [0,0].

        /PROTECTION:nnn    specifies  a  3-digit  octal  number  as   the
                           protection  number of the tape.  The number is
                           usually from 000 (where  anyone  can  use  the
                           tape)  through  777  (where no one can use the
                           tape).  If you do not specify the  /PROTECTION
                           switch, the default is 000.

        /TAPE-DISPOSITION:condition

                           specifies what is to be done to the tape after
                           it  is  initialized.   The  condition  can  be
                           either HOLD or UNLOAD.  If you  specify  HOLD,
                           the  tape  is initialized and is not unloaded.
                           A user requesting the tape can use it  without
                           your  having  to  reload  it.   If you specify
                           UNLOAD,  the  tape  is  initialized   and   is
                           unloaded  from the tape drive.  The default is
                           UNLOAD.   If  a  value  greater  than   1   is
                           specified    by   the   /COUNT   switch,   the
                           /TAPE-DISPOSITION switch applies to  the  last
                           tape initialized.







                                   2-117
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SET TAPE-DRIVE


        /VOLUME-ID:"volid" specifies  a  volume  identification  for  the
                           tape.    The   volid  must  be  from  1  to  6
                           characters.  If the volid is  to  contain  any
                           nonalphanumeric  characters, the volid must be
                           enclosed in double quotes (").  This switch is
                           not necessary if the tape is being initialized
                           as an unlabeled tape.


   Restriction

        If you set a tape drive to be UNAVAILABLE before you set the tape
        drive to INITIALIZE, the following error message appears:

        hh:mm:ss        Device MTxn  -- Illegal For UNAVAILABLE Device --

                                     CAUTION

                Setting a tape drive unavailable  can  produce  a
                system  deadlock  if insufficient resources exist
                to satisfy outstanding  disk  and  tape  resource
                requests.


        The SET TAPE-DRIVE command to INITIALIZE must be given for a tape
        drive  that  is  AVAILABLE.  When the initialization is complete,
        the tape drive is left in an AVAILABLE (off-line) state.


        Examples

        1.  A user (JONES.J) has  requested  a  tape  mount  of  an  ANSI
            labeled  tape  with  a volid of FOOBAR and has requested that
            you initialize the tape first.   The  volume  is  initialized
            with ANSI labels and a volid of FOOBAR.  (The system defaults
            to density [1600 BPI] and protection [000].) When the tape is
            mounted  on  the  drive,  the  tape  is  initialized and then
            becomes  available  to  the  user   (/TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD).
            Volume recognition takes over and satisfies the mount request
            for FOOBAR.













                                   2-118
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SET TAPE-DRIVE


            OPR>
             9:04:38    Device MTB3  -- Unlabeled volume mounted --
                        Density 1600 BPI, write-enabled

            OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: INITIALIZE /LABEL-TYPE:ANSI -<RET>

            /OWNER:[31,5723]/TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD/VOLUME-ID:FOOBAR<RET>

            OPR>
             9:05:12    Device MTA3  -- Volume initialized --
                        Volume Id:FOOBAR, Label type:ANSI, Density:1600
                        Owner:[31,5723], Protection:000

            OPR>
             9:05:14    Device MTA3  -- Volume Initialization complete --
                        Drive is available for use

            OPR>
             9:05:20    Device MTA3  -- Volume FOOBAR reassigned --
                        User: JONES.J [31,5723] Job# 39

            OPR>

        2.  Use the SET TAPE-DRIVE command to set tape drive MTA1:  to be
            unavailable.   Any  user  job  currently using this device is
            allowed to finish his work and dismount the tape  before  the
            device becomes unavailable.

            OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA1: UNAVAILABLE<RET>
            Enter text and terminate with ^Z
            TAPE DRIVE IS NEEDED BY FIELD SERVICE^Z
            OPR>
            10:23:46    Device MTA1  -- Set Unavailable --

            OPR>


        3.  Use the SET TAPE-DRIVE  command  to  make  tape  drive  MTA3:
            available for tape mounts.

            OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: AVAILABLE<RET>

            OPR>
            12:02:2     Device MTA3  -- Set Available --

            OPR>







                                   2-119
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             SET TERMINAL TYPE


   2.45  SET TERMINAL TYPE




   Function

        The SET TERMINAL TYPE command sets your  terminal  to  the  model
        number  (mode)  that  it should be.  You must specify the keyword
        TYPE and the model name or number.

        In addition, you  can  set  your  terminal  to  have  OPR  keypad
        functions.   Keypad functions allow you to give an OPR command by
        pressing one of the PF keys to the right of the keyboard on  VT52
        and  VT100  terminals.   The  functions are listed below with the
        KEYPAD keyword.


   Format

        OPR>SET TERMINAL TYPE argument<RET>


   Keywords

        KEYPAD         specifies that your terminal  has  the  additional
                       set  of keys to the right of your keyboard.  These
                       keys are numbered 0 through 9 and are referred  to
                       as  PF  keys.   When you press any one of them, an
                       OPR command is automatically issued to the system.
                       The  keypad  function  is valid for VT52 and VT100
                       terminals only; if you use it, you must  set  your
                       terminal  to  VT52  or  VT100  before  you set the
                       terminal to KEYPAD.  The functions are as follows:

                        Key  Function
                        0    No Function
                        1    SHOW STATUS
                        2    SHOW QUEUES
                        3    SHOW PARAMETERS
                        4    SHOW MESSAGES
                        5    SHOW ROUTE-TABLE
                        6    No Function
                        7    Clear screen, move OPR>  prompt  to  top  of
                             screen
                        8    SHOW OPERATORS
                        9    SHOW QUEUE MOUNT-REQUESTS






                                   2-120
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             SET TERMINAL TYPE


        NOKEYPAD       specifies that your terminal  does  not  have  the
                       additional  keyboard feature to issue OPR commands
                       automatically to the system.

        TYPE           specifies the model/type  name  of  your  terminal
                       that    automatically    sets   various   terminal
                       parameters.


   Arguments

        33                  VT101                 VT240 
        35                  VT102                 VT330
        LA120               VT103                 VT340 
        LA36                VT125                 VT50
        VK100               VT180                 VT52
        VT05                VT185                 VT61 
        VT100               VT220


   Examples

        1.  Use the SET TERMINAL command to set your terminal to model
            LA36. 

            OPR>SET TERMINAL TYPE LA36<RET>

            OPR>

        2.  Set your terminal to VT100 mode, then to KEYPAD operation.

            OPR>SET TERMINAL TYPE VT100<RET>

            OPR>SET TERMINAL KEYPAD<RET>

            OPR>

















                                   2-121
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 SET USAGE


   2.46  SET USAGE




   Function

        The SET USAGE command allows you to control the usage  accounting
        system  during  system  operation.   Consult  your system manager
        before you use the SET USAGE command.  Your installation may have
        specific   usage   accounting   requirements  for  billing  users
        accessing the system.

        Normally, the SYS:SYSTEM.CMD file contains the SET USAGE command.
        Your  system  manager  may have set up an accounting billing rate
        for prime time users (for example, from 08:00 to 18:00)  and  for
        off-prime  time  users (for example, from 19:00 to 07:00).  There
        may also be another accounting billing rate for weekend users.

        The usage accounting file, ACT:USAGE.OUT, can be used to  collect
        accounting information such as CPU time, spooled output requests,
        and disk space used.  Depending on the method you use, accounting
        data  is  collected and/or written to the ACT:USAGE.OUT file when
        you give the SET USAGE command.

   Format

        OPR>SET USAGE keyword argument /switch<RET>

   Keywords

        BILLING-CLOSURE    specifies that all session entries  be  closed
                           at a given time (by the argument hh:mm).  This
                           keyword  can  be  used  when   you   want   to
                           accumulate  accounting  data  for users on the
                           system between prime time and non-prime  time.
                           For  example,  a user is on the system between
                           16:00 and  19:00,  and  you  set  the  billing
                           closure  at  18:00 to collect prime time usage
                           between 16:00 and 18:00.

        FILE-CLOSURE       specifies  that  the  current  usage  file  be
                           closed  and renamed, and that a new usage file
                           (USAGE.OUT) be opened.  The old usage file  is
                           renamed in the format of yymmdd.hhx, where:

                           yy    is the year.

                           mm    is the month.

                           dd    is the day.


                                   2-122
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 SET USAGE


                           hh    is the hour.

                           x     is a sequence  number  in  the  range  0
                                 through 9.

                           The renamed file, like the USAGE.OUT file,  is
                           stored in the ACT:[1,7] directory.

                           When    you    specify     FILE-CLOSURE,     a
                           BILLING-CLOSURE    operation    is   performed
                           automatically.   If  you   do   not   want   a
                           BILLING-CLOSURE    performed,    specify   the
                           /NO-SESSION-ENTRIES switch to prevent it.


   Arguments

        hh:mm              specifies the time  (24-hour  clock  time)  in
                           hours  (hh)  and  minutes  (mm) separated by a
                           colon.

        DAILY hh:mm        specifies file closure on a daily basis  at  a
                           particular  time  in  hours  (hh)  and minutes
                           (mm).

        EVERY day hh:mm    specifies file closure on a particular day  at
                           a  particular  time  in hours (hh) and minutes
                           (mm).   The  day  parameter  for   the   EVERY
                           argument   can  be  SUNDAY,  MONDAY,  TUESDAY,
                           WEDNESDAY, THURSDAY, FRIDAY, or SATURDAY.

        NOW                specifies file closure to occur immediately.

        mm-dd-yy hh:mm     specifies  a  date  and  time  when  the  file
                           closure will occur.  The date is in the format
                           of "mm-dd-yy," where mm is the  month,  dd  is
                           the  day,  and  yy  is  the  year separated by
                           hyphens.  (You can optionally specify the date
                           in  the format of "dd-xxx-yy," where xxx is an
                           abbreviated month name.) The time  is  in  the
                           format of "hh:mm," where hh is the hour and mm
                           is the minutes separated by a colon.  The time
                           applies to a 24-hour clock.


   Switch

        /NO-SESSION-ENTRIES
                           Disables automatic  BILLING-CLOSURE  when  you
                           use  the FILE-CLOSURE keyword.  This switch is
                           valid only with the FILE-CLOSURE keyword.


                                   2-123
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 SET USAGE


   Restrictions

        If the specified time for the execution of  this  command  occurs
        when  the  system is down, the usage activity will not occur when
        the system is restarted.


   Examples

        1.  Close the billing sessions for the change between  first  and
            second shift.

            OPR>SET USAGE BILLING-CLOSURE 16:30<RET>

            13:21:27 --Will close billing sessions at 15-Jul-88 16:29:59--

            OPR>

            At 16:30 (4:30 PM),  or  shortly  thereafter,  the  following
            message appears on the OPR terminal.

            OPR>
            16:34:22 -- Message from the Accounting System --
                     Session entries written for all jobs

            OPR>

        2.  Close and rename the USAGE.OUT file.  Do not  attempt  to  do
            this until you check with your system manager.

            OPR>SET USAGE FILE-CLOSURE NOW<RET>

            OPR>
             9:25:37 -- Message from the Accounting System --
                     ACT:USAGE.OUT closed and renamed to ACT:800715.090[1,7]

            OPR>
















                                   2-124
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    SHOW


   2.47  SHOW




   Function

        The SHOW command displays system information.  The  SHOW  command
        does not alter or change any jobs, queues, or devices.

        Because the SHOW  command  is  complex,  each  of  the  following
        keywords is described in the following sections:

             ALLOCATION
             CONTROL-FILE
             MESSAGES
             NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES
             OPERATORS
             PARAMETERS
             QUEUES
             ROUTE-TABLE
             STATUS
             SYSTEM
             TIME





























                                   2-125
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              SHOW ALLOCATION


   2.48  SHOW ALLOCATION




   Function

        The  SHOW  ALLOCATION  command  displays  allocations   for   all
        mountable  devices  (disk  drives and tape drives).  This command
        displays the disk drive name, the structure name, and, for tapes,
        the  track  size  and  BPI density of the allocated resource.  It
        shows the number of devices allocated and the number  of  devices
        mounted.   You  can  display the mountable device allocations for
        all job requests, all batch  job  requests,  a  particular  batch
        request, or a particular job request.

        Use the SHOW ALLOCATION command when you need to know what  types
        of  disk or tape drives are allocated to a job that is waiting in
        the batch queue.  The job could be waiting because another  batch
        job  has  already  allocated  the  needed  resources.   Thus, the
        waiting batch job allocation requests can not  be  answered.   In
        addition,  this  command  is  useful  when  you need to know what
        mountable device allocations have been made by timesharing users.


   Format

        OPR>SHOW ALLOCATION argument<RET>


   Arguments

        ALL-REQUESTS       specifies  display  of  the  mountable  device
                           allocations  for  all  job requests (batch and
                           timesharing) that are currently  logged-in  or
                           waiting in the batch queue to be executed.

        BATCH-REQUEST nn   specifies display of the allocations  for  the
                           batch  request  with the identification number
                           nn.  If you do not specify the  batch  request
                           number   (nn),  all  batch  job  requests  are
                           displayed.

        JOB nn             specifies  display  of  the  mountable  device
                           allocation  for a particular job (either batch
                           or timesharing).  You  must  specify  the  job
                           number (nn) with this argument.






                                   2-126
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              SHOW ALLOCATION


   Examples

        1.  Use the SHOW ALLOCATION command for all batch job requests.

            OPR>SHOW ALLOCATION BATCH-REQUEST<RET>

            OPR>
             8:40:32                -- Mountable Device Allocations --

            Allocation for batch request 3  DAN DEUFEL [30,5215]
                 Volume set         Resource          Type      All  Own
            ------------------  ----------------  ------------  ---  ---
            ---                 RP06              Disk unit      1    1
            CBL1                CBL1              Structure      1    1

            Allocation for batch request 19 DPM    [50,56]
                 Volume set         Resource          Type      All  Own
            ------------------  ----------------  ------------  ---  ---
            DSKC                DSKC              Structure      1    1

            Allocation for batch request 24 SYSV52 [1,2]
                 Volume set         Resource          Type      All  Own
            ------------------  ----------------  ------------  ---  ---
            ---                 9 TK 800/1600     Magtape unit   1    1
            ---                 RP06              Disk unit      1    0
            DSKB                DSKB              Structure      1    1
            DSKC                DSKC              Structure      1    1
            VOL-SET             VOL1              Magtape vol.   1    1

            OPR>

        2.  Use the SHOW ALLOCATION command for timesharing job 13.

            OPR>SHOW ALLOCATION JOB 13<RET>

            OPR>
            10:51:34                -- Mountable Device Allocations --

            Allocation for job 13 OPR    [1,2]
                 Volume set         Resource          Type      All  Own
            ------------------  ----------------  ------------  ---  ---
            DSKB                DSKB              Structure      1    1
            DSKC                DSKC              Structure      1    1

            OPR>








                                   2-127
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             SHOW CONTROL-FILE


   2.49  SHOW CONTROL-FILE




   Function

        The SHOW CONTROL-FILE command displays  the  control  file  of  a
        batch  job  that is processing in a particular batch stream.  The
        only keyword for this command is  BATCH-STREAM  followed  by  the
        stream number.  You must specify the BATCH-STREAM keyword.

        This command enables you to display a particular stream while the
        job  is  processing, to see any possible problems that might come
        about due to an incorrect command, and to check whether there are
        any commands that require an operator action of some kind.


   Format

        OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE keyword nn /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch input stream.

        nn                 specifies  the  stream  number  of  the  batch
                           stream  to  be  displayed  by  OPR.   You must
                           specify this stream number.

   Switch

        /LINES:number      specifies the number of lines of  the  control
                           file  in  the batch stream you want displayed.
                           If you do not specify the /LINES  switch,  the
                           default is ten lines.
















                                   2-128
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             SHOW CONTROL-FILE


   Examples

        1.  Use the SHOW CONTROL-FILE command to display four lines of  a
            control file in batch stream 2.

            OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE BATCH-STREAM 2 /LINES:4<RET>

            OPR>
            16:42:20        Batch-Stream 2 Job # 3 -- Show-Control-File --
                            Job MYFILE Req #121 for ADLEY [27,1331]

                        .MOUNT TAPE REEL1:
                        .COMPILE TEST2/FORTRAN
                        .EXECUTE
                        .DISMOUNT TAPE REEL1:

                              *** END OF DATA ***

            OPR>

        2.  Use the SHOW CONTROL-FILE command to  display  ten  lines  in
            batch stream 0.

            OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE BATCH-STREAM 0<RET>

            OPR>
            13:20:30      Batch-Stream 0 Job #12  -- Show-Control-File --
                          Job EDIT01 Req #211 for LATTA [27,2444]

                          *F.PG[
                          *M.
                          *D.
                          *E 
                          .IF (ERROR) .GOTO DEL1
                          .SOS
                          *F.PG[
                          *M.
                          *D.
                          *E

                               *** END OF DATA ***

            OPR>










                                   2-129
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SHOW MESSAGES


   2.50  SHOW MESSAGES




   Function

        The SHOW MESSAGES command displays any outstanding messages  that
        require  you  to  perform  an  action  or  reply with the RESPOND
        command.

        With the SHOW MESSAGES command, you can  specify  an  outstanding
        message number or a node.  If you do not specify either a message
        number or a node, OPR responds with all outstanding messages that
        you are enabled to receive.

        Use the RESPOND command to respond  to  any  outstanding  message
        displayed by this SHOW command.


   Format

        OPR>SHOW MESSAGES nnnn /switch<RET>


   Keyword

        nnnn               specifies  the  outstanding  message   number.
                           Valid  message  numbers  can  range  from 0 to
                           9999.  If you do not specify a message number,
                           all  outstanding  messages with their sequence
                           numbers, if any, are displayed,  provided  you
                           have enabled the messages to appear at the OPR
                           terminal.


   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.

                           If you do not specify the  /NODE  switch,  all
                           outstanding   messages   with  their  sequence
                           numbers, if any, are displayed, provided  that
                           the  messages are enabled to appear at the OPR
                           terminal.



                                   2-130
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SHOW MESSAGES


   Restriction

        If you have disabled the output display  of  ALL-MESSAGES  and/or
        OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES, or if there are no outstanding messages, OPR
        responds with the message:

        hh:mm:ss        -- No Outstanding Messages --

        where hh:mm:ss is the time (in hours, minutes,  seconds)  of  the
        response.


   Examples

        1.  Use the SHOW MESSAGES  command  to  display  all  outstanding
            messages  with  their  sequence  numbers.  You are enabled to
            receive the output display of all messages.

            OPR>SHOW MESSAGES<RET>

            OPR>
            10:25:12                -- System messages outstanding --


             9:38:21  <2>   --Message from timesharing user --
                            job 48 [27,5434]MORRILL at TTY 142
                            Ignore this message

             9:41:07  <3>   Printer 0 [NOVA(31)]
                            Please load forms type 'NARROW'
                            Type 'RESPOND <number> PROCEED' when ready

            OPR>

        2.  Use the SHOW  MESSAGES  command  to  display  an  outstanding
            message with the message number 47.

            OPR>SHOW MESSAGES 47<RET>

            OPR>
            12:45:21                -- System messages outstanding --

            12:30:30  <47>  Batch-Stream 0   JOB #30
                            Job TEST Req #321 for DZIEDZIC[10,6016]
                            Is anyone there?

            OPR>






                                   2-131
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES


   2.51  SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES




   Function

        The SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES  command  displays  the  information
        specified by the DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES command.


   Format

        OPR>SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES<RET>


   Example

   Use the SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES  command  to  display  defined  queue
   names.

   OPR>SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES<RET>

   OPR>
   11:51:55             -- Network Queue Names --
          Queue  Name         Type     Object Type      Node    Unit
   ------------------------  ------  ----------------  ------  -------
   SI$8700                   Remote  Printer           JUNIPR     0
   SI$87PLOT                 Remote  Plotter           JUNIPR     0
   SWE$LN03                  Remote  Printer           GALLO   Generic
   TOPS$LN03                 Remote  Printer           VINO     LAT999
   OPR>





















                                   2-132
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SHOW OPERATORS


   2.52  SHOW OPERATORS




   Function

        The SHOW OPERATORS command displays the terminal and job  numbers
        of  all  users  on  the  system who are running OPR.  The display
        shows the node, terminal number, job number, and user's name.

        In addition, you can specify the /NODE switch (network  software)
        to  display all users running OPR at a remote station.  If you do
        not specify the /NODE switch, all operators on  the  system  (all
        nodes included) are displayed.


   Format

        OPR>SHOW OPERATORS /switch<RET>


   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.


   Restriction

        If there are no users running OPR at the node you specify in  the
        SHOW OPERATORS command, OPR responds with:

        hh:mm:ss        -- No Operators at Node name --

        where name is the node name or number.













                                   2-133
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               SHOW OPERATORS


   Examples

        1.  Use the SHOW OPERATORS command to display all  users  on  the
            system running OPR.

            OPR>SHOW OPERATORS<RET>

            OPR>
            12:23:34                --  Operators  --

             Node        Type    Terminal   Job   User
            -----       ------   --------   ---   ----------------------
            KL1026(26)  System      4        1    OPR    [1,2]
            KL1026(26)  System      0       27    OPR    [1,2]
            KL1026(26)  System      1        5    SYSV52 [1,2]

            OPR>

        2.  Use the SHOW OPERATORS command to display  the  operators  on
            node CTCH22.

            OPR>SHOW OPERATOR /NODE:CTCH22<RET>

            OPR>
            14:23:45                --  Operators  --

             Node        Type    Terminal   Job   User
            -----       ------   --------   ---   ----------------------
            CTCH22(22)  System      1       13    OPR    [1,2]
            CTCH22(22)  System     17       41    HARAMUNDANIS [27,4117]

            OPR>





















                                   2-134
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              SHOW PARAMETERS


   2.53  SHOW PARAMETERS




   Function

        The SHOW PARAMETERS command displays  the  current  defaults  and
        values  for  a  particular  device  or  range  of devices, or all
        devices known to the system.

        You can use the SHOW PARAMETERS  command  to  check  the  current
        values  of a device before and after you change the parameters of
        a particular device.  If you do not specify a  keyword  with  the
        SHOW PARAMETERS command, the command defaults to all devices.  If
        you do not specify  an  argument  to  the  keyword,  the  command
        defaults to all devices or streams of the type you specify.

        Use SET to change  the  parameters.   Parameters  are  documented
        under SET commands.


   Format

        OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS keyword argument /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       displays information about the specified batch
                           input stream or a range of batch streams.

        CARD-PUNCH         displays  information  about   the   specified
                           card-punch or a range of such devices.

        FAL-STREAM         displays the network type associated with  the
                           specified FAL stream (ANF-10 or DECnet).

        NETWORK-NODE       displays the IBM network parameters  of  nodes
                           currently  known to the system.  This argument
                           displays  valid  information  only   if   your
                           installation  has IBM Communications software.
                           The display shows the value of  the  arguments
                           that  can  be  altered with the DEFINE and SET
                           NODE commands.

        NQC-STREAM         displays information about the  specified  NQC
                           stream or a range of NQC streams.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   displays  information  about   the   specified
                           paper-tape-punch or a range of such devices.


                                   2-135
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              SHOW PARAMETERS


        PLOTTER            displays  information  about   the   specified
                           plotter or a range of such devices.

        PRINTER            displays  information  about   the   specified
                           line-printer or a range of such devices.

   Arguments

        nn                 specifies  a  numeric  value  representing   a
                           batch-stream  number  or a device unit number.
                           The number is usually from 0 to 5, but can  be
                           larger   if  your  installation  has  acquired
                           additional devices.

        n:m                specifies a range of  batch  streams  or  unit
                           numbers.


   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies a remote node for which the  command
                           is  effective.   For example, use /NODE:KL1026
                           to specify the node named KL1026.  If  you  do
                           not specify /NODE:identifier, your own node is
                           the default.


   Examples

        1.  Use the  SHOW  PARAMETERS  command  to  display  the  current
            parameters of all batch streams.

            OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS BATCH-STREAMS<RET>

            OPR>
            18:25:07                -- System Device Parameters --

            Batch-Stream Parameters:
              Strm     Minutes    Prio  Core limits  Opr-Intvn
              ----  -----------  -----  -----------  ---------
                 0      0:3600    1:63      1:2000     Yes
                 1      0:10      1:19      1:2000     Yes
                 2      0:11000   1:19      1:2000     Yes
                 3      0:11000  20:63      1:2000     Yes
                 4      0:3600    1:63      1:512      No

            OPR>






                                   2-136
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              SHOW PARAMETERS


        2.  Use the  SHOW  PARAMETERS  command  to  display  the  current
            parameters of the card punch.

            OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS CARD-PUNCHES 0<RET>

            OPR>
            19:43:30                -- System Device Parameters --

            Card-Punch Parameters:
              Unit  Card-Limits    Form    Prio  Lim-Ex  Dev-Chars
              ----  ------------  ------  -----  ------  ---------
                 0      1:500     NORMAL   1:63     Ask

            OPR>

        3.  Use the  SHOW  PARAMETERS  command  to  display  the  current
            parameters of all line-printer devices.

            OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS PRINTER<RET>

            OPR>
            16:45:10                -- System Device Parameters --

            Printer Parameters:

             Unit     Node      Page Limits  Form   Prio   Lim Ex Dev-Chars
             ---- ----------    ------------ ------ ------ ------ ---------
                0   KL1026(26)      1:5000   NARROW 1:63      Ask    Lower
                1   KL1026(26)      1:20000  NORMAL 1:63      Ask    Lower

            OPR>






















                                   2-137
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SHOW QUEUES


   2.54  SHOW QUEUES




   Function

        The SHOW QUEUES command displays the queue, or list of jobs,  for
        a  particular  device or for all batch streams.  SHOW QUEUES also
        displays the queue for pending system events  such  as  scheduled
        system  shutdown  and  billing  file  closure.   The  SHOW QUEUES
        command displays the following:

         o  active job requests

         o  job requests waiting to be processed

         o  held job requests that must be rescheduled.

        You can display all jobs in all queues or only jobs in particular
        queues.  The default for the SHOW QUEUES command is ALL-JOBS.

        The asterisk (*) before a job name in  the  SHOW  QUEUES  display
        designates currently active job requests.


   Format

        OPR>SHOW QUEUES keyword /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        ALL-JOBS           shows all queues for the system.  ALL-JOBS  is
                           the default of the SHOW QUEUES command.

        BATCH-JOBS         specifies all batch jobs

        CARD-PUNCH-JOBS    specifies all card-punch jobs

        EVENTS             specifies the following system events:

                            o  billing file closure (BILCLS)

                            o  ORION log file closure (OPRFIL)

                            o  usage file closure (USGFIL)

                            o  scheduled system shutdown (KSYS)

                            o  scheduled command file execution (TAKFIL)


                                   2-138
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SHOW QUEUES


        MOUNT-REQUESTS     specifies requests for tape and disk structure
                           mounts.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS

                           specifies all paper-tape-punch jobs

        PLOTTER-JOBS       specifies all plotter jobs

        PRINTER-JOBS       specifies all line-printer jobs


   Switches

        /NODE:identifier   displays the given  queue  for  the  node  you
                           specify.   For example, /NODE:KL1026 specifies
                           the node named KL1026.  If you do not  specify
                           a  node  identifier,  your  own  node  is  the
                           default.

        /ALL               displays a full queue listing.  A full listing
                           includes   column  headers,  as  well  as  the
                           switches (for  example,  /HOLD),  and  default
                           parameters that apply to the jobs.

        /SHORT             displays  an  abbreviated  queue  listing.   A
                           short  listing  displays the job name, request
                           number, scheduled run time or expiration,  and
                           the  user  name  of  each job in the queue.  A
                           short listing does not display column headers,
                           switches, or default parameters.

        /USER:[PPN]        displays only jobs submitted by  a  particular
                           user.    The   user   is   identified  by  his
                           project-programmer number [PPN].


















                                   2-139
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SHOW QUEUES


   Examples

        1.  Use the SHOW QUEUES command to display batch  jobs  that  are
            processing or waiting to be processed by the batch system.


            OPR>SHOW QUEUES BATCH-JOBS /ALL<RET>

            OPR>
            14:23:14                -- System Queues Listing --

            Batch Queue:
            Job Name  Req#  Run Time Core            User
            --------  ----  --------  ----  ------------------------
            * GENSCH    21  00:05:00 500    FRIES [10,3711]   In Stream:0
                /Uniq:Yes /Restart:No /Seq#:713
                Job 14 Running MACRO Runtime 0:01:41

            * DFRPM     25  00:20:00 500    GATULIS [27,3123]  In Stream:1
                Job# 17 Running LINK Last Label: LOAD Runtime 0:00:04
              SBUILD    29  01:00:00  500    KIRSCHEN [30,5215]     
                      /After: 5-Jan-88 20:00:00 /Uniq:Yes
                      /Restart:Yes /Seq#:784
              WEEKLY    37  00:05:00  500    OPERATOR [1,2]     Hold:Yes
                      /Uniq:Yes /Restart:No /Seq#:791
            There are 4 jobs in the Queue (2 in Progress)

            OPR>

        2.  Use  the  SHOW  QUEUES  command  to   display   any   current
            MOUNT-REQUESTS  that  are  mounted, waiting to be mounted, or
            are being dismounted.

            OPR>SHOW QUEUES MOUNT-REQUESTS<RET>

            OPR>
            19:52:21                -- System Queues Listing --

            Mount Queue:
            Volume    Status   Type   Write   Req#  Job#          User
            -------  --------  ----  -------  ----  ----  ---------------
            GOO1     Waiting   Tape  Enabled    24    28  ENGEL [30,3456]
            GOO2     Waiting   Tape  Enabled    25    28  ENGEL [30,3456]
            DSKZ     Waiting   Disk             52    23  BROWN [27,5107]
            TEST     Waiting   Tape  Locked     76    12  JONES [10,1310]
            There are 4 Requests in the Queue

            OPR>





                                   2-140
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SHOW QUEUES


        3.  Use the SHOW  QUEUES  command  with  the  /SHORT  switch,  to
            display all jobs in the line-printer queue.

            OPR>SHOW QUEUES PRINTER /SHORT<RET>

            OPR>
            15:50:15                -- System Queues Listing --

            Printer Queue:
            * DBBIND    49    108  FRIES,A [10,2311]
            * TRY       60     27  NICHOLS [30,1201]
              TEST01    69     50  BROWN,E [27,5107]
              SCHEDU    79    100  OPERATOR [1,2]

            OPR>

        4.  Use the SHOW QUEUES command to display the items in the EVENT
            queue.

            OPR>SHOW QUEUES EVENTS<RET>

            11:51:58           -- System Queues Listing --

            Event Queue:

              Type     Req#       Expiration                 Description
            --------  ------  ------------------  ------------------------
              USGFIL      14   8-Oct-88 23:59:30  Usage file closure
              OPRFIL      18   9-Oct-88  0:00:00  ORION log file closure
              * KSYS      15  10-Oct-88  0:00:00  Debug new monitor
            There are 3 events in the queue (1 in progress)






















                                   2-141
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              SHOW ROUTE-TABLE


   2.55  SHOW ROUTE-TABLE




   Function

        The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command applies only  if  your  installation
        has  remote station communication software.  The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE
        command displays the routing tables of the nodes whose output has
        been  transferred  by  means  of  the  ROUTE  command.   See  the
        description of the ROUTE command in this chapter.

        The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command has no keywords and no switches.


   Format

        OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE<RET>


   Examples

        1.  Use the SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command to display the current nodes
            that have been routed within your network system.

            OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE<RET>

            15:04:17               -- System Device Routing Table --

                    Printer 0 [KL1026(26)] Routed to Printer 1 [CTCH22(22)]

                    All Printers [NOVA(31)] Routed to [KL1026(26)]


            OPR>

        2.  Use the SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command, when no  routing  has  been
            done.

            OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE<RET>

            OPR>
            16:30:23          -- No routing has been performed --

            OPR>







                                   2-142
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SHOW STATUS


   2.56  SHOW STATUS




   Function

        The  SHOW  STATUS  command  displays  the  current  status  of  a
        particular  device  or  range  of devices on the system.  You can
        display the status of batch or FAL streams,  input/output  units,
        tape-drives,  network  nodes, or all current devices known to the
        system.

        The SHOW STATUS command is useful  when  you  want  to  know  the
        current  status  of  the  system.   You can issue this command to
        check whether devices are active or idle.

        If you do not specify a keyword with the SHOW STATUS command, the
        command  defaults  to  batch  streams, printers, and readers.  In
        addition, if your  installation  has  a  card  punch,  paper-tape
        punch, or plotter, the SHOW STATUS command displays the status of
        these devices.


   Format

        OPR>SHOW STATUS keyword argument/switch<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM nn or n:m

                           displays the status of a batch input stream or
                           range of batch streams.

        CARD-PUNCH nn or n:m

                           displays the status of one or more  card-punch
                           devices.

        DISK-DRIVE structure-name:

                           displays the status of  all  the  disk  drives
                           currently  known  to  the  system.   With this
                           keyword, you can specify the /ALL,  /FREE,  or
                           /MOUNTED switch.  /ALL is the default.

        FAL-STREAM nn or n:m

                           displays the status of a FAL stream  or  range
                           of FAL streams.

                                   2-143
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SHOW STATUS


        NETWORK-NODE node-name

                           displays the on-line/off-line  status  of  all
                           nodes  currently  known  to  the system.  This
                           keyword takes a node name as  an  argument  to
                           show the status of a specific node.

        NQC-STREAM nn or n:m

                           displays the status of a NQC stream  or  range
                           of NQC streams.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn or n:m

                           displays   the   status   of   one   or   more
                           paper-tape-punch devices.

        PLOTTER nn or n:m

                           displays the status of  one  or  more  plotter
                           devices.

        PRINTER nn or n:m

                           displays   the   status   of   one   or   more
                           line-printer devices.

        READER nn or n:m

                           displays the status of one or more card reader
                           input devices.

        STRUCTURE structure-name

                           displays the status of a file structure  known
                           to  the  system.   If  you  do  not  specify a
                           structure, all  structures  are  shown.   With
                           this keyword, you can specify a structure name
                           and/or the /USERS switch.

        TAPE-DRIVE

                           displays the status of one  or  more  magnetic
                           tape-drive  units  known  to  the system.  You
                           must include the colon after  the  tape  drive
                           number.   With this keyword, you can specify a
                           tape-drive name (in the format of MTxn:),  the
                           /ALL switch, or the /FREE switch.





                                   2-144
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SHOW STATUS


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies a batch or FAL stream number,  or  a
                           device unit number.

        n:m                specifies a range of batch or FAL streams,  or
                           a range of unit numbers.

        MTxn:              specifies a tape drive name, where  x  is  the
                           tape controller number identification and n is
                           the tape drive number.  You must  include  the
                           colon after the tape drive name.

        structure-name:    specifies  the  logical  disk  file  structure
                           name.    The  name  can  consist  of  1  to  4
                           alphanumeric characters.  You must include the
                           colon after the structure name.


   Switches

        /NODE:identifier   displays the status of the  given  device  for
                           the node you specify.  To specify a node name,
                           for example KL1026, use /NODE:KL1026.  If  you
                           do  not  specify  a  node identifier, your own
                           node is the default.

        /SHORT             displays  only  the  stream/unit  number,  the
                           current  status,  the job name, the request-id
                           number, and the user name with column headers.
                           If  you  do  not  specify  the  /SHORT switch,
                           additional information, such as the job number
                           and  the  run time, appears in the display for
                           each job request.  This switch  is  not  valid
                           with the DISK-DRIVE, FAL-STREAM, STRUCTURE, or
                           TAPE-DRIVE keywords.


   DISK-DRIVE Switches

        /ALL               displays the status of both free  disk  drives
                           and  mounted  disk  drives.   This  switch  is
                           assumed if you do not specify a switch.

        /FREE              displays  only  those  disk  drives  that  are
                           available for structure mounts.

        /MOUNTED           displays  only  those  disk  drives  that  are
                           currently mounted and being accessed.




                                   2-145
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SHOW STATUS


   STRUCTURE Switch

        /USERS             displays  all  the  usernames  of  all   users
                           currently  logged  in  and using the specified
                           structure.   If   you   do   not   specify   a
                           structure-name,  the  /USERS  switch lists all
                           users for all structures known to the system.


   TAPE-DRIVE Switches

        /ALL               displays all tape drives known to the  system.
                           The  status  display  also provides additional
                           information, such as the AVR status, the label
                           type,  and  the  density (BPI).  If you do not
                           specify  the  /ALL  switch,   the   additional
                           information  does  not  appear  in  the status
                           display.

        /FREE              displays all tape drives  that  are  currently
                           unloaded   and  available  for  mounting  tape
                           volumes.  The /FREE switch also displays those
                           tape drives that are loaded, but are not being
                           accessed by any user.


   Examples

   1.   Use the SHOW STATUS command to display the current status of  the
        line printers.

   OPR>SHOW STATUS PRINTER<RET>

   OPR>
   16:33:42               -- System Device Status --

   Printer Status:
    Unit     Node         Status    Jobname  Req#            User
    ----  ----------  -----------   -------  ----  ---------------------
       0  KL1042(42)  Active        R4PPR2   106    MEIDELL [10,5411]
          Started at 13:44:40, printed 142 of 1012 pages
       1  Idle

   OPR>









                                   2-146
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SHOW STATUS


   2.   Use the SHOW STATUS command to display the current status of  all
        the tape drives on the system.

   OPR>SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE /ALL<RET>

   OPR>
   10:12:00         --Tape Drive Status--
   Drive Trk Status AVR  Density    Write   Volume  Req#       User
   ----- --- ------ ---  --------   -----   ------  ---- ----------------
   MTA0   9  Free   Yes  800/1600
   MTA1   9  Online Yes  1600       Locked  100200  64   PURRETTA [10,54]
   MTA2   9  Online Yes  1600       Enabled TEST    58   OPERATOR [1,2]
   MTA5   7  Free   Yes  200/556/800








































                                   2-147
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SHOW SYSTEM


   2.57  SHOW SYSTEM




   Function

        The SHOW SYSTEM command displays  system  lists  and  the  system
        parameters set with the SET SYSTEM command.

        The SHOW SYSTEM command does not display the parameters set  with
        the  SET  SYSTEM DATE or SET SYSTEM DAYTIME commands.  To display
        the current DATE  and  DAYTIME  parameters,  use  the  SHOW  TIME
        command.

        See the  MODIFY  command  in  this  chapter  for  information  on
        altering  the  system  lists.   See the SETSRC description in the
        TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual for  information  on  changing  the
        system search list.


   Format

        OPR>SHOW SYSTEM keyword <RET>


   Keywords

        LISTS              displays the following system lists:

                            o  Active Swapping List

                            o  Crash Dump List

                            o  System Search List

                           The   active-swapping   list   displays    the
                           disk-unit  names  for page swapping of memory.
                           The crash-dump  list  displays  the  structure
                           names  that  the  system  uses  to dump memory
                           during a system crash.  The system-search list
                           displays  the  structure names that the system
                           uses to search for file  structures  and  file
                           names.

                           LISTS is  the  default  for  the  SHOW  SYSTEM
                           command.






                                   2-148
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                SHOW SYSTEM


        PARAMETERS         displays the following parameters set with the
                           SET SYSTEM command:

                            o  BATMAX

                            o  BATMIN

                            o  CORMAX

                            o  CORMIN

                            o  LOGMAX

                            o  LOGMIN

                            o  SCHEDULE


   Examples

        1.  Use the SHOW SYSTEM LISTS  command  to  display  the  current
            system lists.

            OPR>SHOW SYSTEM LISTS<RET>

            OPR>
            09:30:21       -- System lists --
                          Crash Dump List:        DSKC:, DSKB:, BLKX:, BLKY:
                          Active Swapping List:   RPD4:, RPB2:, RPD0:
                          System Search List:     DSKC:, DSKB:

            OPR>

        2.  Use the SHOW SYSTEM PARAMETERS command to display the current
            system parameters.

            OPR>SHOW SYSTEM PARAMETERS<RET>

            OPR>
            15:57:24        -- System Parameters --
            CPU0 is running and scheduling jobs
            CPU1 is running and scheduling jobs

            LOGMAX: 100 jobs out of 100

            SCHEDULE: 000000
               No restrictions

            BATMAX: 13 jobs              CORMAX: 1024 pages
            BATMIN:  0 jobs              CORMIN:  100 pages
            Disk cache size: 400 blocks  Configured size: 400 blocks
            OPR>

                                   2-149
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 SHOW TIME


   2.58  SHOW TIME




   Function

        The SHOW TIME command displays the current system date and time.

        The date is shown in the format of dd-mmm-yy (dd=day,  mmm=month,
        yy=year).   The time is shown in the format of hh:mm:ss (hh=hour,
        mm=minutes, ss=seconds).


   Format

        OPR>SHOW TIME<RET>


   Example

        Use the SHOW TIME command to display the current date and time.

        OPR>SHOW TIME<RET>
        25-Dec-88 11:55:34

        OPR>


























                                   2-150
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SHUTDOWN


   2.59  SHUTDOWN




   Function

        The SHUTDOWN command terminates scheduling  for  the  devices  or
        streams  you  specify.   To  restart  a device or stream, use the
        START command.  The SHUTDOWN command allows the  current  job  to
        complete  processing, then terminates the stream or device and no
        further jobs are processed.


   Format

        OPR>SHUTDOWN keyword argument /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM nn or n:m

                           shuts down a batch stream or a range of  batch
                           streams.

        CARD-PUNCH nn or n:m

                           shuts  down  a  card-punch  or  a   range   of
                           card-punches.

        FAL-STREAM nn or n:m

                           shuts down  a  FAL  stream  or  range  of  FAL
                           streams.

        NODE identifier    specifies a remote node for which the  command
                           will   be   effective.    For   example,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026 to specify the node named KL1026.
                           If  you do not specify a node identifier, your
                           own node is the default.

        NQC-STREAM nn or n:m

                           shuts down  a  NQC  stream  or  range  of  NQC
                           streams.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn or n:m

                           shuts down a paper-tape-punch or  a  range  of
                           paper-tape-punches.


                                   2-151
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SHUTDOWN


        PLOTTER nn or n:m

                           shuts down a plotter or a range of plotters.

        PRINTER            shuts down a line printer or a range  of  such
                           devices.

        READER nn or n:m

                           shuts down a card reader (input) or a range of
                           card readers.


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies the stream number or unit number  to
                           be  shut  down.   You must specify a stream or
                           unit number.

        n:m                specifies a range of stream/unit numbers.  You
                           can  specify  this  range  instead of a single
                           stream/unit number.  The colon  must  separate
                           the   two   numbers.   The  n  represents  the
                           low-order number, and  the  m  represents  the
                           high-order number.

   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies a remote node for which the  command
                           will   be   effective.    For   example,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026 to specify the node named KL1026.
                           If  you do not specify a node identifier, your
                           own node is the default.

   Examples

     1.  Use the SHUTDOWN command to terminate the card punch on the host
         system.  site.

         OPR>SHUTDOWN CARD-PUNCH 0<RET>

         OPR>
         13:23:33      Card-punch   0  -- Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled --

         OPR>








                                   2-152
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SHUTDOWN


     2.  Use the SHUTDOWN command to terminate all batch streams.

         OPR>SHUTDOWN BATCH-STREAM 0:2<RET>

         OPR>
         12:30:15       Batch-stream 0  -- Shutdown --

         OPR>
         12:30:16       Batch-stream 1  -- Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled --

         OPR>
         12:30:17       Batch-stream 2  -- Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled --

         OPR>

     3.  Use the SHUTDOWN command to terminate the line printers at  your
         site.

         OPR>SHUTDOWN PRINTER 0:1<RET>

         OPR>
         16:23:45      Printer 0  -- Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled --

         OPR>
         16:23:46      Printer 1  -- Shutdown --

         OPR>


























                                   2-153
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   START


   2.60  START




   Function

        The  START  command  starts  the  scheduling  for  the  specified
        devices.   Use  the  START  command  to  restart devices that you
        stopped with the SHUTDOWN command.


   Format

        OPR>START keyword argument/switch<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM nn or n:m

                           starts a batch stream  or  a  range  of  batch
                           streams.

        CARD-PUNCH nn or n:m

                           starts   a   card-punch   or   a   range    of
                           card-punches.

        FAL-STREAM nn or n:m

                           starts a FAL stream or range of FAL streams.

        NODE node-name

                           starts an IBM Communications node.

        NQC-STREAM nn or n:m

                           starts a NQC stream or range of NQC streams.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn or n:m

                           starts  a  paper-tape-punch  or  a  range   of
                           paper-tape-punches.

        PLOTTER nn or n:m

                           starts a plotter or a range of plotters.




                                   2-154
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   START


        PRINTER nn or n:m

                           starts a line  printer  or  a  range  of  such
                           devices.

        READER nn or n:m

                           starts a  card  reader  or  a  range  of  card
                           readers.


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies the stream number or unit number  to
                           be started.  You must specify a stream or unit
                           number.

        n:m                specifies a range of stream/unit numbers.  You
                           can  specify  this  range  instead of a single
                           stream/unit number.  The colon  must  separate
                           the   two   numbers.   The  n  represents  the
                           low-order number, and  the  m  represents  the
                           high-order number.


   Switches

        /NODE:identifier   specifies a remote node for which the  command
                           will   be   effective.    For   example,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026 to specify the node named KL1026.
                           If  you do not specify a node identifier, your
                           own node is the default.

        /DEVICE:dev:       specifies that printer output be written to  a
                           named  device.  This switch is useful when you
                           must transfer printer output from one site  to
                           another,  or  when  you  have printer hardware
                           problems.  Before you use  the  START  PRINTER
                           command  with the /DEVICE switch, you must set
                           the device as unavailable for  user  requests.
                           (For  additional  information, see the TOPS-10
                           Operator's Guide.)











                                   2-155
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   START


   Examples

        1.  Use the START command to start the line printer on  the  host
            system.

            OPR>START PRINTER 0<RET>

            OPR>
            20:31:09        Printer 0  -- Startup Scheduled --

            OPR>

        2.  Use the START command to start all batch streams.

            OPR>START BATCH-STREAM 0:3<RET>

            OPR>
            12:15:32        Batch-stream 0  -- Startup Scheduled --

            OPR>
            12:15:38        Batch-stream 1  -- Startup Scheduled --

            OPR>
            12:15:44        Batch-stream 2  -- Startup Scheduled --

            OPR>
            12:15:50        Batch-stream 3  -- Startup Scheduled --

            OPR>

        3.  Use the START command to start the card-punch devices at your
            site.

            OPR>START CARD-PUNCH 0:1<RET>

            OPR>
            13:17:23        Card-punch 0  -- Startup Scheduled --

            OPR>
            13:17:30        Card-punch 1  -- Startup Scheduled --

            OPR>











                                   2-156
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    STOP


   2.61  STOP




   Function

        The STOP command temporarily  stops  the  following  devices  and
        streams:

         o  Batch streams

         o  Card punches

         o  FAL streams

         o  NQC streams

         o  Paper-tape punches

         o  Plotters

         o  Printers

         o  Card readers

   You can use the STOP command to halt a device when a hardware  problem
   occurs.

   When you use the STOP command, the device  remains  active,  and  jobs
   requesting  that  device  can  still  be scheduled.  However, when you
   specify the argument, AFTER EVERY-REQUEST, the device stops  after  it
   completes each job request.

   Use the CONTINUE command to reactivate a device or stream after a STOP
   command has been issued.


   Format

        OPR>STOP keyword arguments /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM nn or n:m

                           stops a batch input stream or a range of batch
                           input streams.




                                   2-157
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    STOP


        CARD-PUNCH nn or n:m

                           stops a card punch or a range of such devices.

        FAL-STREAM nn or n:m

                           stops a FAL stream or range of FAL streams.

        NQC-STREAM nn or n:m

                           stops a NQC stream or range of NQC streams.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn or n:m

                           stops a paper-tape punch or a  range  of  such
                           devices.

        PLOTTER nn or n:m

                           stops a plotter or a range of such devices.

        PRINTER nn or n:m

                           stops a  line  printer  or  a  range  of  such
                           devices.

        READER nn or n:m

                           stops a card reader (input) or a range of such
                           devices.


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies the stream number or unit number  to
                           be stopped.

        n:m                specifies a range of stream or  unit  numbers.
                           You can specify this range instead of a single
                           stream  or  unit  number.   The   colon   must
                           separate  the  two  numbers.  The n represents
                           the low-order number, and the m represents the
                           high-order number.

        AFTER CURRENT-REQUEST

                           stops the specified device after  the  current
                           job  request has completed.  All other devices
                           of the same type will continue to process  job
                           requests.   Use  CONTINUE  to start processing
                           other jobs in the queue.


                                   2-158
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    STOP


        AFTER EVERY-REQUEST

                           stops the  specified  device  after  each  job
                           request  has  completed.  To start another job
                           on the device, use the CONTINUE command.   You
                           can  clear  this argument from the device only
                           by  shutting  down   the   device   and   then
                           restarting  it  (see  the  SHUTDOWN  and START
                           commands).

        IMMEDIATELY        stops the specified device immediately.  If  a
                           job  is  being  processed on the device, it is
                           stopped.  This argument is the default of  the
                           STOP command.

   Switch

        /NODE:identifier   specifies a remote node for which the  command
                           will   be   effective.    For   example,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026 to specify the node named KL1026.
                           If  you do not specify a node identifier, your
                           own node is the default.


   Examples

        1.  Use the STOP command to stop the card reader  temporarily  to
            prevent a card-reader jam.

            OPR>STOP READER 0<RET>

            OPR>
             9:20:10        Reader 0  -- Stopped --

            OPR>

        2.  Use the  STOP  command  to  stop  a  batch  stream  after  it
            completes processing the current batch job.

            OPR>STOP BATCH-STREAM 2 AFTER CURRENT-REQUEST<RET>

            OPR>
            18:23:55         Batch-stream 2  -- STOP command queued --

            OPR>








                                   2-159
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    STOP


        3.  Use the  STOP  command  to  stop  a  line  printer  that  was
            processing a request.

            OPR>STOP PRINTER 1 IMMEDIATELY<RET>

            OPR>
            11:37:02        Printer 1  -- Stopped --

            OPR>












































                                   2-160
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SUPPRESS


   2.62  SUPPRESS




   Function

        The SUPPRESS command allows you  to  convert  all  vertical  form
        motion characters to single-space characters.  All form feeds and
        multiple line feeds are converted to a single line  feed.   Thus,
        the  paging motion in a printer-job request is ignored.  However,
        this command does not cause printing to occur  across  the  forms
        page burst (perforation).

        The SUPPRESS command is useful when you want  to  stop  a  user's
        program  that  caused  a  print  loop,  for example when bad code
        causes too many form feeds.  When this happens, you can stop  the
        printer,  issue  the  SUPPRESS  command,  and  then  continue the
        printer, thus saving paper.  To continue printing  normally,  use
        this command with /STOP (SUPPRESS PRINTER n/STOP).

        You must specify the PRINTER keyword and unit number.


   Format

        OPR>SUPPRESS keyword nn /switch<RET>


   Keyword

        PRINTER nn         suppresses vertical motion  on  the  specified
                           line-printer.    You  must  include  the  unit
                           number.  (for example, 0 for LPT0, 1 for LPT1,
                           and so forth).


   Switches

        /NODE:identifier   specifies the name of a node in  the  network.
                           It  identifies  a  remote  node  for which the
                           command should be effective.  For example,  to
                           specify    the    node   named   KL1026,   use
                           /NODE:KL1026.  If you do not  specify  a  node
                           identifier, your own node is the default.

        /FILE              specifies the file  currently  being  printed.
                           (Refer   to  the  BACKSPACE  and  FORWARDSPACE
                           commands.)




                                   2-161
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  SUPPRESS


        /JOB               specifies the  job  currently  being  printed.
                           With  the  /JOB  switch,  the  entire  job  is
                           suppressed, regardless of how  many  files  or
                           switches  were  specified  when  the  job  was
                           originally queued to print.  The  /JOB  switch
                           is the default of the SUPPRESS command.

        /STOP              specifies that normal printing is  to  resume,
                           and  that  the  carriage  control  on the line
                           printer is no longer to be  suppressed.   When
                           you  specify  this  switch,  the  job  that is
                           currently printing reverts to  the  print  job
                           format that was being used before the SUPPRESS
                           command was issued.


   Examples

        1.  Use the SUPPRESS command to suppress paging  motion  on  line
            printer  0.  The SUPPRESS command affects the entire job that
            is currently being printed.

            OPR>SUPPRESS PRINTER 0<RET>

            OPR>
            06:37:41        Printer 0  -- Carriage control suppressed --
                            Job DUMP01 Req #23 for OPERATOR [1,2]

            OPR>

        2.  Use the SUPPRESS command to  stop  the  suppression  of  form
            feeds  and carriage returns on line printer 0 after a runaway
            job has completed printing.  The line printer is now free  to
            print the next job in the queue.

            OPR>SUPPRESS PRINTER 0 /STOP<RET>

            OPR>
            07:32:12         Printer 0  -- Carriage control activated --
                             Job DUMP01 Req #23 for OPERATOR [1,2]

            OPR>











                                   2-162
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    TAKE


   2.63  TAKE




   Function

        The TAKE command automatically executes the commands in a command
        file.   A  typical  command file contains commands that perform a
        series of  related  tasks.   For  example,  the  SYSTEM.CMD  file
        contains  OPR  commands  that  set  and start devices and streams
        automatically.


   Format

        OPR>TAKE keyword argument /switch<RET>


   Keyword

        filespec           specifies  the  input  file  name   and   file
                           extension   of  the  file  that  contains  the
                           executable OPR commands.  The  file  name  can
                           consist   of   no  more  than  6  alphanumeric
                           characters.  The file extension can consist of
                           no  more  than 3 alphanumeric characters.  The
                           standard extension for command files  is  CMD,
                           but   any   specified  extension  works.   The
                           filespec can  be  a  full  file  specification
                           consisting of:

                           str:filnam.ext[PPN]

                           where str:  is the file structure,  filnam  is
                           the file name, .ext is the file extension, and
                           [PPN] is the  project-programmer  number.   If
                           you  do  not specify the str:, OPR defaults to
                           the current job's search list.  If you do  not
                           specify  the  [PPN], OPR defaults to your disk
                           area.












                                   2-163
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    TAKE


   Arguments

        NOW                specifies that OPR executes  the  commands  in
                           the command file immediately.

        +hh:mm:ss          specifies the number of  hours,  minutes,  and
                           seconds  from  the  current time that OPR will
                           execute the commands in the command file.

                           This time must be at least five  minutes  from
                           the current time.

        hh:mm:ss           specifies the  time  in  hours,  minutes,  and
                           seconds  when OPR will execute the commands in
                           the command file.

        dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss

                           specifies the day, month, and year, as well as
                           the time when OPR will execute the commands in
                           the command file.

        DAILY hh:mm:ss     specifies that OPR executes  the  contents  of
                           the file every day at the given time.

        EVERY "DAY" hh:mm:ss

                           specifies that OPR will execute  the  contents
                           of  the  command file at the given time on the
                           day you specify.  "DAY" can be any day of  the
                           week.


   Switches

        /DISPLAY           displays all messages from the  command  file,
                           any  error  messages  that  occur, and the OPR
                           commands after they have been executed.

        /NODISPLAY         does not display the OPR commands  that  exist
                           in  the  command  file  after their execution.
                           All other messages appear with the  /NODISPLAY
                           switch  specified.  This switch is the default
                           of the TAKE command.

        /REASON:comment    allows you to specify why a particular command
                           file is to be executed






                                   2-164
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    TAKE


   Examples

        1.  Use the TAKE command to execute a series of OPR commands that
            are in OPR001.CMD, which resides in your [PPN].

            OPR>TAKE OPR001.CMD/DISPLAY<RET>
            OPR>START BATCH-STREAM 0:2

            14:54:10        Batch-stream 0  -- Startup Scheduled --

            14:54:12        Batch-stream 1  -- Startup Scheduled --

            14:54:15        Batch-stream 2  -- Startup Scheduled --

            OPR>START PRINTER 0:1

            14:54:18        Printer 0  -- Startup Scheduled --

            14:54:21        Printer 1  -- Startup Scheduled --

            OPR>

        2.  Use the TAKE command to execute a series of OPR commands from
            DSKZ:OPR.CMD[10,10].

            OPR>TAKE DSKZ:OPR.CMD[10,10] /NODISPLAY<RET>
            OPR>
            16:43:07        Card-punch 0  -- Shutdown Scheduled --

            16:43:11        Plotter 0  -- Shutdown Scheduled --

            16:43:15        Reader 0  -- Shutdown Scheduled --

            16:43:18        Paper-tape-punch 0 -- Shutdown Scheduled --

            OPR>

















                                   2-165
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    TAKE


        3.  Specify a time for the TEST.CMD file to be executed.

            OPR>TAKE DSK:TEST.CMD 20-NOV-88:12:00:00<RET>
            OPR>
            16:40:56         -- Event job TAKFIL queued, request  162 --

            OPR>

            Display the event queue to check that the  TAKE  command  was
            properly queued.

            OPR>SHOW QUEUES EVENTS<RET>
            OPR>
            16:41:08        -- System Queues Listing --

            Event Queue:

             Type   Req#      Expiration           Description           
             ------ ---  ------------------  ------------------------
             BILCLS  24  19-Nov-88 16:59:59  Prime time rates end
             USGFIL  44  19-Nov-88 23:59:30  Usage file closure
             OPRFIL  38  20-Nov-88  0:00:00  ORION log file closure
             BILCLS  15  20-Nov-88  7:59:59  Discount rates end
             TAKFIL 162  20-Nov-88 12:00:00  Time-of-day OPR command file
             * KSYS 103  21-Nov-88  0:00:00  Timesharing will end  

            There are 6 events in the queue (1 in progress)

            OPR>
























                                   2-166
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   UNLOCK


   2.64  UNLOCK




   Function

        The UNLOCK command allows you to  permit  timesharing  users  and
        batch jobs to access a particular structure currently LOCKed from
        system allocation.  The UNLOCK command reverses the effect of the
        LOCK command.


   Format

        OPR>UNLOCK structure-name:  date-and-time<RET>


   Arguments

        structure-name:    specifies a 1- to 4-character  structure  name
                           that   is   currently   LOCKed   from   system
                           allocation.  The structure must be mounted and
                           on-line.  The name must end with a colon (:).

        date-and-time      specifies an optional date and time  when  the
                           structure  will  be UNLOCKed so that users can
                           access it.  The  date  is  in  the  format  of
                           "mm-dd-yy,"  where  mm is the month, dd is the
                           day, and yy is the year, separated by hyphens.
                           The time is in the format of "hh:mm," where hh
                           is the hour and mm is the  minutes,  separated
                           by  a  colon.   The  time applies to a 24-hour
                           clock.


   Restrictions

        If you specify a structure name not known to the system, you  get
        the following error message:

             ? No such device

        If you specify a structure name that is currently  UNLOCKed,  you
        get the following message:

             hh:mm:ss         -- Structure name already UNLOCKed --

        If you specify an optional date without a time, the time defaults
        to 00:00:00 (or the start of that date).



                                   2-167
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   UNLOCK


        If you specify an optional time without a date, the date defaults
        to  the  current  date.  If the time has already occurred for the
        current date, the time applies to the next day.


   Example

        Use the UNLOCK command to unlock structure DSKZ:.

        OPR>UNLOCK DSKZ: 3-7-88 17:00<RET>
        OPR>
        13:03:13          -- Structure DSKZ unlocked --

        OPR>







































                                   2-168
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 UNRESTRICT


   2.65  UNRESTRICT




   Function

        The UNRESTRICT command returns a  restricted  device  to  general
        use.  See the RESTRICT command for information about limiting the
        use of a device.


   Format

        OPR>UNRESTRICT dev:<RET>


   Argument

        dev:               specifies  the  name  of  the  device  to   be
                           returned to general use.


   Example

        Use the UNRESTRICT command to remove the restrictions on MTA3.

        OPR>UNRESTRICT MTA3:<RET>
        OPR>
        16:29:24           -- Device MTA3: unrestricted --

        OPR>





















                                   2-169
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    WAIT


   2.66  WAIT




   Function

        The WAIT command is used with batch control files to prevent  OPR
        from  accepting  a  command before a previously issued command is
        finished being processed.

        The OPR program  is  designed  to  accept  and  process  commands
        immediately,  and the batch system (BATCON) will send commands to
        OPR as soon as the previous command is accepted.

        Most OPR commands require processing  by  other  modules  of  the
        operating  system.   OPR can accept a command, dispatch it to the
        appropriate module, and accept another  command  from  the  batch
        file  before  the  output  from the first command returns to OPR.
        For example, it is possible for an EXIT command in the batch file
        to  be  processed  before  the  response to the previously issued
        command is displayed.  The WAIT command should be entered between
        the  previous  command  and  the EXIT command, to allow the first
        command to finish processing before the EXIT command is  sent  to
        OPR.

   Format

        OPR>WAIT n

        where n is the number of seconds  that  OPR  should  wait  before
        accepting  the  next  command  in the batch file.  The value of n
        must be between 1 and 60.

   Warning

        Using the WAIT command does NOT guarantee that  the  output  from
        the  first command will be successfully displayed before the EXIT
        command is accepted and processed by  OPR.   OPR  will,  however,
        WAIT  the  specified  number  of seconds, and the output from the
        first command will  be  displayed  if  it  is  ready  before  the
        specified number of seconds is up.

   Example

        The following batch file may be submitted to the batch system:

        @ENABLE
        $OPR
        *SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE
        *EXIT


                                   2-170
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                    WAIT


        When this job is processed, the SHOW STATUS command is issued and
        accepted  by  OPR,  passed  to ORION for processing, and then the
        output is passed back through OPR  to  BATCON.   However,  BATCON
        will  send  the EXIT command immediately after OPR dispatches the
        SHOW STATUS command.  When OPR  receives  the  EXIT  command,  it
        causes  the  batch  job  to exit from OPR immediately, before the
        output from SHOW STATUS is received by OPR.

        The following batch file uses the WAIT command to  cause  OPR  to
        WAIT  for  the  specified  number of seconds before accepting the
        EXIT command:

        @ENABLE
        $OPR
        *SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE
        *WAIT 10
        *EXIT




































                                   2-171
























































                                    3-1











                                 CHAPTER 3

                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS



   This chapter describes the following OPR command subsets:

         o  CATALOG

         o  CONFIG

         o  LCP

         o  NCP

         o  QUOTA



   3.1  ENTERING AND EXITING OPR COMMAND SUBSETS

   To enter an OPR command subset, use the OPR command, ENTER,  as  shown
   below.

        OPR>ENTER CATALOG<RET>

        CATALOG>

   To exit an OPR command subset and return to OPR command level, use the
   RETURN command as shown below:

        CATALOG>RETURN<RET>

        OPR>

   To exit an OPR command subset and return to monitor command level, use
   the EXIT command as shown below:

        CATALOG>EXIT<RET>

        .



                                    3-1
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                             TOP-LEVEL COMMANDS


   3.2  TOP-LEVEL COMMANDS

   After you enter a command subset, there are  two  levels  of  commands
   available  to  you:   a limited number of OPR commands, and the subset
   commands themselves.  All of the subsets  include  the  following  OPR
   commands as top-level (OPR) commands:

         o  ENTER

         o  EXIT

         o  PUSH

         o  TAKE

         o  WAIT

   These commands function at the subset level exactly as they do at  OPR
   command  level.   See  Chapter  2  for  more  information  about these
   commands.

































                                    3-2
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


   3.3  CATALOG COMMANDS

   The CATALOG  program  maintains  the  system  catalog  files  and  the
   information about the volume-sets stored in those files.  The operator
   interface to the CATALOG program is the CATALOG  application  in  OPR.
   System Administrator privileges are required.

   This section describes the CATALOG commands listed below:

         o  DELETE

         o  DISABLE

         o  ENABLE

         o  HELP

         o  INSERT

         o  LIST

         o  MODIFY

         o  SHOW





























                                    3-3
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


                                   DELETE



   Function

        The DELETE command removes the entry for a  specified  volume-set
        from the system catalog.


   Format

        CATALOG>DELETE keyword argument<RET>


   Keywords

        DECTAPE            deletes the specified DECtape volume-set  from
                           the catalog.

        MAGTAPE            deletes the specified magtape volume-set  from
                           the catalog.

        STRUCTURE          deletes  the  specified  structure  volume-set
                           from the catalog.


   Argument

        volume-set name    specifies  the  name  of  the  volume-set  for
                           magtape  or DECtape or structure-name for disk
                           to be deleted.


   Restriction

        Due to the destructive nature of the  DELETE  command,  you  must
        specify  the  entire volume-set or structure-name.  Abbreviations
        are not allowed.


   Example

        Delete the DSKD entry from the system catalog.

        CATALOG>DELETE STRUCTURE DSKD<RET>
        CATALOG>
         9:24:27           -- Structure DSKD deleted --

        CATALOG>



                                    3-4
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


                                  DISABLE



   Function

        The DISABLE command turns off  the  automatic  updating  feature.
        The  DISABLE  command prevents QUASAR from automatically updating
        the catalog to correct discrepancies between  mounted  media  and
        cataloged information.


   Format

        CATALOG>DISABLE keyword<RET>


   Keywords

        DECTAPE            disables catalog updates for DECtapes.

        MAGTAPE            disables catalog updates for magtapes.

        STRUCTURE          disables catalog updates for structures.


   Example

        Disable the catalog updating function for structures.

        CATALOG>DISABLE STRUCTURE<RET>
        CATALOG>
         9:24:27         -- Structure catalog updates disabled --

        CATALOG>


















                                    3-5
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


                                   ENABLE



   Function

        The ENABLE command turns on the automatic catalog update feature.
        When  this  feature  is enabled, QUASAR automatically updates the
        catalog  to  correct  discrepancies  between  mounted  media  and
        cataloged information.


   Format

        CATALOG>ENABLE keyword<RET>


   Keywords

        DECTAPE            enables   automatic   catalog   updates    for
                           DECtapes.

        MAGTAPE            enables   automatic   catalog   updates    for
                           magtapes.

        STRUCTURE          enables   automatic   catalog   updates    for
                           structures.


   Example

        Enable the automatic catalog updating feature for structures.

        CATALOG>ENABLE STRUCTURE<RET>
        CATALOG>
         9:24:27         -- Structure catalog updates enabled --

        CATALOG>















                                    3-6
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


                                    HELP



   Function

        The HELP command displays  information  about  CATALOG  commands,
        including command descriptions, command syntax, and examples.


   Format

        CATALOG>HELP keyword <RET>

        where "keyword" is any CATALOG command.


   Examples

        1.  Type HELP to display general information  about  the  CATALOG
            command, HELP.

            CATALOG>HELP<RET>
            The HELP command will display the  description,  syntax,  and
            one  or  more  examples  of  any command available for use in
            managing the catalog files.

            Command syntax:
                 HELP command-name
            Example:
                 CATALOG>HELP (with) SHOW
                 The SHOW command causes information about ...

        2.  Type HELP SHOW to find out more about the SHOW command.

                 CATALOG>HELP SHOW<RET>

            The  SHOW  command  causes  information  about   a   specific
            volume-set   to   be   displayed  on  the  terminal.   Unique
            abbreviations  for  a  volume-set  name  are  allowed.   This
            command takes no options.  Its only arguments are the catalog
            type (DECtape, magtape, or structure) and the volume-set name
            to be displayed on the terminal.

            Command syntax:

                           -- DECTAPE --
                          /             \
                    SHOW ---- MAGTAPE ---- volume-set
                          \             /
                           - STRUCTURE -


                                    3-7
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


            Example:

                    CATALOG>SHOW STRUCTURE DSKD<RET>
                    CATALOG>
                     9:24:27          -- Structure catalog --

                            Structure DSKD
                            Owned by [10,56]  DPM
                            Location: DPM's office
                             Unit    Type   Class
                            -----  ------  ------
                            DSKD0   RP06      1
                            DSKD1   RP04      1
                            DSKD2   RP06      1
                    CATALOG>






































                                    3-8
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


                                   INSERT



   Function

        The INSERT command creates entries for volume-sets in the  system
        catalog.   The  INSERT  command  allows  you to include owner and
        media storage location data, as well as volume-specific data,  if
        applicable.

        The INSERT command has optional subcommands as well  as  keywords
        and  switches.   Two  right  angle  brackets  following  the word
        CATALOG indicate INSERT subcommand level.  For example:

             CATALOG>>


   Format

        CATALOG>INSERT keyword argument/switches<RET>

        CATALOG>>subcommand


   Keywords

        DECTAPE            creates an entry for a DECtape volume-set.

        MAGTAPE            creates an entry for a magtape volume-set.

        STRUCTURE          creates an entry for a structure volume set.


   Argument

        volume-set name    creates a new volume-set entry with  the  name
                           you  specify.   Note  that  the new volume-set
                           name must not already exist in  the  specified
                           catalog.   Attempting  to  insert  an existing
                           volume-set causes an error.

                           Use the  following  format  to  create  a  new
                           volume-set  with the same parameters as an old
                           volume-set:

                                new-volume-set = old-volume-set






                                    3-9
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


   Switches

        /DENSITY:argument  sets the magtape density  to  200,  556,  800,
                           1600, or 6250.  You must specify /DENSITY when
                           creating magtape volume-sets.  (MAGTAPE only)

        /EXPIRATION:date   sets the expiration date.  (MAGTAPE,  DECTAPE,
                           and STRUCTURE)

        /LABEL-TYPE:type   specifies the  type  of  label  on  the  tape.
                           Options  include  ANSI,  BYPASS, DEFAULT, IBM,
                           NOLABELS, USER-EOT.  (MAGTAPE only)

        /LOCATION:text     specifies  the  volume-set  storage  location.
                           The  text  string  can  be 19 characters long.
                           Use  quotes  around  any  text   string   that
                           contains  characters other than A-Z, a-z, or -
                           (hyphen).  (MAGTAPE, DECTAPE, and STRUCTURE)

        /NAME:user name    specifies the user name  associated  with  the
                           owner  of  the volume-set.  The name can be 39
                           characters long.  The name  need  not  be  the
                           same  as  the  name associated with the PPN in
                           ACTDAE.SYS, the system accounting  file.   You
                           must  use  quotes  around any text string that
                           contains characters other than A-Z, a-z, or  -
                           (hyphen).  (MAGTAPE, DECTAPE,and STRUCTURE)

        /REELID:id         specifies the reel  identification.   (DECTAPE
                           only)

        /TRACKS:argument   sets the number of tracks.  Arguments are 7 or
                           9.  If the tape density you specify is 1600 or
                           6250 BPI, then 9  is  the  default  number  of
                           tracks.   The  /TRACKS  switch applies only to
                           magtape volume-sets.   You  must  specify  the
                           number of tracks when you specify any of these
                           tape  densities:   200,  556,  or   800   BPI.
                           (MAGTAPE only)

        /USER:[PPN]        sets the owner PPN of the volume-set.  You can
                           specify  a  wildcard  for  the  PPN.   You can
                           specify a wildcard for the project number, the
                           programmer  number,  or  both.   For  example:
                           [10,*], [*,56] and [*,*].  (MAGTAPE,  DECTAPE,
                           and STRUCTURE)







                                    3-10
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


   Subcommands

        ADD                appends volumes to a volume set entry.

                           Magtape format:
                           CATALOG>>ADD reel-id

                           Structure format:
                           CATALOG>>ADD unit-id drive-type class

        DONE               completes an INSERT session.

        QUIT               cancels the current INSERT command.

        REMOVE             deletes  a  volume-set  entry  you  have  just
                           entered  with  the  ADD  command.   The REMOVE
                           command only deletes  volume-set  entries  you
                           have   entered   during   the  current  INSERT
                           session.  You must use the DELETE  command  to
                           delete previously existing volume-set entries.


   Examples

   1.   The following example uses the INSERT command to create a DECtape
        entry.

   CATALOG>INSERT DECTAPE TEST/NAME:DPM/USER:[10,56]<RET>
   CATALOG>
    9:24:27    -- DECtape TEST inserted --

   CATALOG>

   2.   The following example uses the INSERT command to create a magtape
        entry.

   CATALOG>INSERT MAGTAPE TEST/DENSITY:1600/TRACKS:9<RET>
   CATALOG>>ADD (reel) TEST0
   CATALOG>>ADD (reel) TEST1
   CATALOG>>DONE
   CATALOG>
    9:24:27    -- Magtape TEST inserted --

   CATALOG>      









                                    3-11
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


   3.   The following  example  uses  the  INSERT  command  to  create  a
        structure entry.

   CATALOG>INSERT STRUCTURE DSKD/LOCATION:1026/NAME:DPM/USER:[10,56]<RET>
   CATALOG>>ADD (unit) DSKD0 (type) RP06 (class) 1
   CATALOG>>ADD (unit) DSKD1 (type) RP06 (class) 1
   CATALOG>>DONE
   CATALOG>
    9:24:27    -- Structure DSKD inserted --

   CATALOG>










































                                    3-12
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


                                    LIST



   Function

        The LIST command writes the entries for all  volume-sets  into  a
        catalog file.  (Use SHOW to list them on your screen.)


   Format

        CATALOG>LIST keyword filespec<RET>


   Keywords

        DECTAPE        lists DECtape volume-set entries.

        MAGTAPE        lists magtape volume-set entries.

        STRUCTURE      lists structure volume-set entries.

                            filespec is in the following form:

                                 dev:file.ext[path]

                            and has the following defaults:

                                 dev:     DSK
                                 file     catalog file name
                                 ext      LST
                                 path     current path


   Example

        The following example illustrates the LIST command.

        CATALOG>LIST STRUCTURE<RET>
        CATALOG>
         9:24:27    -- Structures listed to file DSKB:STRLST.LST[1,2] --

        CATALOG>









                                    3-13
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


                                   MODIFY



   Function

        The MODIFY command changes the volume-set attributes  and  volume
        specific information for an existing catalog entry.

        The MODIFY command has optional subcommands as well  as  keywords
        and  switches.   Two  right  angle brackets represent the CATALOG
        subcommand prompt.  For example:

             CATALOG>>


   Format

        CATALOG>MODIFY keyword argument/switches optional subcommand<RET>


   Keywords

        DECTAPE            modifies a DECtape volume-set entry.

        MAGTAPE            modifies a magtape volume-set entry.

        STRUCTURE          modifies a disk structure volume set entry.


   Argument

        volume-set name    modifies the existing  volume-set  entry  that
                           you specify.

   Switches

        /DENSITY:argument  sets the magtape density  to  200,  556,  800,
                           1600, or 6250.  You must specify /DENSITY when
                           creating magtape volume-sets.  (MAGTAPE only)

        /EXPIRATION:date   sets   the   expiration    date.     (MAGTAPE,
                           DECTAPE,and STRUCTURE)

        /LOCATION:text     specifies  the  volume-set  storage  location.
                           The  text  string  can  be 19 characters long.
                           Use  quotes  around  any  text   string   that
                           contains  characters  other than A-Z, a-z or -
                           (hyphen).  (MAGTAPE, DECTAPE,and STRUCTURE)




                                    3-14
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


        /NAME:user name    specifies the name associated with  the  owner
                           of   the  volume-set.   The  name  can  be  39
                           characters long.  The name  need  not  be  the
                           same  as  the  name associated with the PPN in
                           ACTDAE.SYS, the system accounting  file.   You
                           must  use  quotes  around any text string that
                           contains characters other than A-Z, a-z, or  -
                           (hyphen).  (MAGTAPE, DECTAPE,and STRUCTURE)

        /REELID:DECtape    specifies the reel  identification.   (DECTAPE
                           only)

        /TRACKS:argument   sets the number of tracks for a magtape volume
                           set  to  7  or  9.   If  the  tape density you
                           specify is 1600 or 6250 BPI,  then  9  is  the
                           default  number  of  tracks.  You must specify
                           the number of tracks when you specify  any  of
                           these  tape  densities:  200, 556, or 800 BPI.
                           (MAGTAPE only)

        /USER:[PPN]        sets the owner PPN of the volume-set.  You can
                           specify a wildcard for the project number, the
                           programmer  number,  or  both.   For  example:
                           [10,*],    [*,56]    and   [*,*].    (MAGTAPE,
                           DECTAPE,and STRUCTURE)


   Subcommands

        ADD                appends volumes to a volume set entry.

                           Magtape format:
                           CATALOG>>ADD reel-id

                           Structure format:
                           CATALOG>>ADD unit-id drive-type class

        DONE               completes an insertion command.

        QUIT               cancels the current INSERT command.

        REMOVE             deletes  a  volume-set  entry  you  have  just
                           entered  with  the  ADD  command.   The REMOVE
                           command  deletes  only  volume-sets  you  have
                           entered during the current insertion.  Use the
                           DELETE command to delete  previously  existing
                           volume-sets.






                                    3-15
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


   Restrictions

        Due to the destructive nature of the  MODIFY  command,  you  must
        specify  the  entire  volume-set  name.   Abbreviations  are  not
        allowed.


   Examples

        1.  Use the MODIFY command to change  the  volume-set  expiration
            date.

            CATALOG>MODIFY MAGTAPE TEST/EXPIRATION:15-JAN-89<RET>
            CATALOG>>DONE
            CATALOG>
            13:21:26             -- Magtape TEST modified --

            CATALOG>

        2.  Use  the  MODIFY  command  to  add  a  second  tape  to   the
            volume-set.

            CATALOG>MODIFY MAGTAPE TEST<RET>
            CATALOG>>ADD TEST2
            CATALOG>>DONE
            CATALOG>
            13:23:12             -- Magtape TEST modified --

            CATALOG>
























                                    3-16
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


                                   RETURN



   Function

        The RETURN command exits the CATALOG command subset  and  returns
        you to OPR command level.


   Format

        CATALOG>RETURN<RET>
        OPR>







































                                    3-17
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


                                    SHOW



   Function

        The  SHOW  command  displays  information   about   a   specified
        volume-set.


   Format

        CATALOG>SHOW keyword argument<RET>


   Keywords

        DECTAPE            displays  information  about  DECtape  volume-
                           sets.

        MAGTAPE            displays  information  about  magtape  volume-
                           sets.

        STRUCTURE          displays information about  structure  volume-
                           sets.


   Argument

        volume-set name    displays information about the volume-set  you
                           specify.   You  can  use a unique abbreviation
                           for the volume-set name.


   Examples

        1.  Use the SHOW command to display information  about  structure
            DSKT.

            CATALOG>SHOW STRUCTURE DSKT<RET>

            CATALOG>
            16:42:24                -- Structure catalog --
                    Structure DSKT
                    Location: Mounted on 1026
                    Owned by [1,2]  System disk
                    Unit    Type   Class
                   ------  -----  ------
                    DSKT0    RA81     0
                    DSKT1    RA81     0

            CATALOG>

                                    3-18
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CATALOG COMMANDS


        2.  Use the SHOW command to  display  information  about  magtape
            volume-set TEST.

            CATALOG>SHOW MAGTAPE TEST<RET>

            CATALOG>
            16:14:46                -- Magtape catalog --
                   Magtape TEST
                   Location: By  1026 racks
                   Expiration date: 15-Jan-89
                   Owned by [10,6016] DZIEDZIC
                   Label type: ANSI Tracks: 9 Density: 1600
                   Number  Reelid
                   ------  ------   
                        1  TEST0
                        2  TEST1
                        3  TEST2

            CATALOG>


































                                    3-19
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


   3.4  CONFIG COMMANDS

   CONFIG allows you to reconfigure system hardware without  halting  the
   system.   CONFIG,  formerly  a  separate  program, is now part of OPR.
   This section describes the CONFIG commands listed below:

         o  ADD

         o  AUTO-CONFIGURE

         o  HELP

         o  LOAD

         o  REMOVE

         o  SET

         o  SHOW

         o  SHUTDOWN

         o  SNAPSHOT

         o  SUSPEND

                                    NOTE

           The keywords for the ADD, AUTO-CONFIGURE,  and  REMOVE
           commands  depend  on  the  options  available  on your
           system.  If you press ?  to display  keywords,  CONFIG
           displays only the keywords that apply to your system.

   See the TOPS-10 Operator's Guide for more information about CONFIG.



















                                    3-20
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


                                    ADD



   Function

        The ADD command adds the following to the system:

         o  devices

         o  disk controllers

         o  tape controllers

         o  CI (Computer Interconnect) interface

         o  NI (Network Interconnect) interface

         o  CPUs (see restriction)

         o  memory (see restriction)


   Format

        CONFIG>ADD keyword argument<RET>


   Keywords

        ALL-CI             adds all CI interfaces.

        ALL-NI             adds all NI interfaces.

        CPUn               adds the specified CPU to the  system.   n  is
                           the CPU number.

        Rxy                adds the  specified  disk  controller  to  the
                           system.  x and y identify the disk controller.

        MTx                adds the  specified  tape  controller  to  the
                           system.  x identifies the tape controller.

        CI-n               adds the specified CI interface to the system.
                           n  is  the interface number.  If you have more
                           than  one  CI  interface,  the  keyword   list
                           includes ALL-CI as an option.






                                    3-21
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


        NI-n               adds the specified NI interface to the system.
                           n  is  the interface number.  If you have more
                           than  one  NI  interface,  the  keyword   list
                           includes ALL-NI as an option.

        device             specifies the device being added.

        MEMORY nn to nn    adds the specified  range  of  memory  to  the
                           total  system  configuration.  You can specify
                           the range as octal or decimal.  To specify  an
                           octal address, include a pound sign (#) before
                           the number.

                           For example,

                           #nn   specifies an octal address
                           nn    specifies a decimal address

                           The default unit of memory is words,  however,
                           you  can  specify  the memory unit in pages or
                           kilowords (blocks of 1024 words).  To  specify
                           pages,  add  the  letter  "P"  to  the number.
                           Include  the  letter  "K"  to  the  number  to
                           specify kilowords.

                           For example,

                           nnP specifies pages
                           nnK specifies kilowords


   Restriction

        To add processors and memory to an SMP system you must follow, in
        sequence, the procedural steps outlined in the TOPS-10 Operator's
        Guide  (Section  11.17,  Adding  Processors  and  Memory  to  SMP
        Systems).


   Examples

        1.  Use the ADD command to add CPU1 to the system.

            CONFIG>ADD CPU1<RET>
            CONFIG>
            15:06:13       CONFIG  -- ADD CPU --
            CPU1 added
            CONFIG>





                                    3-22
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


        2.  Use the ADD command to increase total system memory from 512K
            to 768K.

            CONFIG>ADD MEMORY (from) 512K (to) 768K<RET>
            CONFIG>
            16:18:18       CONFIG  -- ADD MEMORY --
            Memory from address 512K to 768K is now online
            (Words from 2000000 to 3000000)

            CONFIG>

        3.  Use the ADD command with ?  to list devices you can add.

            CONFIG>ADD ?<RET>one of the following:
            CPU0  CPU1  CPU2
              or one of the following:
            RAG  RAJ  RPA  RPB  RPC  RPD  RPE  RPF  RPG
              or one of the following:
            MTA  MTB  MTC
              or one of the following:
            ALL-CI  CI-0  CI-1  CI-2
              or one of the following:
            ALL-NI  NI-0  NI-1  NI-2
              or MEMORY
              or device name
            CONFIG>ADD



























                                    3-23
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


                            ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER



   Function

        The ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER command allocates  memory  so  that  the
        IPA20  DRAM  can  be dumped to the system error log file when the
        specified interface device reloads.

        The IPA20 is the microprocessor controlling the  CI20  and  NIA20
        interfaces.


   Format

        CONFIG>ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER keyword<RET>


   Keywords

        CI-n               specifies  a  CI20  interface.    n   is   the
                           interface number.

        ALL-CI             specifies all CI20 interfaces.

        NI-n               specifies  an  NIA20  interface.   n  is   the
                           interface number.

        ALL-NI             specifies all NIA20 interfaces.


   Example

        Use the ALLOCATE command to allocate memory in  the  monitor  for
        the dump from the CI20 interface for CPU1.

        CONFIG>ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER CI-1<RET>
        CONFIG>
        10:18:45         CONFIG  -- ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER --
        Dump buffer allocated for KLP1

        CONFIG>










                                    3-24
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


                                 AUTO-CONFIGURE



   Function

        The AUTO-CONFIGURE command  automatically  configures  disks  and
        tapes  into  the  system.   Use this command to configure devices
        that were powered-off when the system was first bootstrapped.


   Format

        CONFIG>AUTO-CONFIGURE keyword <RET>


   Keywords

        ALL-CPUs           automatically configures disks  and  tapes  on
                           all available CPUs into the system.

        CPUn               automatically configures all disks  and  tapes
                           on  the  specified  CPU into the system.  n is
                           the CPU number.


   Example

        Use the AUTO-CONFIGURE command to configure all disks  and  tapes
        on CPU1 into the system.

        CONFIG>AUTO-CONFIGURE CPU1<RET>
        CONFIG>
        10:45:18         CONFIG  -- AUTOCONFIGURE --

        CONFIG>

















                                    3-25
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


                                    LOAD



   Function

        The LOAD command loads  microcode  for  the  following  types  of
        devices:

         o  disk controllers

         o  tape controllers

         o  CI (Computer Interconnect) interface

         o  NI (Network Interconnect) interface


   Format

        CONFIG>LOAD keyword argument<RET>


   Keywords

        Rxy                loads  microcode   on   the   specified   disk
                           controller.    x   and  y  identify  the  disk
                           controller.

        MTx                loads  microcode   on   the   specified   tape
                           controller.  x identifies the tape controller.

        CI-n               loads microcode on the specified CI interface.
                           n is the interface number.

        NI-n               loads microcode on the specified NI interface.
                           n is the interface number.
















                                    3-26
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


   Examples

        1.  Use the LOAD command to load microcode on CI interface 0.

            CONFIG>LOAD CI-0<RET>
            CONFIG>
            16:55:39        CONFIG  -- LOAD microcode --
            Microcode loaded on CPU0, device 574, unit 0

            CONFIG>

        2.  USE the LOAD command to load  microcode  on  tape  controller
            MTA.

            CONFIG>LOAD MTA
            CONFIG>         
            16:56:23        CONFIG  -- LOAD microcode --
            Microcode loaded on CPU0, device 554, unit 0.

            CONFIG>

































                                    3-27
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


                                   REMOVE



   Function

        The REMOVE command removes the following devices from the system:

         o  devices

         o  disk controllers

         o  tape controllers

         o  CI (Computer Interconnect) interface

         o  NI (Network Interconnect) interface

         o  CPUs

         o  memory


   Format

        CONFIG>REMOVE keyword argument<RET>


   Keywords

        ALL-CI             removes all CI interfaces.

        ALL-NI             removes all NI interfaces.

        CPUn               removes the specified  CPU  from  the  system.
                           n is the CPU number.

        Rxy                removes the specified disk controller from the
                           system.     xy    is   the   disk   controller
                           identification.

        MTx                removes the specified tape controller from the
                           system.     x    is    the   tape   controller
                           identification.

        CI-n               removes the specified CI  interface  from  the
                           system.   n  is  the interface number.  If you
                           have more than one CI interface,  the  keyword
                           list includes ALL-CI as an option.




                                    3-28
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


        NI-n               removes the specified NI  interface  from  the
                           system.  n is the NI interface number.  If you
                           have more than one NI interface,  the  keyword
                           list inclues ALL-NI as an option.

        device             specifies the device being removed.

        MEMORY nn to nn    removes the specified range of memory from the
                           total  system  configuration.  You can specify
                           the range as octal or decimal.  To specify  an
                           octal address, include a pound sign (#) before
                           the number.  For example,

                           #nn   specifies an octal address
                           nn    specifies a decimal address

                           The default unit of memory is words,  however,
                           you  can  specify  the memory unit in pages or
                           kilowords (blocks of 1024 words).  To  specify
                           pages,  add  the  letter  "P"  to  the number.
                           Include  the  letter  "K"  to  the  number  to
                           specify kilowords.  For example,

                           nnP specifies pages
                           nnK specifies kilowords


   Examples

        1.  Use the REMOVE command to remove CPU1 from the system.

            CONFIG>REMOVE CPU1<RET>
            CONFIG>
            16:56:58        CONFIG -- REMOVE CPU --
            The following structures must be dismounted:
                    BLKY on RPG0
            CPU1 can't be removed
            CONFIG>

            Use the DISMOUNT command to  dismount  and  remove  structure
            BLKY and reissue the REMOVE command.

        2.  Use the REMOVE command to remove memory from 768K to 512K.

            CONFIG>REMOVE MEMORY 768K 512K<RET>
            CONFIG>
            16:57:56        CONFIG -- REMOVE MEMORY --
            Memory from address 512K to 768K is now offline
            (Words from 2000000 to 3000000)

            CONFIG>


                                    3-29
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


                                   RETURN



   Function

        The RETURN command exits the CONFIG command  subset  and  returns
        you to OPR command level.


   Format

        CONFIG>RETURN<RET>
        OPR>







































                                    3-30
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


                                    SET



   Function

        The SET command allows you to do the following:

         o  specify KLINIK parameters

         o  enable and disable automatic reloading of the  monitor  after
            certain stopcodes

         o  specify the BOOT-TEXT command string

         o  enable and disable continuable dumps after certain stopcodes


   Format

        CONFIG>SET keyword arguments<RET>


   Keywords

        AUTO-RELOAD        automatically reloads the  monitor  after  the
                           monitor crashes or has been down.

        BOOT-TEXT          specifies the BOOT-TEXT command  string.   The
                           BOOT-TEXT command string is the command string
                           passed  to  the  bootstrap  on  an   automatic
                           monitor reload.

        DUMP               causes the monitor to take  continuable  dumps
                           after the specified stopcodes.

        IGNORE argument    causes the monitor device service  routine  to
                           ignore  on-line  interrupts from the specified
                           device  until  you   enter   a   SET NO IGNORE
                           command.

        KLINIK             sets KLINIK parameters for the specified  CPU.
                           If  you  do not specify a CPU, SET KLINIK sets
                           the parameters for all CPUs.  This keyword has
                           a subcommand level, described below.

        MICROCODE          enables automatic reload of microcode.






                                    3-31
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


        NO

             AUTO-RELOAD   disables  automatic  reload  of  the  monitor.
                           When NO AUTO-RELOAD is in effect, BOOT prompts
                           you for reloading commands.

             DUMP          clears  the  current  stopcode  settings   for
                           continuable dumps.

             IGNORE        disables ignoring on-line interrupts.

             MICROCODE     disables automatic reload of microcode.

             RELOAD        disables reloading of the  monitor  after  the
                           specified type of stopcode.

        POLICY-CPU         sets the policy CPU to be CPUn.

        RELOAD             enables reloading of  the  monitor  after  the
                           specified type of stopcode.


   BOOT-TEXT Argument

                           command-string specifies  the  command  string
                           passed   to  the  bootstrap  on  an  automatic
                           monitor   reload.    Because   the   bootstrap
                           interprets   a   space  as  an  end-of-command
                           character, you can specify  multiple  commands
                           on  the  same  line by separating the commands
                           with spaces.  The command string  starts  with
                           the  first  non-space, non-tab character after
                           the keyword "BOOT-TEXT",  and  ends  when  you
                           press <RET>.

                                                NOTE

                               The bootstrap does  not  automatically
                               dump   the  memory  image  unless  you
                               specify the /D  bootstrap  command  as
                               the first element of the argument.












                                    3-32
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


   DUMP, NO DUMP, RELOAD, and NO RELOAD Arguments

             CPU-STOPCODES control dump-writing when CPU  type  stopcodes
                           occur.

             DEBUG-STOPCODES

                           control dump-writing when DEBUG type stopcodes
                           occur.

             JOB-STOPCODES control dump-writing when JOB  type  stopcodes
                           occur.


   KLINIK Arguments

             ALL-CPUs      sets KLINIK parameters for all CPUs.  This  is
                           the default.

             CPUn          sets KLINIK parameters for the specified CPU.


        Press RETURN to enter KLINIK subcommand  level.   KLINIK  prompts
        for the mode to set the KLINIK link.  For example:

             OPR>SET KLINIK<RET>
             KLINIK link:

        You must supply one of the following:

             OFF           shuts off the KLINIK links currently open.

             REMOTE        specifies the link will act as a remote system
                           CTY.

             USER          specifies  the   link   will   have   ordinary
                           timesharing user status.

        If you type USER, you must specify the date  and  time  when  the
        link is available.  For example:

             KLINIK mode:  USER<RET>
             Access window OPEN date-time:  DATE:TIME
             Access window CLOSED date-time:  DATE:TIME

             CONFIG>

        If you press RETURN to the OPEN prompt, the default is now.   The
        date and time format is:  DD-MMM-YY:HH:MM:SS




                                    3-33
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


        If you type REMOTE, you must specify a password, open  and  close
        date-times,  and  the  console mode accessible to the user of the
        link.  For example:

             KLINIK mode:  REMOTE<RET>
             Password:<RET>
             Access window OPEN date-time:  DATE:TIME
             Access window CLOSED date-time:  DATE:TIME
             Highest console mode:<RET>

             CONFIG>

        The console mode can be one of the following:

             MAINTENANCE

             OPERATOR

             PROGRAMMER

        If you press  RETURN  to  the  console  prompt,  the  default  is
        OPERATOR.

        The state of the  KLINIK  link  is  reported  by  OPR  after  any
        changes.  For more information about KLINIK links and the console
        modes, refer to the TOPS-10/20 RSX-20F System Reference Manual.

        MICROCODE and NO MICROCODE arguments:

             Rxy           controls reloading microcode on specified CPU.

             MTx           controls  reloading  microcode  on   specified
                           Magtape.

             CI-n          controls reloading microcode on specified CI.

             NI-n          controls reloading microcode on specified NI.
















                                    3-34
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


   Examples

        1.  Use the SET command to specify  a  BOOT-TEXT  command  string
            that dumps the memory image and reloads the monitor.

            CONFIG>SET BOOT-TEXT /D DSKA:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]<RET>
            CONFIG>
            14:32:55        CONFIG  -- SET BOOTXT --
            Boot-text setting accepted.  New boot string is:
                    /D DSKA:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]

            CONFIG>

        2.  Use the SET  NO  AUTO-RELOAD  command  to  disable  automatic
            reload of the monitor.

            CONFIG>SET NO AUTO-RELOAD<RET>
            CONFIG>
            15:16:07        CONFIG  -- SET AUTO-RELOAD --
            Automatic system reload is disabled

            CONFIG>































                                    3-35
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


                                    SHOW



   Function

        The SHOW command displays information about  the  current  KLINIK
        and  STOPCODE-FLAGS  settings.   See  the  SET  command  for more
        information about KLINIK and STOPCODE-FLAG settings.


   Format

        CONFIG>SHOW keyword<RET>


   Keywords

        BOOT-TEXT          displays the BOOT-TEXT  command  string.   The
                           BOOT-TEXT command string is the command string
                           passed  to  the  bootstrap  on  an   automatic
                           monitor reload.

        HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION

                           displays information  about  currently  active
                           CPUs, and monitor memory, physical memory, and
                           CI configurations.

        KLINIK             displays information about the current  KLINIK
                           window settings.

        STOPCODE-FLAGS     displays   information   about   the   current
                           stopcode flag settings.


   Switches for HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION only

        /CI                displays information about  the  CI  (Computer
                           Interconnect) configuration only.

        /CONTROLLER-MICROCODES

                           displays  information  about  the   controller
                           microcodes only.

        /CPU               displays information about  CPU  configuration
                           only.

        /DISK              displays information about disk  configuration
                           only.


                                    3-36
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


        /DTE               displays    information    about    the    DTE
                           configuration only.

        /MONITOR-MEMORY    displays  information  about  monitor   memory
                           configuration only.

        /NI                displays  information  about   NI   (Ethernet)
                           configuration only.

        /TAPE              displays  information  about   magnetic   tape
                           configuration only.

        /UNIT-RECORD       displays information about unit record  device
                           (card-reader) configuration only.


   Examples

        1.  Use the SHOW command to display information about the current
            KLINIK window settings.

            CONFIG>SHOW KLINIK<RET>
            CONFIG>
            11:11:26        CONFIG  -- KLINIK Status --
                    -- CPU0 KLINIK Status --
            Access window open
            Window opened on 07-Jan-88 at 10:50:02
            Window closes on 16-Feb-89 at 23:59:58
            KLINIK mode: REMOTE     Console mode: MAINTENANCE
                    -- CPU1 KLINIK Status --
            Access window closed
                    -- CPU2 KLINIK Status --
            Access window closed

            CONFIG>

        2.  Use the SHOW command to display information about the current
            stopcode flag settings.

            CONFIG>SHOW STOPCODE-FLAGS<RET>
            CONFIG>
            11:17:43        CONFIG  -- SHOW STOPCODE-FLAGS --
            System will do continuable dumps on CPU, DEBUG, and JOB stopcodes
            System will reload on STOP stopcodes

            CONFIG>







                                    3-37
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


                                  SHUTDOWN



   Function

        The SHUTDOWN command takes the monitor down with a  reload  (RLD)
        stopcode, and reloads the monitor.  You must supply a single-line
        reason for the reload when you use the SHUTDOWN command.   CONFIG
        stores  the address of the reason string in AC 0.  The reason for
        the dump can later be determined by examining user AC 0.

                                      NOTE

                To  prevent  accidental  use  of   the   SHUTDOWN
                command,  OPR  does  not permit you to abbreviate
                the command, or to press <ESC>  to  complete  the
                command.


   Format

        CONFIG>SHUTDOWN reason<RET>


   Example

        Use the SHUTDOWN command to take down the monitor to clear a hung
        tape system.

        CONFIG>SHUTDOWN CLEAR HUNG TAPE SYSTEM<RET>






















                                    3-38
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


                                  SNAPSHOT



   Function

        The SNAPSHOT command executes a stopcode, dumps the system memory
        image, and continues the system automatically.

        You must supply a single-line reason for the  snapshot  when  you
        use  the  SNAPSHOT  command.   CONFIG  stores  the address of the
        reason string in AC 0.  The reason for  the  dump  can  later  be
        determined by examining user AC 0.

                                      NOTE

                To  prevent  accidental  use  of   the   SNAPSHOT
                command,  OPR  does  not permit you to abbreviate
                the command, or to press <ESC>  to  complete  the
                command.


   Format

        CONFIG>SNAPSHOT reason<RET>


   Example

        Use the SNAPSHOT command to obtain a dump of  the  system  memory
        image.

        CONFIG>SNAPSHOT SYSTEM HUNG<RET>
        CONFIG>
        17:00:33         CONFIG -- SNAPSHOT --

        CONFIG>
















                                    3-39
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


                                  SUSPEND



   Function

        The SUSPEND command suspends system operation and writes a system
        dump  file.   You  can  later  reload  the  dump  file  with  the
        BOOT/REBOOT switch and continue the system.  You  must  supply  a
        single-line  reason  for  suspending  the system when you use the
        SUSPEND command.  CONFIG stores the address of the reason  string
        in  AC  0.   The  reason  for the dump can later be determined by
        examining user AC 0.   You  must  perform  all  logical  software
        reconfiguration that is needed before a system is suspended.

        To record system configuration before suspension, you can use the
        SHOW HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION command.  Then use SUSPEND to suspend
        system operations.


                                      NOTE

                To prevent accidental use of the SUSPEND command,
                OPR does not permit you to abbreviate the command
                or to press <ESC> to complete the command.

        See the TOPS-10  Operator's  Guide  for  more  information  about
        SUSPEND.


   Format

        CONFIG>SUSPEND reason<RET>

   You must  supply  a  text  string  indicating  the  "reason"  for  the
   suspension.


   Examples

        Suspend  system  operation  in  order   to   perform   corrective
        maintenance.

   1. Display    the    current    configuration    using    the     SHOW
   HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION command.

   CONFIG>SHOW HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION
   CONFIG>
   14:24:24 
                           CONFIG -- SHOW HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION --
   CPU Configuration
   CPU0 is running and scheduling jobs
     KL10 model B serial number 1026, microcode version 442
                                    3-40
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


     Hardware options:
       MCA25 cache/pager  Extended addressing  Internal channels
       Cache
     Cache status:  Enabled
     Internal channels:
       0: RH20    1: RH20    2: RH20    3: N/C   
       4: N/C     5: NIA20   6: N/C     7: CI20  
     DTE configuration:
       DTE0:  up  CFE running RSX20F version VA15-50
              Reload enable: ON  Retry enable: ON  Fault-continuation: ON
       DTE1:  up  DN60 running DN60
       DTE2:  up  DN87S running ANF10 node NOVA(31)
       DTE3:  down
     CFE UNIBUS Configuration:
        CSR           Device           CSR     Associated Device
       ------  ---------------------  ------  --------------------
       172100  MF11-UP Mem Parity   
       177340  TC11 DECtape Control 
       176700  RH11 Disk Control    
         .
         .
         .
   Monitor Memory Configuration
     Monitor configured for 4096P (2048K) of physical memory
   Controller Microcodes
     Controller    Version
     ----------  -----------
     DX10/TX01         15(0)
     DX20/TX02        10(74)
     DX20/RP20          3(1)
     CI20            1A(733)
     NIA20            1(172)
   CI Configuration
         Node       S/W type  S/W vers  H/W type
     -------------  --------  --------  --------
     00 (KL-1026)     T-10      0703      KL10
     02 (KL-1322)     T-10      0703      KL10
     06 (HSC006)      HSC       V350      HS50
     09 (HSC009)      HSC       V350      HS50
     11 (KL-1042)     T-10      0703      KL10
     13 (KL-2476)     T-10      0703      KL10
   NI Configuration
     Chan/Kont   State     E-net Address
     ---------  -------  -----------------
     ETH-0      Online   AA-00-04-00-6E-1C
       NI-0     Online   AA-00-03-03-00-13
       NI-1     Online   AA-00-03-03-00-87
       NI-2     Online   08-00-2B-00-13-BC
   Disk Configuration
     Drive   Type  Str   Volume  CPU(s)  Controller
     ------  ----  ----  ------  ------  ----------
     RAJ1    RA81                012     HSC-9
     RAG1    RA81                        HSC-6
                                    3-41
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


     RPE0    RP06  1322  13220   2       RH20-0 (540)
      .
      .
      .
   Tape Configuration
     Drive    Type   Volume  CPU(s)  Controller(s)
     ------  ------  ------  ------  -------------
     MTA260  TU70            0       DX10-0 (220)
     MTA261  TU70            0       DX10-0 (220)
     MTA262  TU70            0       DX10-0 (220)
       .
       .
       .
   DECtape configuration
     Device  CPU
     ------  ---
     DTA260   0
     DTA261   0
     DTA262   0
     DTA263   0
   Unit Record Device Configuration
     Card reader configuration:
       Device  CPU
       ------  ---
       CDR260   2 
     Line printer configuration:
       Device  CPU  Type   Status
       ------  ---  -----  ------
       LPT260   1   LP100  Online 


   2. SUSPEND the system.

   CONFIG>SUSPEND FIX MEMORY<RET>

   ;;SYSTEM:  - Expect an interruption of service

   ;;SYSTEM:  - Suspending system operation
   [Suspending system on DSKF:CRASH.EXE[1,4]]
   [System suspended]                          The system  is  suspended.
                                               All  other  CPUs in an SMP
                                               system   should   now   be
                                               HALTed.

                                               Note that SMP systems must
                                               be  REBOOTed  on  the  CPU
                                               that was  the  policy  CPU
                                               when    the   system   was
                                               suspended.

   RSX-20F VE##-## 8:57 26-Mar-86              RSX-20F    version     and
                                               creation time and date.

                                    3-42
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                              CONFIG COMMANDS


   [SYO:  redirected to DBO:]                  DBO:  is the system device
   [DBO:  mounted]                             for the RSX-20F tasks.
   KLI -- VERSION VA##-## RUNNING              KLINIT  prints  this   and
   KLI -- KL10 S/N:  2996., MODEL B, 60 HERTZ  the following lines.
   KLI -- KL10 HARDWARE ENVIRONMENT
           MCA25 CACHE PAGER
           MOS MASTER OSCILLATOR
           EXTENDED ADDRESSING
           INTERNAL CHANNELS
           CACHE

   KLI -- PAGE TABLE SELECTED:  BOTH
   KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION #.#[###] LOADED
   KLI -- ALL CACHES ENABLED
   KLI -- % MOS MEMORY IS ALREADY CONFIGURED

   LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION
     ADDRESS SIZE INT TYPE CONTROLLER
    00000000 768K 4 MF20 10
    03000000 768K 4 MF20 11

   KLI -- CONFIGURATION FILE WRITTEN
   KLI -- BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED         KLINIT  has   loaded   and
                                               started BOOT.
   BOOT V#(##)                                 BOOT version number.

   BOOT>/REBOOT<RET>                           Type  /REBOOT  and   press
                                               RETURN   to   reload   the
                                               default monitor  from  the
                                               file DSKF:CRASH.EXE[1,4].
   [Reloading from DSKF:CRASH.EXE[1,4]]        BOOT is now reloading  the
                                               monitor.
   Date:3-Sep-88                               Before answering the  date
                                               prompt,  start  other  SMP
                                               system CPUs using the JUMP
                                               400 PARSER command.
   Time:1150

   CONFIG>
   ;;SYSTEM:  - System resumed


   CONFIG>










                                    3-43
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


   3.5  LCP COMMANDS

   The LAT Control Program (LCP) allows you to control  and  monitor  LAT
   activity.  For example, LCP commands:

         o  Clear LAT parameters.

         o  Set LAT parameters.

         o  Show the current parameters,  terminal  connections,  counter
            and server information.

         o  Change various counter settings to zero.

   This section describes the keywords, arguments, and  switches  to  the
   LCP commands listed below.

         o  CLEAR

         o  SET

         o  SHOW

         o  START

         o  STOP

         o  ZERO

   See  the  TOPS-10  Operator's  Guide  for   more   information   about
   controlling LAT devices.

   For more information about LAT architecture, and LAT  Terminal  Server
   configuration   guidelines,   see   the  Local  Area  Transport  (LAT)
   Architecture Network Manager's Guide.


















                                    3-44
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


                                   CLEAR



   Function

        The CLEAR  command  resets  parameters  specified  with  the  SET
        command.  Note that you cannot clear parameters for NODE-NAME, or
        host NUMBER.  See the SET  command  for  more  information  about
        these parameters.


   Format

        LCP>CLEAR keyword argument<RET>


   Keywords

        GROUPS             clears the current GROUPS  setting.   You  can
                           clear the current setting for single groups or
                           a range of groups.  For example:

                           CLEAR GROUPS n

                           CLEAR GROUPS n:m

        IDENTIFICATION     clears  all  additional  host   identification
                           information.

        MAXIMUM

             ACTIVE-CIRCUITS

                           changes  to   10   the   maximum   number   of
                           active-circuits that can exist at a node.

             SESSIONS      resets  the  maximum  number  of  active   LAT
                           terminals  allowed  to  connect  to  the local
                           host.  The reset value defaults to the  number
                           of  remote terminals you specify in the NETGEN
                           section of the MONGEN dialog.  See the TOPS-10
                           Software    Installation    Guide   for   more
                           information about MONGEN.

        MULTICAST-TIMER    clears the current number of seconds  set  for
                           the  multicast  timer, and sets the new number
                           to 30 seconds.  The multicast timer  specifies
                           the  interval  at which a host will transmit a
                           multicast message announcing the  availability
                           of the LAT Terminal Service.

        NUMBER             specifies a unique host identification number.
                                    3-45
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


        RETRANSMIT

             TIMER         resets   the   retransmit   timer   to    1000
                           milliseconds.   The retransmit timer specifies
                           number  of  milliseconds   before   the   host
                           retransmits any unacknowledged messages to the
                           server.

             LIMIT         resets to 60 the number of times  that  a  LAT
                           host  retransmits  any unacknowledged messages
                           to  the  server.   After  the   last   message
                           transmission,   the  host  detaches  all  jobs
                           associated with the virtual circuit.

        SERVICE-NAME service-name

                           clears the  types  of  services  that  a  host
                           offers to terminal users at a LAT server.  The
                           CLEAR SERVICE-NAME  command  also  clears  any
                           RATING     or     additional    identification
                           information associated with the service name.


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies a number from 0 to 255.

        n:m                specifies a range of numbers from 0 to 255.

        text               specifies a text string.

        service-name       specifies   a   service   name    for    CLEAR
                           SERVICE-NAME.


   Examples

        1.  Use the CLEAR command to clear the current GROUPS setting for
            all groups in the range of 30 to 40 and for group 53.

            LCP>CLEAR GROUPS 30:40,53<RET>
            LCP>
             9:24:47        LCP     -- Clear Accepted --

            LCP>








                                    3-46
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


        2.  Use the CLEAR command to reset the maximum number  of  active
            LAT terminals allowed to connect to the local host.

            LCP>CLEAR MAXIMUM SESSIONS<RET>
            LCP>
             9:25:15        LCP     -- Clear Accepted --

            LCP> 













































                                    3-47
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


                                   RETURN



   Function

        The RETURN command exits the LCP command subset and  returns  you
        to OPR command level.


   Format

        LCP>RETURN<RET>
        OPR>







































                                    3-48
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


                                    SET



   Function

        The SET command specifies various LCP parameters.  You can  clear
        the  current  settings for all of the following parameters except
        host  NUMBER.   See  the  CLEAR  command  for  information  about
        clearing current settings.


   Format

        LCP>SET keyword argument /switch<RET>


   Keywords

        GROUPS             specifies a  range  of  group  numbers,  or  a
                           single  group  number.   You  can  specify any
                           combination  of  ranges  or  single   numbers,
                           separated by commas.  For example:

                           SET GROUPS n:m, nn, n2:m2<RET>

        IDENTIFICATION     specifies  host  identification   information.
                           The  identification  text  may  be  up  to  64
                           characters long, and may contain any printable
                           character.

        MAXIMUM

             ACTIVE-CIRCUITS

                           sets the maximum  number  of  active  circuits
                           that can exist at a node at one time.

             SESSIONS      sets  the  maximum  number   of   active   LAT
                           terminals  allowed  to  connect  to  the local
                           host.  The default  value  is  the  number  of
                           remote  terminals  you  specify  in the NETGEN
                           section of the MONGEN dialog.  See the TOPS-10
                           Software    Installation    Guide   for   more
                           information about MONGEN.

        MULTICAST-TIMER    sets  the  interval  at  which  a  host   will
                           transmit  to  all  servers a multicast message
                           announcing  the  availability   of   the   LAT
                           terminal service.  The multicast timer default
                           is 30 seconds.

        NUMBER             specifies a unique host identification number.
                                    3-49
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


        RETRANSMIT

             TIMER         sets the number  of  milliseconds  before  the
                           host  retransmits  any unacknowledged messages
                           to  the   server.    The   default   is   1000
                           milliseconds.

             LIMIT         sets the maximum number of times  that  a  LAT
                           host  retransmits  any unacknowledged messages
                           to  the  server.   After  the   last   message
                           transmission,   the  host  detaches  all  jobs
                           associated  with  the  virtual  circuit.   The
                           default is 60 retransmissions.

        SERVICE-NAME       specifies the types of services a host  offers
                           to  terminal  users  at  a  LAT  server.   The
                           service  name  may   contain   the   following
                           characters:   any  alphanumeric characters, as
                           well as the $ (dollar sign), -  (dash),  or  _
                           (underscore).


   Arguments

        nn                 specifies a number from 0 to 255.

        n:m                specifies a range of numbers from 0 to 255.

        text               specifies a text string.


   Switches for SERVICE-NAME only

        /RATING:           specifies  the  host's  service  rating.   The
                           rating  may  be  a  fixed  number in the range
                           0-255, or it may be the word  "DYNAMIC".   The
                           higher  the  rating,  the more accessible that
                           host is  to  the  LAT  terminal  server.   The
                           DYNAMIC  rating  changes  according to machine
                           availability.

        /IDENTIFICATION:   specifies a service description of  up  to  64
                           characters.   You  must  include quotes around
                           the  service  description  you  specify.   For
                           example:

                           LCP>SET SERVICE-NAME JEEVES/IDENTIFICATION:"FOO"






                                    3-50
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


   Examples

        1.  Use the SET command to set  to  200  the  maximum  number  of
            active LAT terminals allowed to connect to the local host.

            LCP>SET MAXIMUM SESSIONS 200<RET>
            LCP>
             9:25:33        LCP    -- Set Accepted --

            LCP>

        2.  Use  the  SET  command   to   specify   host   identification
            information.

            LCP>SET IDENTIFICATION "BIG SYSTEM"<RET>
            LCP>
             9:27:07        LCP     -- Set Accepted --

            LCP>

        3.  Use the SET command to set to 10 the maximum number of active
            circuits that can exist at a node.

            LCP>SET MAXIMUM ACTIVE-CIRCUITS 10<RET>
            LCP>
             9:28:15        LCP     -- Set Accepted --

            LCP>

        4.  Use the SET command to set the host's service  name,  service
            rating, and service description.

            LCP>SET SERVICE-NAME MACHO/RATING:55/IDENTIFICATION:"Best"<RET>
            LCP>
             9:31:13        LCP     -- Set Accepted --

            LCP>
















                                    3-51
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


                                    SHOW



   Function

        The SHOW command displays the following LAT information:

         o  Dynamic and permanent parameters

         o  Currently active terminal connections

         o  Server information

         o  Counter information


   Format

        LCP>SHOW keyword /switch <RET>


   Keywords

        CHARACTERISTICS    displays the dynamic parameters  and  many  of
                           the permanent LAT parameters.

        COUNTERS           displays the counter totals for all servers on
                           the  system.   To  display  the counters for a
                           particular server, use the /SERVER switch  and
                           supply a server name.

        HOST-INITIATED-REQUESTS

                           displays all the currently active outgoing LAT
                           connections.

        PENDING-REQUESTS   displays all the  currently  pending  outgoing
                           LAT connections.

        SERVER server-name

                           displays the servers that  have  connected  to
                           the  local LAT host.  SHOW SERVER/ALL displays
                           a summary of server information including  the
                           server  name,  number  and  Ethernet  address.
                           SHOW SERVER followed by a server name displays
                           additional  information  about  the  specified
                           server including the  server  location,  type,
                           status and timers.



                                    3-52
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


        SESSIONS           displays information  about  the  current  LAT
                           terminal sessions including:

                            o  Job  

                            o  Line  

                            o  Program

                            o  Server name

                            o  User


   Switch for COUNTERS and SERVER only

        /SERVER:server-name

                           displays counters for the specified server.


   Argument

        server-name        specifies the  server  for  which  to  display
                           information.  The server-name argument applies
                           only to the  SHOW  COUNTERS  and  SHOW  SERVER
                           command.


























                                    3-53
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


   Examples

        1.  Use the SHOW command to display the dynamic and permanent LAT
            parameters.

            LCP>SHOW CHARACTERISTICS<RET>
            LCP>
             9:27:21        LCP    -- Host Characteristics --

            LAT Access State: ON
            Host Name: KL1026
            Host id: RLT17QM KL1026 AP Monitor
            Host Number: 0
            Retransmit Limit: 60
            Retransmit Timer: 1000
            Multicast Timer: 30
            Groups: 3:4,7,10,14,18,21
                                 Current   Maximum
                                 -------   -------
            Allocated circuits       3        20
            Active circuits          3        20
            Sessions                 6       200
            Service name   Rating        Identification
            ------------   ------   ------------------------
               KL1026        1      RLT17Q KL1026 AP Monitor
               TOPS10        1      TOPS-10 Development System

            LCP>

        2.  Use the SHOW command to display the counter  totals  for  all
            servers on the system.

            LCP>SHOW COUNTERS<RET>
            LCP>
             9:32:38        LCP     -- Counter Totals for All Servers --

            Messages received: 12664
            Messages transmitted: 13659
            Messages retransmitted: 31
            Sequence errors received: 216
            Illegal messages received: 0
            Illegal slots received: 0
            Resource failures: 0

            LCP> 








                                    3-54
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


        3.  Use the SHOW command  to  display  information  about  server
            LAT9.

            LCP>SHOW SERVER LAT9<RET>
            LCP>
             9:33:26        LCP     -- Information About Server LAT9 --

            Server Number: 98
            Server Location: MRO1-2/L5
            Server Type: DECserver-100
            Ethernet Address: 08-00-2B-00-17-DF
            Server Status: Connected
            Max Slots: 48
            Data Link Size: 1518
            Circuit Timer(ms): 80
            Keep-alive Timer(s): 20

            LCP>

        4.  Use the SHOW command to display information about current LAT
            terminal sessions.

            LCP>SHOW SESSIONS<RET>
            LCP>
             9:33:57        LCP     -- Active LAT Sessions --

            Job Line Program Server Name   Port Name          User
            --- ---- ------- ----------- -------------  -----------------
             36  75  MS      LAT93       JFRANCIS       FRANCIS [30,224]
             22  76  PIP     LAT1        TZIEDZIC       ZIEDZIC [30,6601]
             24  77  DIRECT  LAT1        SENDLOSK        LUS [10,4601]
             27 100  QUEUE   LAT87       SPERKINS       PERK [30,2216]
             29 103  STECO   LAT98       BFROEM         FROEM [30,6026]
             30 104  DC      LAT94       JOANNCREEL     JCREEL [30,5653]
             26 105  QUEUE   LAT1        DAVIDLUND      LUND [10,5451]

            LCP>
















                                    3-55
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


                                   START



   Function

        The  START  command  notifies  all  servers  that  the  host   is
        available,  and  sets  the  LAT-ACCESS-STATE to ON.  See the STOP
        command for information about restricting  access  to  the  local
        host.


   Format

        LCP>START<RET>


   Example

        Use the START command to make the host available to all  terminal
        servers.

        LCP>START<RET>
        LCP>
        8:33:56        LCP     -- Start Accepted --

        LCP>


























                                    3-56
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


                                      STOP



   Function

        The STOP command terminates all existing  LAT  terminal  sessions
        and  rejects  any  new  connections  from servers.  See the START
        command for information on permitting access to the local host.


   Format

        LCP>STOP<RET>


   Example

        Use the STOP command  to  terminate  all  existing  LAT  terminal
        sessions.

        LCP>STOP<RET>
        LCP>
        8:34:41        LCP     -- Stop Accepted --

        LCP>



























                                    3-57
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                LCP COMMANDS


                                  ZERO COUNTERS



   Function

        The ZERO COUNTERS command changes the counters for  the  combined
        LAT  server  totals  to  zero.   This command does not affect the
        counters for the individual servers unless you use  the  /SERVER:
        switch and specify a particular server.


   Format

        LCP>ZERO COUNTERS /switch <RET>


   Switch

        /SERVER:server-name

                           sets the counters for a particular  server  to
                           zero.    This   switch  does  not  affect  the
                           counters for the combined server totals.   You
                           must specify a server name with this switch.


   Argument

        server-name        specifies the server  on  which  the  counters
                           should be set to zero.


   Examples

        1.  Use the ZERO COUNTERS command to change the counters for  the
            combined LAT server totals to zero.

            LCP>ZERO COUNTERS<RET>
            LCP>
             9:35:47        LCP     -- Zero Accepted --

            LCP>

        2.  Use the ZERO COUNTERS command  to  change  the  counters  for
            server LAT9.

            LCP>ZERO COUNTERS/SERVER:LAT9<RET>
            LCP>
             9:36:26        LCP     -- Zero Accepted --

            LCP>

                                    3-58
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                NCP COMMANDS


   3.6  NCP COMMANDS

   This section provides information about the  Network  Control  Program
   (NCP)  command  subset.  It is a quick reference guide for experienced
   NCP users.  If you have never used NCP, please see the TOPS-10  DECnet
   and  PSI  System Manager's and Operator's Guide before you use any NCP
   commands.

   NCP's two main functions are to control  and  monitor  DECnet  network
   activity.  Some of the tasks you perform with NCP include:

         o  Changing parameters

         o  Monitoring local and remote DECnet nodes

         o  Loading and starting adjacent nodes

         o  Gathering information about the DECnet network

                                  WARNING

           Some NCP commands have the potential  to  disrupt  the
           entire  network.   Several commands will, if formatted
           with valid but ill-chosen parameters, disrupt your own
           node's   performance.   Never  enter  an  NCP  command
           without  a  complete  understanding  of  the  probable
           effect  of  the  command.   Do not make changes in the
           permanent  data  base  of  a   remote   node   without
           consulting the system manager at the remote node.

   The following table briefly describes the NCP commands.






















                                    3-59
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                                NCP COMMANDS


   Table 3-1:  NCP Commands

   ______________________________________________________________________

     Command                     Function
   ______________________________________________________________________

     CANCEL          Removes a command from the  request  queue  before
                     processing begins.

     CLEAR           Removes a value previously entered in the volatile
                     data base.

     DEFINE          Enters a value in the permanent data base.

     DUMP            Stores a copy of a target node's memory image in a
                     dump file at the host node.

     HELP            Returns a function and major keywords for all  NCP
                     commands.

     LIST            Displays, on the user's terminal, information from
                     the permanent data base.

     LOAD            Allows the executor node to load the system  image
                     file to a remote node adjacent to the executor.

     LOOP            Requests a node-level loopback test.

     PURGE           Removes a value or values from the permanent  data
                     base.

     SET             Enters a value or  values  in  the  volatile  data
                     base.

     SHOW            Displays on the user's terminal  information  from
                     the volatile data base.

     TELL(prefix)    Directs the command that follows to a remote  node
                     for execution.

     TRIGGER         Requests the target node to send a load request.

     ZERO            Logs counters and then zeros them.
   ______________________________________________________________________








                                    3-60
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


   3.7  QUOTA COMMANDS

   The QUOTA application in OPR enables you to maintain disk space  quota
   entries in the QUOTA.SYS file and in ACTDAE.SYS.  QUOTA.SYS contains a
   list of users for the private structure  on  which  the  users'  files
   reside.   Creating  entries  in  ACTDAE.SYS  causes LOGIN to mount the
   specified structures.  System Administrator privileges are required.

   With QUOTA, you can do the following:

         o  create a user's quota

         o  delete a user's quota

         o  list a user's quota

         o  change a user's quota

         o  display a user's quota

                                    NOTE

           You must have SYSTEM operator privileges  to  use  the
           QUOTA  application.   SYSTEM operator privileges allow
           you to control devices and tasks on  the  host  system
           and remote nodes.



























                                    3-61
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


                                    ADD



   Function

        The ADD command creates entries in QUOTA.SYS or  ACTDAE.SYS.   If
        you  specify  the  /MOUNT  switch,  QUOTA  writes  the  entry  in
        ACTDAE.SYS.  If you do  not  specify  the  /MOUNT  switch,  QUOTA
        writes the entry in <STRUCTURE>:QUOTA.SYS[1,4].


   Format

        QUOTA>ADD userid structure quota-in quota-out /switches<RET>


        userid             specifies a user's project-programmer  number,
                           or  a  user  name.   You  must  include quotes
                           around   a   user   name   if   it    contains
                           non-alphabetic     characters.     Both    the
                           project-programmer number and  the  user  name
                           may include wildcards.

        structure          specifies a device  name,  which  can  be  any
                           structure name.

        quota-in
        quota-out          specifies a  user's  logged-in  or  logged-out
                           quota in 128-word blocks.  You may specify the
                           quota as one of the following:

                            o  a positive decimal number

                            o  the word INFINITE to indicate the  largest
                               possible 36-bit integer.


   Switches

        /MOUNT             creates an entry for the  specified  structure
                           in  ACTDAE.SYS  and in the user's LOGIN search
                           list.  If you include the /MOUNT  switch,  the
                           structure must be cataloged and accessible.

        /NOCREATE          sets the NOCREATE status  bit  when  the  user
                           logs  in.   This  bit  prohibits the user from
                           creating files on  the  structure  unless  the
                           user   specifies   the   structure  name  when
                           creating a file.  The /NOCREATE switch applies
                           only if you specified the /MOUNT switch.


                                    3-62
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


        /NOWRITE           write-locks the specified  structure  for  the
                           specified  user's  job  when the user logs in.
                           The user will not be able to create  files  on
                           the  structure.   The  /NOWRITE switch applies
                           only if you specified the /MOUNT switch.


   Examples

        1.  Use the ADD command to create an entry  in  QUOTA.SYS  for  a
            user  (JSMITH)  on structure RENG with quota-in and quota-out
            of 100 blocks.

            QUOTA>ADD JSMITH RENG 100 100<RET>
            QUOTA>
            14:00:59               -- ADD command --
                    1 entry added

            QUOTA>

        2.  Use the ADD command to create an entry in ACTDAE.SYS in which
            the  creation  of files on the structure is prohibited unless
            the user (JSMITH) specifies the structure name when  creating
            the file.

            QUOTA>ADD JSMITH DSKC 1000 100/MOUNT/NOCREATE<RET>
            QUOTA>
            14:02:29                -- ADD command --
                    1 entry added

            QUOTA>






















                                    3-63
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


                                   DELETE



   Function

        The DELETE command removes entries from QUOTA.SYS and ACTDAE.SYS.


   Format

        QUOTA>DELETE userid structure<RET>


        userid             specifies a user's project-programmer  number,
                           or  a  user  name.   You  must  include quotes
                           around   a   user   name   if   it    contains
                           non-alphabetic     characters.     Both    the
                           project-programmer number and  the  user  name
                           may include wildcards.

        structure          specifies a device  name,  which  can  be  any
                           structure name.


   Example

        Use  the  DELETE  command  to  remove  entries  of  user  JSMITH,
        structure RENG, from QUOTA.SYS and ACTDAE.SYS.

        QUOTA>DELETE JSMITH RENG<RET>
        QUOTA>
        14:02:48                -- DELETE command --
                1 entry deleted

        QUOTA>

















                                    3-64
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


                                    HELP



   Function

        The HELP command displays information about QUOTA commands.

   Format

        QUOTA>HELP command<RET>

        where command is any QUOTA command.


   Examples

        1.  Use the HELP command to get more information about HELP.

            QUOTA>HELP HELP<RET>
            QUOTA>
                 Obtain help for any QUOTA application command.  
                 The format is this:
                    HELP command
            where <command> can be any one of the following QUOTA
            commands:
                   ADD             DELETE          HELP
                   LIST            MODIFY          SHOW

            QUOTA>

        2.  Use the HELP command to  get  information  about  the  DELETE
            command.

            QUOTA>HELP DELETE<RET>
                 Removes one or more quota entries from the system.
                 The format is:
                  DELETE user structure
                 The <user> specification can be any of the following:

            a.  A ppn.  This ppn can contain wildcards (i.e., * and ?).

            b.  A quoted username.

            c.  An  unquoted  username.   This   username   can   contain
                wildcards (* and ?).

                 The <structure> argument  can  be  any  valid  structure
                 name.  The trailing colon is optional.

            QUOTA>


                                    3-65
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


                                    LIST



   Function

        The LIST command writes a user or structure quota to a file.  You
        must  specify  a  PPN  or  username.   To list QUOTA.SYS entries,
        specify a structure name.  To list  ACTDAE.SYS  entries,  specify
        the /MOUNT switch.


   Format

        QUOTA>LIST userid (structure OR /switch) file specification<RET>


        userid             specifies a user's project-programmer  number,
                           or  a  user  name.   You  must  include quotes
                           around   a   user   name   if   it    contains
                           non-alphabetic     characters.     Both    the
                           project-programmer number and  the  user  name
                           may include wildcards.

        structure          specifies a device  name,  which  can  be  any
                           structure  name.   If you specify a structure,
                           the structure must be accessible.  QUOTA lists
                           only the QUOTA.SYS entries for that structure.

        file specification
                           specifies  a  file  name.   The  default  file
                           specification is DSK:QUOTA.LST.


   Switch

        /MOUNT             lists ACTDAE.SYS entries.


   Examples

     1.  Use the LIST command to list QUOTA.SYS entries on structure DSKE
         for user JSMITH.

         QUOTA>LIST JSMITH DSKE<RET>
         QUOTA>
         14:45:53 -- Listing file written to DSKC:QUOTA.LST[27,5434] --

         QUOTA>




                                    3-66
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


     2.  Use the LIST command to list ACTDAE.SYS entries for user JSMITH.

         QUOTA>LIST JSMITH/MOUNT<RET>
         QUOTA> 
         14:04:24 -- Listing file written to DSKB:QUOTA.LST[10,5676] --

         QUOTA>














































                                    3-67
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


                                   MODIFY



   Function

        The MODIFY command changes entries in  QUOTA.SYS  or  ACTDAE.SYS.
        To  change  ACTDAE.SYS  entries,  specify  the /MOUNT switch.  To
        change QUOTA.SYS entries, specify the /NOMOUNT switch.


   Format

        QUOTA>MODIFY userid structure quota-in quota-out /switches<RET>


        userid             specifies a user's project-programmer  number,
                           or  a  user  name.   You  must  include quotes
                           around   a   user   name   if   it    contains
                           non-alphabetic     characters.     Both    the
                           project-programmer number and  the  user  name
                           may include wildcards.

        structure          specifies a device  name,  which  can  be  any
                           structure  name.   If you include the /NOMOUNT
                           switch, the structure must  be  cataloged  and
                           accessible.

        quota-in
        quota-out          specifies a  user's  logged-in  or  logged-out
                           quota in 128-word blocks.  You may specify the
                           quota as one of the following:

                            o  a positive decimal number

                            o  the word INFINITE to indicate the  largest
                               possible 36-bit integer.

                            o  the word SAME to indicate no change to the
                               quota


   Switches

        /CREATE            clears the NOCREATE status for  the  specified
                           entry.  The /CREATE switch applies only if you
                           specified the /MOUNT switch.

        /MOUNT             modifies an entry for the specified  structure
                           in  ACTDAE.SYS  and in the user's LOGIN search
                           list.


                                    3-68
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


        /NOMOUNT           modifies an entry in the  QUOTA.SYS  file  for
                           the  specified  structure.   If you create the
                           entry with the /NOMOUNT switch, the user  must
                           specifically  MOUNT  the structure; LOGIN does
                           not automatically try to  mount  it  when  the
                           user logs in.

        /NOCREATE          sets the NOCREATE status  bit  when  the  user
                           logs  in.   This  bit  prohibits the user from
                           creating files on  the  structure  unless  the
                           user   specifies   the   structure  name  when
                           creating a file.  The /NOCREATE switch applies
                           only if you specified the /MOUNT switch.

        /NOWRITE           write-locks the specified  structure  for  the
                           specified  user's  job  when the user logs in.
                           The  /NOWRITE  switch  applies  only  if   you
                           specified the /MOUNT switch.

        /WRITE             clears the write-lock status for the specified
                           entry.   The /WRITE switch applies only if you
                           specified the /MOUNT switch.


   Examples

        1.  Use  the  MODIFY  command  to  change  QUOTA.SYS  entries  on
            structure DSKB for user JSMITH.

            QUOTA>MODIFY JSMITH DSKB 100 100/NOMOUNT<RET>
            QUOTA>
            14:06:17                -- 1 entry modified --

            QUOTA>

        2.  Use the  MODIFY  command  to  change  ACTDAE.SYS  entries  on
            structure DSKC for user JSMITH.

            QUOTA>MODIFY JSMITH DSKC 1000 100/MOUNT<RET>
            QUOTA>
            15:04:24                -- 1 entry modified --

            QUOTA>










                                    3-69
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


                                   RETURN



   Function

        The RETURN command exits the QUOTA command subset and returns you
        to OPR command level.


   Format

        QUOTA>RETURN<RET>
        OPR>







































                                    3-70
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


                                    SHOW



   Function

        The SHOW command displays entries from QUOTA.SYS  or  ACTDAE.SYS.
        To display QUOTA.SYS entries, specify a structure.  If you do not
        specify a structure, QUOTA displays ACTDAE.SYS entries.


   Format

        QUOTA>SHOW userid structure <RET>


        userid             specifies a user's project-programmer  number,
                           or  a  user  name.   You  must  include quotes
                           around   a   user   name   if   it    contains
                           non-alphabetic     characters.     Both    the
                           project-programmer number and  the  user  name
                           may include wildcards.

        structure          specifies a device name.  The device name  can
                           be  any structure name, and the structure must
                           be accessible.   The  structure  qualifier  is
                           optional.   If  you specify a structure, QUOTA
                           displays only the QUOTA.SYS entries  for  that
                           structure.  If you do not specify a structure,
                           QUOTA displays user entries from ACTDAE.SYS.


   Examples

     1.  Use the SHOW command to display entries from QUOTA.SYS for  user
         JSMITH.

         QUOTA>SHOW JSMITH DSKB<RET>
         QUOTA>
         15:58:04               -- QUOTA listing --
                 User: JSMITH
                             10,7777        Quota In:  100   Out:  100  
         Reserved:          0                

         QUOTA>








                                    3-71
                            OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
                               QUOTA COMMANDS


     2.  Use the SHOW command to display entries from ACTDAE.SYS for user
         JSMITH.

         QUOTA>SHOW JSMITH<RET>
         QUOTA>
         14:06:06               -- QUOTA listing --
              10,7777     JSMITH
         Structure   Quota in     Quota out      Reserved       Status
         ---------   --------     ---------      ---------     ---------
            DSKC        80000         20000              0     
            DSKZ        10000          1000              0
            DSKE         1000           100              0     /NOCREATE

         QUOTA>







































                                    3-72











                                 CHAPTER 4

                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS



   The commands in this chapter change  various  system  parameters  and,
   therefore,  are  restricted  to  users  who are logged in under [1,2],
   only.  All commands, when executed,  leave  the  terminal  in  monitor
   mode.   Chapter  5  describes the operator-privileged commands for the
   OPSER system program.


































                                    4-1
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.1  ATTACH CPU




   Function

        The ATTACH CPU command adds the specified CPU and all the devices
        on that CPU to the system.

                                      NOTE

                The CONFIG ADD command performs extensive  system
                monitoring  and is preferred for adding CPUs to a
                system.


   Format

        ATTACH CPU argument<RET>


   Argument

        n                  specifies a logical or physical CPU name.


   Example

        Use the ATTACH CPU command to add CPU1 and all devices on CPU1 to
        the system.

        .ATTACH CPU1<RET>

        .



















                                    4-2
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.2  ATTACH DEVICE




   Function

        The ATTACH device command returns a previously DETACHed device to
        your  control.   You can then ASSIGN the device for your own use,
        or you can DEASSIGN the device  in  order  to  place  it  in  the
        monitor pool of available resources.

                                      NOTE

                The CONFIG ADD command performs extensive  system
                monitoring   and   is   preferred  for  returning
                previously detached devices to your control.


   Format

        ATTACH device


   Argument

        device             specifies the device being attached.


   Restrictions

        The device must have been previously DETACHed.   See  the  DETACH
        command description for more information

        Associated messages are:

             ?No such device

        The specified device does not exist at your installation.

             ?Wasn't detached

        The specified device is not detached.











                                    4-3
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   Example

        You ATTACH tape drive MTA2 that was previously DETACHed.

        .ATTACH MTA2<RET>

        .

        After you have ATTACHed a tape drive, you must then set the  tape
        drive available with the OPR command SET TAPE-DRIVE.  See the OPR
        command SET TAPE-DRIVE for more information.

        To confirm the  attachment  of  the  device,  your  OPR  terminal
        replies with:

        OPR> 12:35:12        Device MTA2 -- Attached --

        OPR>




































                                    4-4
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.3  ATTACH DISK-UNIT




   Function

        The ATTACH disk-unit command designates that the  specified  disk
        unit is now up, and you can MOUNT a structure on it.


   Format

        ATTACH disk-unit/comment


   Argument

        disk-unit          specifies that  the  disk  unit  you  want  to
                           declare is available for structure mounts (for
                           example, DPA2:  or RPA1:).


   Switch

        /comment           specifies a  line  of  text  whose  first  two
                           characters  go  into  the ERROR.SYS file along
                           with the command as configuration changes  (PM
                           for  preventive maintenance, CM for corrective
                           maintenance).


   Restrictions

        The unit must have been  DETACHed  or  declared  DOWN  at  system
        initialization.

        Associated messages are:

        ?No such device

             The disk unit specified does not exist.












                                    4-5
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   Example

        You ATTACH disk unit RPB1 for system use after it was DETACHed at
        system initialization.

        .ATTACH RPB1:<RET>

        .

        To confirm the attachment of the disk  unit,  your  OPR  terminal
        replies with:

        OPR>
         1:20:19        Device RPB1  -- Attached --

        OPR>






































                                    4-6
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.4  ATTACH JOB




   Function

        The ATTACH job command detaches the  current  job,  if  any,  and
        connects the terminal to the job specified as the argument.


   Format

        ATTACH n[PPN]


   Arguments

        n                  specifies the job number of the job  to  which
                           the terminal is to be attached.

        [PPN]              specifies the project-programmer number of the
                           originator  of the desired job.  This argument
                           can be omitted  if  it  is  the  same  as  the
                           project-programmer  number of the job to which
                           the terminal is currently attached.  When  you
                           are  logged-in  under  [1,2],  you  can always
                           attach to a  job,  provided  that  the  proper
                           [PPN] is specified.

                           Any  other  user,  even  one   with   operator
                           privileges  but  not logged-in under [1,2], is
                           interrogated for the appropriate password.


   Restrictions

        Associated messages are:

        ?Not a job

             The job number specified does not exist.

        ?Can't attach to job

             The [PPN] was not correct for the job number.








                                    4-7
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   Example

        You are requested by a user to kill his job.  You ATTACH  to  his
        job,  kill  the  job, and then ATTACH back to your job.  When you
        attach back to job 4 as  an  operator,  you  are  asked  for  the
        password  because  the  user  with  job 17 does not have operator
        privileges and was not logged-in as [1,2].

        .ATTACH 17[27,5107]<RET>
        From job 4

        .KJ<RET>
        Job 17  User BROWN,E [27,5107]
        Logged-off TTY0 at 10:04:59  on 18-Mar-88
        Runtime: 0:10:02, KCS:32, Connect time: 0:49:19
        Disk Reads:495, Writes:125, Blocks saved:7040

        .ATTACH 4[1,2]<RET>
        Password:<RET>

        .

































                                    4-8
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.5  DETACH DEVICE




   Function

        The DETACH device command assigns the specified device to job  0,
        thus making it unavailable to any user requesting the device.

                                      NOTE

                The CONFIG ADD command performs extensive  system
                monitoring  and  is  preferred for making devices
                unavailable.


   Format

        DETACH device


   Argument

        device       specifies the name of the device to be DETACHed.


   Restrictions

        DSK and TTY cannot be detached.

        Associated messages are:

        ?Device in use

             The device specified is already in use.

        ?Device not assignable

             The device specified is currently off-line or unavailable.

        ?Can't detach device

             You are attempting to detach a DSK or TTY device.

        ?No such device

             The specified device does not exist.






                                    4-9
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   Example

        You DETACH tape drive MTA2 because of hardware problems.

        .DETACH MTA2<RET>

        .

        To confirm that the tape drive was detached,  your  OPR  terminal
        replies with:

        OPR>
         3:45:19        Device MTA2  -- Detached --

        OPR>







































                                    4-10
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.6  DETACH DISK-UNIT




   Function

        The DETACH disk-unit command designates the specified  disk  unit
        as  being  DOWN.   This is similar to declaring it DOWN at system
        initialization.


   Format

        DETACH disk-unit/comment


   Argument

        disk-unit          specifies the  disk  unit  that  you  want  to
                           declare DOWN, for example, DPA0:, RPA4:.


   Switch

        /comment           specifies a  line  of  text  whose  first  two
                           characters  go  into the ERROR.SYS file, along
                           with the command,  as  Configuration  Changes.
                           (Use  PM  for  preventive  maintenance, CM for
                           corrective maintenance).


   Restrictions

        The disk unit cannot have a mounted file structure on it.  If  it
        has,  you  must  DISMOUNT the structure first and then DETACH the
        disk unit.

        Associated messages are:

        ?No such device

             The disk unit specified does not exist.











                                    4-11
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   Example

        You DETACH disk drive RPB2:  as it is inoperable due to  hardware
        problems.

        .DETACH RPB2:<RET>

        .

        To confirm the detachment of a device, your OPR terminal  replies
        with:

        OPR>
        10:57:12        Device RPB2  -- Detached --

        OPR>






































                                    4-12
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.7  INITIA




   Function

        The operator-privileged INITIA command performs the following two
        functions:

         o  It  executes  SYSJOB.INI,  the  system  startup   file   that
            reinitializes the system.

         o  It runs the TTY STOMPER program, which  disconnects  detached
            terminals that have been idle for more than two minutes.


   Format

        INITIA keyword<RET>


   Keywords

        STOMP              runs the TTY  STOMPER  program  to  disconnect
                           detached terminals.

        SYSTEM             executes SYSJOB.INI, the system startup  file.
                           SYSJOB.INI  contains the commands necessary to
                           start  up  system  programs  such  as  ACTDAE,
                           FILDAE, QUASAR, and ORION.


   Examples

        1.  Use the INITIA STOMP command to disconnect detached terminals
            that have been idle for more than two minutes.

            .INITIA STOMP<RET>
            %%TTY STOMPER detaching from terminal

            .

        2.  Use the INITIA SYSTEM command to execute the  system  startup
            file that reinitializes the system.

            .INITIA SYSTEM<RET>
            MONITOR  11:44:06  CTY  system 1026
            Connected to node CENTR(0) Line   45

            .LOGIN 1,2<RET>
            .R OPR<RET>

            OPR>
                                    4-13
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.8  SEND




   Function

        The SEND command sends messages to all terminals on  your  system
        or to all terminals at a specified (ANF-10) network node.  A bell
        sounds  at  the  destination  terminals  when  your  message   is
        received.


   Format

        SEND keyword message<RET>


   Keywords

        ALL                specifies that the  message  be  sent  to  all
                           terminals on the system.

        NODE:identifier    specifies that the  message  be  sent  to  all
                           terminals on the given node.  Your host system
                           is the default.


   Restrictions

        The destination terminal does not receive your message if:

         o  The job is not at monitor command level

         o  The job has the TTY GAG bit set

         o  The terminal is in IMAGE mode or Packet Image Mode (PIM)

        In addition, if the destination terminal is hardwired and  turned
        off,  your message is not sent.  However, it appears to have been
        sent because the software  cannot  detect  an  OFF  condition  on
        hardwired terminals.

        If you try to send a message to a terminal not at monitor command
        level, you receive a BUSY message, and your message is not sent.









                                    4-14
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   Examples

   1.   Use the SEND ALL command to notify  all  users  that  timesharing
        ends in 30 minutes.

        OPR>SEND ALL TIMESHARING ENDS IN 30 MINUTES<RET>
        OPR>
        ;;SYSTEM: - TIMESHARING ENDS IN 30 MINUTES

        OPR>

   2.   Use the SEND NODE:  command to notify users to stop queuing print
        requests  because  of  a  problem  with  the  line printer at the
        central site.

        OPR>SEND NODE:KL1026 DO NOT QUEUE ANY PRINT JOBS UNTIL NOTIFIED<RET>
        OPR>
        10:39:05         -- SEND Command Completed --

        OPR>


































                                    4-15
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.9  SET BREAK




   Function

        The SET BREAK command makes the address break facility  available
        to users.  It also prevents the address break facility from being
        available to users if you wish to make  it  available  to  system
        programmers for their exclusive use.

        The address break facility  of  the  hardware  makes  a  powerful
        debugging  facility  available  to  users of the system.  To make
        this feature available, the monitor must set  the  address  where
        the  user  is  breaking  into  the address switches and the break
        conditions into the break conditions register.

        The default setting when the  monitor  is  loaded  is  SET  BREAK
        USERS.


   Format

        SET BREAK USERS

        or

        SET BREAK NO USERS


   Arguments

        USERS              specifies that users of the  system  be  given
                           the   address   break  facility.   The  system
                           changes  the  address   switches   and   break
                           conditions  for  programs being debugged using
                           address break.

        NO USERS           specifies that the message "?Not available" be
                           printed  on  a  user's  terminal  if  the user
                           attempts to use the address break facility.












                                    4-16
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   Restriction

        The SET BREAK command is not applicable on KS10  systems  because
        the hardware is not capable of the address break facility.

        Associated messages are:

        ?Not available

             You tried to SET BREAK  NO  USERS,  but  the  address  break
             facility was already in use by one or more users.


   Example

        You give the SET BREAK USERS command to allow all  users  to  use
        the address break facility.

        .SET BREAK USERS<RET>

        .

































                                    4-17
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.10  SET CORMAX




   Function

        The SET CORMAX command changes the system parameter CORMAX.   The
        largest  size  that any job (sum of low and high segments) can be
        is CORMAX-1.


   Format

        SET CORMAX n


   Argument

        n                  specifies a decimal  number  representing  nK.
                           The  minimum  value  of  n  is 10, unless this
                           value was  changed  at  system  generation  or
                           system initialization time.


   Example

        You set the CORMAX parameter to 256K.

        .SET CORMAX 256K<RET>

        .






















                                    4-18
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.11  SET CORMIN




   Function

        The SET CORMIN  command  changes  the  system  parameter  CORMIN.
        CORMIN  is the guaranteed amount of contiguous core that a single
        unlocked job can have.  This command is used only with a  monitor
        that  has  the  capability  of  locking  jobs  in core (usually a
        real-time monitor).


   Format

        SET CORMIN n


   Argument

        n                  specifies a decimal number representing nK.


   Example

        You set the CORMIN parameter to 256K.

        .SET CORMIN 256K<RET>

        .























                                    4-19
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.12  SET CPU




   Function

        The SET CPU command specifies  which  CPU  in  a  multiprocessing
        system  will run your job.  You can specify that processing occur
        on the primary CPU, the secondary CPU, or on either CPU.


   Format

        SET CPU keyword argument<RET>


   Arguments

        U         designates a logical name

        L         designates a KL processor

        n         is a number from 0 to 5, depending  on  the  number  of
                  processors in the system.


   Keywords

        CPxn               adds the specified CPU to  the  list  of  CPUs
                           your job can use.

        NO CPxn            removes the specified CPU  from  the  list  of
                           CPUs your job can use.

        CPU ALL            adds all of the CPUs to the list of CPUs  your
                           job can use.

        ONLY CPxn          changes  the  CPU  specification  so  that  it
                           includes only the specified CPU.














                                    4-20
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   Restrictions

        The SET CPU command for a particular CPU remains in effect  until
        one of the following occurs:

         o  You issue another SET CPU command specifying a different CPU.

         o  You issue a KJOB command.

         o  Your program overrides the SET CPU  command  by  issuing  the
            SETUUO monitor call with a different specification.


        The SETUUO monitor call for a particular CPU  remains  in  effect
        until one of the following occurs:

         o  The RESET or EXIT monitor call causes the job  to  revert  to
            the CPU specified in the last SET CPU command.

         o  Another SETUUO monitor call specifies a different CPU.

        When you log in, the CPU specification is  usually  set  to  ALL.
        Each  CPU  scheduler competes for jobs with the ALL specification
        so that the job load is balanced between CPUs.  Therefore, you do
        not generally need to use the SET CPU.


   Examples

        1.  Your job can run only on CPU1.

            .SET CPU ONLY CPU1<RET>

            .


        2.  Your job can run on CPU1.

            .SET CPU CPU1<RET>

            .













                                    4-21
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.13  SET DATE




   Function

        The SET DATE command changes  the  system  date.   However,  this
        command  does  not check the validity of the date argument, as is
        done at system initialization.

        To display the current  system  date,  use  the  monitor  command
        DAYTIME.


   Format

        SET DATE mm-dd-yy


   Argument

        mm-dd-yy           specifies the month, day, and year of the date
                           argument.  The month, day, and year are each a
                           2-character  decimal   number   separated   by
                           hyphens.


   Example

        You set the date to October 15, 1988 and then  display  the  date
        with the DAY command.

        .SET DATE 10-15-88<RET>

        .DAY<RET>
        15-Oct-88 11:25:45

        .















                                    4-22
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.14  SET DAYTIME




   Function

        The SET DAYTIME command changes the system time of day.

        If you need to know the current system's time of  day,  give  the
        TOPS-10 command DAYTIME.


   Format

        SET DAYTIME nnnn


   Argument

        nnnn               specifies a decimal number from  0000  through
                           2359,   representing   a  24-hour  time.   For
                           example, 1630 as an argument is equal to  4:30
                           P.M.


   Example

        You set the time of day to 1815 to correct the system's time.

        .SET DAYTIME 1815<RET>

        .DAY<RET>
        12-Oct-88 18:15:04

        .


















                                    4-23
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.15  SET MEMORY




   Function

        The SET MEMORY command alters  the  system  memory  configuration
        dynamically  without affecting system operation.  This command is
        most useful for removing faulty memory from the system, returning
        repaired memory to the system, or reconfiguring memory on systems
        that contain multiple CPUs.   If  this  command  is  successfully
        executed, the specified memory is set on- or off-line.


   Format

        SET MEMORY ON-LINE FROM n TO m

        or

        SET MEMORY OFF-LINE FROM n TO m

        where FROM and TO are optional portions of the command line.


   Argument

        n,m                specifies the number range  (n  less  than  or
                           equal to m) of the physical addresses that are
                           to be set ON-or  OFF-LINE.   The  numbers  are
                           treated as decimal, unless preceded by a pound
                           sign (#)  implying  octal.   If  a  number  is
                           followed by the letter P or K, the range is in
                           pages (P) or blocks (K).  If neither P  nor  K
                           is specified, then K is the default.  Refer to
                           the  SET   VMMAX   command   for   a   further
                           description of K and P.
















                                    4-24
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   Restrictions

        The SET MEMORY command is operational only on systems  that  have
        the LOCK facility.

        Associated messages are:

        ?ATTEMPT TO SET MONITOR MEMORY OFF-LINE

             The range of addresses specified in a  SET  MEMORY  OFF-LINE
             command  overlaps the resident monitor.  The memory occupied
             by the resident monitor cannot be set off-line.

        ?JOB(S) TOO BIG TO CONTINUE TO RUN
             ?PROBLEM WITH JOB(S) n1[prog1],n2[prog2],...nn[progn]

             If the range of addresses specified in a SET MEMORY OFF-LINE
             command  were  taken  off-line, the jobs listed would be too
             big to continue to run.  The job numbers and  program  names
             are listed so that you can ATTACH to the jobs, log them out,
             and type the command  again  if  you  wish  the  command  to
             succeed.

        ?ATTEMPT TO SET MEMORY CONTAINING LOCKED JOBS OFF-LINE
             ?PROBLEM WITH JOB(S) n1[prog1],n2[prog2],...nn[progn]

             The range of addresses specified in a  SET  MEMORY  OFF-LINE
             command  overlaps  memory containing jobs that are locked in
             core.  The job numbers and program names are listed so  that
             you  can  ATTACH  to  the  jobs,  log them out, and type the
             command again, if you wish the command to succeed.

        ?p NXM ERRS FROM n TO m

             When a SET MEMORY ON-LINE command is  executed,  the  system
             references  the memory in the range specified in the command
             to ensure that it actually exists and  is  on-line.   Should
             any nonexistent memory be encountered during this procedure,
             the range of nonexistent locations (n,m) is reported on  the
             OPR  terminal  along  with the number of errors (p), and the
             memory in that range is treated as off-line.


   Example

        You  are  instructed  by  the  systems  programmer  to  set  512K
        off-line.

        .SET MEMORY OFF-LINE FROM 512K TO 1024K<RET>

        .



                                    4-25
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.16  SET NOMESSAGE




   Function

        The SET NOMESSAGE command suppresses messages from disk and  tape
        devices, and from DL10-based PDP-11 nodes.  Normally, when one of
        these devices goes off-line unexpectedly, a message  is  sent  to
        the  operator's console once-a-minute.  The SET NOMESSAGE command
        controls those types of messages.  One of the messages you  might
        see is:

        UNIT device-name WENT OFF-LINE
        PLEASE POWER DOWN AND TURN IT ON AGAIN


   Format

        To suppress tape controller messages, use the following format:

        SET NOMESSAGE MTx


   Argument

        x    is the name of the controller that is sending messages.


   Format

        To suppress messages from disk units, use the following format:

        SET NOMESSAGE RPxn


   Argument

        RPxn      is the disk unit, including  controller  name  (x)  and
                  unit number (n).


   Format

        To suppress messages from  a  DL10-based  PDP-11  node,  use  the
        format:

        SET NOMESSAGE PDP-11 n


   Argument

        n    is the number of the node that is off-line.
                                    4-26
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   Format

        The  SET  NOMESSAGE  command  also  controls  the  messages  from
        specific  types  of  disk errors.  RIB error messages are counted
        from  system  startup,  and  messages  from  RIB  errors  may  be
        suppressed  by  setting the RIB error message threshold RIBERN at
        system generation, or with the SET NOMESSAGE  command.   Use  the
        following  format  of  SET NOMESSAGE to set the message threshold
        from RIB errors:

        SET NOMESSAGE RIB n


   Argument

        n    is the number of RIB error messages to be suppressed  before
             beginning  to  print them on the CTY.  The default threshold
             is 0 so that all RIB error messages are printed.  Note  that
             the  total  number  of RIB error messages is reset to 0 only
             when the system is reloaded.


   Format

        SET  NOMESSAGE  suppresses  messages  reporting   non-recoverable
        (hard)  errors  from  disk  units.  You can use the SET NOMESSAGE
        command to set the threshold for hard error  messages  from  disk
        units with the following command:

        SET NOMESSAGE DSKERR n


   Argument

        n    is the number of messages to be suppressed  before  printing
             one message.  When the number of hard error messages exceeds
             n, a message is printed on the CTY.  Note that  the  counter
             of  hard  error  messages  is  reset  to 0 when a message is
             printed on the CTY.  The system default threshold  for  hard
             disk  error  messages  is  25.  Therefore, by default, every
             twenty-sixth message is printed on the CTY.

   Example

        You turn off the once-a-minute message for disk drive RPA2.

        .SET NOMESSAGE RPA2<RET>

        .





                                    4-27
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.17  SET OPR




   Function

        The SET OPR command changes the terminal designated  as  the  OPR
        terminal while the system is running.


   Format

        SET OPR TTYnn:

             or

        SET OPR CTY


   Arguments

        TTYnn:             specifies the number of  the  terminal  to  be
                           designated as the OPR terminal.

        CTY                specifies the terminal on  the  console  front
                           end.


   Example

        You set terminal 23 to be the OPR terminal.

        .SET OPR TTY23:<RET>

        .


















                                    4-28
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.18  SET SCHED




   Function

        The SET SCHED command changes the scheduled use of the system.


   Format

        SET SCHED nnnn


   Argument

        nnnn           specifies an octal number which is stored  in  the
                       right  half  of  the  STATES  word in COMMON.  The
                       following  values  for  "nnnn"  have   independent
                       meanings,    and    several   can   be   specified
                       concurrently by adding the  values  together  (see
                       example).

                       0     specifies  regular  timesharing  and   batch
                             operations.

                       1     specifies no further LOGINs  allowed  except
                             from the CTY.

                       2     specifies  no  further  LOGINs  from  remote
                             terminals, and do not answer data sets.

                       4     specifies batch operation only.

                       10    specifies stand-alone operation only.

                       200   specifies that unspooling is allowed.

                       400   specifies no operator coverage.

                       1000  specifies to inhibit automatic execution  of
                             NETLDR.
   Example

        You set the system schedule to 15.  This allows you  to  run  the
        system  as  stand-alone,  batch  operations  only,  and no LOGINs
        except from the CTY (a combination of 1, 4, and 10).

        .SET SCHED 15<RET>

        .


                                    4-29
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.19  SET TTY




   Function

        When used with a device argument, the SET TTY command declares to
        the  scanner  service special properties of a terminal line other
        than the one on which the command is typed.  The device  argument
        can be used to modify the characteristics of any terminal line on
        the system.


   Formats

        SET TTY TTYn: argument

        TTY TTYn: argument

        TTYn:              specifies the terminal whose line  number  (n)
                           is   to   be  controlled.   This  argument  is
                           optional.   If   omitted,   the   command   is
                           identical  to the SET TTY command described in
                           the TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual.


   Arguments

        ALTMODE            converts the ALTMODE codes of 175 and  176  to
                           the   standard   ASCII  ESCape  character  033
                           (initial state if, at monitor generation,  the
                           TTYALT  symbol  is assigned a non-zero value).
                           NO ALTMODE restores the individual identity of
                           the codes 175 and 176.

        BLANKS             restores multiple carriage  return/line  feeds
                           and form feeds (initial state).

        NO BLANKS          suppresses blank lines  (consecutive  carriage
                           return/line feeds after the first) and outputs
                           form feeds and vertical tabs as  two  carriage
                           return/line feeds.  This is useful for a video
                           display terminal  in  order  to  increase  the
                           amount of output that fits on the screen.

        COPY               controls output of ESCape characters  to  VT5x
        NO COPY            terminals only.

        CRLF               restores the  free  carriage  return  (initial
                           state).



                                    4-30
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


        NO CRLF            suppresses the free carriage  return  normally
                           output  at  the  end  of  a line exceeding the
                           carriage width.

        DEFER              suppresses terminal  echoing  until  the  user
                           program or monitor asks for the characters.

                           This means that programs that are doing cursor
                           control  or are handling their own rubouts can
                           get the screen  image  correct  without  doing
                           their own echoing.

        NO DEFER           turns off the SET TTY TTYn: DEFER command.

        DISPLAY            notifies the system that the terminal you  are
                           using is a display terminal.

        NO DISPLAY         turns off the SET TTY TTYn: DISPLAY command.

        ECHO               restores the normal echoing of each  character
                           entered.   Most terminals for TOPS-10 are used
                           in full  duplex  mode  which  means  that  the
                           terminal  does not print each character as the
                           user types it.   Instead  the  monitor  echoes
                           each  character typed so that the character is
                           printed.  If a terminal prints C  when  it  is
                           typed but does not print any of the noncontrol
                           characters  typed  by  the  user,  then   this
                           command   can  be  used  to  establish  normal
                           echoing.  (Each  installation  determines  the
                           initial setting when generating its monitor at
                           system generation time.)

        NO ECHO            suppresses   monitor    echoing    of    input
                           characters.   Local  copy  terminals (that is,
                           terminals  which  automatically   print   each
                           character as the user types it) do not require
                           monitor  echoing  because  the  echoing  would
                           cause  each  character  typed  to  be  printed
                           twice.  This command is used  to  stop  double
                           printing  of  each  character  on a local copy
                           terminal.  (The initial setting is  determined
                           by  each  installation  when  constructing its
                           monitor at system generation time.)

        FILL n             assigns filler class n to this terminal.  Many
                           different  types of terminals are supported by
                           the TOPS-10 operating system.  Some  terminals
                           require  one  or  more filler characters to be
                           sent following certain control characters such
                           as  line  feed  (LF)  and horizontal tab (HT).
                           Table 4-1 illustrates the  number  of  fillers


                                    4-31
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


                           sent for each character and filler class.  The
                           filler characters are CR (215 octal  for  even
                           parity)  for  carriage  return characters (CR,
                           215 octal) and DEL (RUBOUT, 377 octal) for all
                           other  character.  No fillers are supplied for
                           image mode output.  (The  initial  setting  is
                           determined    by    each   installation   when
                           constructing its monitor at system  generation
                           time.

        NO FILL            is equivalent to TTY  FILL  0.   (The  initial
                           setting  is  determined  by  each installation
                           when  constructing  its  monitor   at   system
                           generation   time.)  Fillers  for  output  and
                           echoing are determined from Table 4-1.



   Table 4-1:  Number of Fillers by Character and Filler Class

     __________________________________________________________________

                           
       Character     Octal      Number of Fillers for Filler Class
       Name            
                                    0        1        2         3
     __________________________________________________________________

       BS                010        0        2        6         6
       HT                011        0     1 OR 2      0     1 OR 2 (1)        
       LF                012        0        2        6         6
       VT                013        0        2        6         6
       FF                014        0       12       21        21
     CR on output        015        0        1        3         3  (2)
     FREE CR (3)                    0        2        4         4
     CRLF on output      015-012    0        3        9         9  (4)
       XON               021        1        1        1         1
       TAPE              022        1        1        1         1
       XOFF              023        1        1        1         1
       NTAP              024        1        1        1         1
     __________________________________________________________________

          (1) 1 if 0-3 spaces to tab stop; 2 if 4-7 spaces to tab stop.
          (2) Output only; no fillers on input.
          (3) Refer to the SET TTY TTYn CRLF command.
          (4) Sum of the fillers output for a CR and LF.
     __________________________________________________________________







                                    4-32
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


          Argument                          Function

        FORM               specifies that the terminal has hardware  form
                           (page) and VT (vertical tab) characters.  (The
                           initial  setting   is   determined   by   each
                           installation  when constructing its monitor at
                           system generation time.)

        NO FORM            specifies that the monitor  sends  eight  line
                           feeds for a form and four line feeds for a VT.
                           (The initial setting  is  determined  by  each
                           installation  when constructing its monitor at
                           system generation time.)

        GAG                specifies that  messages  transmitted  by  the
                           SEND   command  cannot  be  received  at  this
                           terminal unless the job is  at  monitor  level
                           (initial state).

        NO GAG             specifies that  messages  transmitted  by  the
                           SEND  command can be received at this terminal
                           even though the job is not at monitor level.

        HOLD               controls use of scroll key  on  VT5x terminals
        NO HOLD            only.

        IGNORE             allows you to disable a line.  The  line  will
                           be ignored by the PDP-11.

        NO IGNORE          turns off the SET TTY TTYn: IGNORE command.

        LC                 suppresses  the   translation   of   lowercase
                           character input to uppercase.

        NO LC              causes  the  monitor  to  translate  lowercase
                           characters  to uppercase as they are received.
                           Frequently,  it  is  convenient  to   have   a
                           terminal  with both uppercase and lowercase to
                           simulate the behavior of  one  with  uppercase
                           only.   This  command  causes  the  monitor to
                           perform this simulation.  The echo  sent  back
                           by  the monitor always matches the case of the
                           characters after translation.  By  looking  at
                           the  printout,  the  user  can  determine what
                           translation  was  performed  by  the   monitor
                           (initial state).








                                    4-33
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


        PAGE n             gives the  user  the  ability  to  temporarily
                           suspend system typeout without losing it.  The
                           XOFF key <CTRL/S> suspends  the  typeout,  and
                           the  XON  key  <CTRL/Q>  restores  it  for "n"
                           lines.  The XOFF and XON are  not  echoed  and
                           are  not  sent  to  the  user's program.  This
                           command is useful for video display  terminals
                           so  that  the  user  can  read  a page of text
                           before it disappears from  the  screen.   Note
                           that  it  preempts  the  user  of <CTRL/S> and
                           <CTRL/Q> for reading paper tape.  (See SET TTY
                           TAPE.)

        NO PAGE            disables the typeout control  ability  of  the
                           XOFF and XON keys.  The current interpretation
                           of these keys depends on the last SET TTY TAPE
                           command (initial state).

        RTCOMP             disables the <CTRL/R>  (reprint  current  line
                           after  making corrections) and <CTRL/T> (print
                           job  status  without  interrupting  execution)
                           features  allowing <CTRL/R> and <CTRL/T> to be
                           passed to the user program.

        NO RTCOMP          turns  on  the  <CTRL/R>  and   the   <CTRL/T>
                           feature.

        SLAVE              specifies that the terminal becomes slaved, so
                           that no commands can be typed on the terminal.
                           The terminal can then be ASSIGNed  by  another
                           user.   You  can  slave any terminal including
                           your own.  (The initial setting is  determined
                           by  each  installation  when  constructing its
                           monitor at system generation time.)

        NO SLAVE           specifies that the terminal  becomes  unslaved
                           so  that  commands  can  now  be  typed on the
                           console.  If OPR  is  slaved,  you  can  LOGIN
                           under  [1,2]  on  another  terminal to unslave
                           OPR.  (The initial setting  is  determined  by
                           each   installation   when   constructing  its
                           monitor at system generation time.

        SPEED n            sets the speed at which the system  sends  and
                           receives characters to n baud.  (The user must
                           adjust the speed at the terminal by setting  a
                           switch.)

        SPEED m,n          sets the terminal transmitting speed to m baud
                           and  the  receiving speed to n baud.  (This is
                           especially useful for display  terminals  that
                           allow  transmitting and receiving at different
                           speeds.)

                                    4-34
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


        TAB                specifies that the hardware tab stops are  set
                           every  eight columns.  (The initial setting is
                           determined   by   each    installation    when
                           constructing  its monitor at system generation
                           time.)

        NO TAB             specifies  that  the  monitor  simulates   tab
                           output  from programs by sending the necessary
                           number of space characters.

        TAPE               specifies that the XON key <CTRL/Q> causes the
                           terminal  to  read  paper  tape.  The XOFF key
                           <CTRL/S> causes the terminal to  stop  reading
                           paper  tape.   Rubouts  are  ignored  and free
                           CRLFs are not sent.

        NO TAPE            specifies that the XON key  <CTRL/Q>  and  the
                           XOFF  key  <CTRL/S> have no special paper tape
                           function.  They  can,  however,  have  a  page
                           function.  (See SET TTY TTYn: PAGE command.)

        TYPE nnnn          sets the  terminal  hardware  characteristics.
                           nnnn   is  the  terminal  type.   The  monitor
                           command "HELP *" shows a list of the  terminal
                           types supported on your system.

        UC                 is equivalent to SET TTY TTYn: NO LC.

        NO UC              is equivalent to SET TTY TTYn: LC.

        WIDTH n            specifies that the carriage width  (the  point
                           at  which  a free carriage return is inserted)
                           is set to n.  The range of n is  17  (two  tab
                           stops)  to  200 decimal.  The initial state is
                           72.


   Restriction

        The SET TTY command requires LOGIN if you are unslaving OPR.


   Example

        You set a user's terminal for lowercase, a width  of  80,  and  a
        speed of 150 input baud rate and 2400 output baud rate.

        .SET TTY TTY23: LC WIDTH 80 SPEED 150 2400<RET>

        .




                                    4-35
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.20  SET VMMAX




   Function

        The SET VMMAX command specifies the  maximum  amount  of  virtual
        memory available to all users of the system.

        After the execution of this command, the new value  of  VMMAX  is
        one of the following:

        1.  The total amount of allocated swapping space, if n is greater
            than the total amount allocated.

        2.  The amount currently in use by all virtual memory users, if n
            is less than the total amount in use.

        3.  The value of n, if neither of the above is true.


   Format

        SET VMMAX nP

        or

        SET VMMAX nK


   Arguments

        nK                 specifies  the  number  of  words  of  virtual
                           memory.   1K  is  equal to 1024 words.  If you
                           omit the K or the P, K is the default.

        nP                 specifies  the  number  of  pages  of  virtual
                           memory.  1P is equal to 512 words.


   Example

        You set the virtual memory to five thousand pages (equivalent  to
        2560 words).

        .SET VMMAX 5000P<RET>

        .





                                    4-36
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   4.21  XCHNGE




   Function

        The XCHNGE command enables a system  with  a  bad  disk  unit  to
        continue   without   unnecessary  user  disruption  by  logically
        exchanging disk drives and then having  you  physically  exchange
        disk packs.


   Format

        XCHNGE diskunit1: diskunit2:


   Argument

        diskunitn:         specifies the disk unit you want  to  exchange
                           with  another  disk  unit.   For  example, you
                           exchange RPA0 for RPA2.

                                              CAUTION

                               Careless  use  of  this  command   can
                               destroy   information  on  disk  packs
                               because the monitor assumes  that  the
                               physical disk packs have been switched
                               by you.  For that  reason,  both  disk
                               drives  should  be powered down before
                               issuing the command.   One  precaution
                               the  monitor  does  take whenever this
                               command is issued is to  automatically
                               place  both  disk drives off-line.  It
                               is up to you to then switch  the  disk
                               packs  before  placing  the units back
                               on-line.















                                    4-37
                TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS


   Restrictions

        Diskunit1 and diskunit2 must be on the same controller, and  must
        be of the same type.

        Associated messages are:

        ?XCHNGE DISKUNIT1?

             The disk unit specified does not exist.

        ?XCHNGE DISKUNIT1 DISKUNIT2?

             One of the following conditions exists:

              o  The two disk drives are on different controllers

              o  The second disk unit specified does not exist

              o  The disk unit contains non-removable media



   Example

        You exchange the disk pack on RPA1:  with the disk pack on RPA3:.

        .XCHNGE RPA1:  RPA3:  /CM<RET>

        .
























                                    4-38











                                 CHAPTER 5

                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE



   5.1  INTRODUCTION TO OPSER

   The TOPS-10 operating system considers  all  jobs  to  be  timesharing
   jobs;  thus,  each  job must be associated with a timesharing terminal
   (TTY).  In some situations, however, it is inconvenient to  require  a
   timesharing  terminal  to  be  associated with every job on the system
   (for example, where many jobs are needed for  a  single  application).
   OPSER  provides  a  method  whereby a single job running from a single
   timesharing terminal can control many subjobs simultaneously.   To  do
   this,  OPSER  implements a "device" called a pseudo-terminal (PTY).  A
   PTY is a software simulation of a terminal.  The controlling  program,
   OPSER,  can  send  information to a PTY and receive information from a
   PTY.

   OPSER starts running subjobs by means of pseudo-terminals and controls
   each  subjob  by  sending  appropriate  information  (for example, the
   commands or data you give it) over the  PTY  controlling  the  subjob.
   You  can  run as many subjobs as there are PTYs on the system, up to a
   maximum of 14.  Through OPSER you  can  control  many  jobs  from  one
   terminal.



   5.2  STARTING OPSER

   OPSER normally starts when the system is brought  up.   At  this  time
   OPSER  reads  and processes the file SYS:OPR.ATO (an automatic startup
   file).  This file  contains  the  OPSER  commands  that  initiate  the
   running of system software programs such as input and output spoolers,
   components  of  the  batch  processing  system,  and  device-servicing
   programs (such as MOUNT).

   If OPSER has not been started  automatically,  you  can  start  it  by
   typing the following command:

        .R OPSER<RET>
        *


                                    5-1
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


   When OPSER displays an asterisk (*), type the following command:

        *:AUTO SYS:OPR.ATO<RET>

   When OPSER finishes  processing  the  OPR.ATO  file,  it  displays  an
   asterisk or an exclamation point (!).  When OPSER displays an asterisk
   or exclamation  point,  you  can  enter  any  of  the  OPSER  commands
   described in this chapter.




   5.2.1  Commands to the OPSER Program

   You must precede each OPSER command by a colon (:), and you must  type
   enough  letters  to  make  the  command  unique.  The :WHAT command is
   unique at one character.  Therefore, :W is interpreted as :WHAT.

   OPSER prompts you with either an asterisk (*) or an exclamation  point
   (!)  when it is ready to receive your commands.  An asterisk indicates
   that no subjobs are active or a subjob is waiting for some  action  on
   your  part.   An  exclamation  point means that at least one subjob is
   currently active but you can still communicate with other subjobs.

   There are four methods of  specifying  subjobs  in  an  OPSER  command
   string.

        1.  Type the subjob number (or numbers).

        2.  Type the mnemonic you assigned to the job  with  the  :DEFINE
            command.

        3.  Use the word ALL, which indicates to OPSER that you want  the
            command to apply to all active subjobs.

        4.  Leave the subjob specification out entirely,  in  which  case
            OPSER  assumes  you  intend  the command to apply to the last
            subjob you referenced.

   If the previous command referenced a list of  subjobs,  the  last  one
   referenced is the default for any subsequent command.  For example, in
   the following sequence:

        :WHAT A, B, C<RET>
        :STOP<RET>

   C is the subjob implicitly referred to in the :STOP command.







                                    5-2
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


   If A, B, and C  were  the  only  active  subjobs,  and  the  following
   commands were typed:

        :WHAT ALL<RET>
        :STOP<RET>

   C would again be the implicit argument of the :STOP command.



   5.2.2  Commands Directly to Subjobs

   When you give commands to a subjob, you must indicate for which subjob
   (or  subjobs)  the  command  is  intended.   Do  this by preceding the
   command with the subjob number (or the name assigned by means  of  the
   :DEFINE  command)  and  a  hyphen.   If  you do not specify the subjob
   number or name in the  command,  the  command  defaults  to  the  last
   specified  subjob.  For example, to stop subjob 3 (defined as LP1) you
   could type:

        !3-STOP        ;using the subjob number

          or

        !LP1-STOP      ;using the subjob name

          or

        !:STOP         ;if LP1 was the last specified subjob

   There is a method available in OPSER for sending the same  command  to
   all  the subjobs at once.  For example, if you want to know the status
   within each of the subjobs, instead of typing WHAT to each subjob, you
   can do it with a single command.  You simply type:

        :WHAT ALL<RET>

   and OPSER sends the WHAT command to each subjob.

   Whenever you enter a command to a subjob,  OPSER  will  timestamp  and
   identify the entry as follows:

        !hh:mm (xxx)

   where xxx is the subjob number or name used in the  preceding  command
   line.   For  example,  the  following  is  representative  of your CTY
   output.

        !S-R SPRINT    (operator command)
        !13:20(S)      (OPSER timestamp)
               /       (SPRINT prompt)



                                    5-3
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


   Sample CTY output included in this  chapter  usually  omits  timestamp
   entries  in  the  interest  of  conserving space and reducing clutter.
   Actual OPSER output will be timestamped.

   Consider the following sequence of commands:

        STEP                     EXPLANATION

        .R OPSER<RET>            Run the OPSER program.

        *:SLOG 2,167<RET>        Log in a subjob under [2,167].

        !:DEF FIL=<RET>          Associate subjob n with the name FIL.

        !:WHAT FIL<RET>          Print out the status of FIL.

        !FIL-R PIP<RET>          Tell FIL to run PIP.

        *FILC.EXT=FILA.EXT,FILB.EXT<RET>
                                 Use PIP to create one file from data  in
                                 two other files.

        !:STOP FIL<RET>          Return FIL to monitor mode.

        !:KJOB FIL<RET>          Log out FIL.

        !:EXIT<RET>              Cause OPSER to exit to the monitor.

   The example above shows how to log in a subjob, give it a name, run  a
   system  program,  and log out the subjob.  Once the concept of subjobs
   is understood, it is  simple  to  give  system  commands  and  program
   commands  to  a  subjob.   The  entire  range  of  monitor and program
   commands can be sent to a subjob as long as the command is preceded by
   a  subjob  name  or  number  followed  by a hyphen.  This becomes very
   important in explaining the  service  programs  which  are  run  under
   OPSER.

   To <CTRL/C> a subjob, a <CTRL/A> must be used, since a <CTRL/C>  under
   OPSER  is  equivalent  to  :EXIT.  For example, to <CTRL/C> subjob FIL
   which is running PIP, the command is:

        !FIL-A<RET>
              !
           <CTRL/A>

   Whatever was being done under PIP would be allowed to finish, and  the
   subjob FIL would be put at monitor level.







                                    5-4
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


   A useful feature of OPSER is the ability to  automatically  execute  a
   predefined set of commands contained in a disk file.  This is known as
   the AUTO feature  of  OPSER.   For  example,  consider  the  following
   sequence of commands:

        :SLOG 2,167<RET>
        :DEF FIL=<RET>
        :WHAT FIL<RET>
        FIL-R PIP<RET>
        FILC.EXT=FILA.EXT,FILB.EXT<RET>
        :STOP FIL<RET>
        :KJOB FIL<RET>

   If the above commands were placed in a file named FIL.ATO,  you  could
   accomplish  exactly  what  was  done  manually in the example above by
   entering the single OPSER command:

        :AUTO FIL<RET>

   Commands included in a file named OPR.ATO are  automatically  executed
   whenever the system is loaded.

   OPSER is used to control a large part  of  system  operation.   It  is
   important that you become proficient in its use.



   5.3  OPSER COMMANDS

   Some OPSER commands are  available  to  all  users  while  others  are
   available only to those with OPERATOR privileges.




   5.3.1  OPSER Commands for the Operator

   OPSER commands that are available to you at the operator's console are
   the following:

        :JCONT n            Continues job n that was waiting for operator
                            action.












                                    5-5
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


        :KSYS hh:mm         Stops timesharing at the  time  specified  by
        :KSYS +hh:mm        hh:mm.  This must  be at  least  five minutes
        :KSYS               later than the current time.   If  +hh:mm  is
                            used,  it  means  the  number of hours and/or
                            minutes from the current time and must be  at
                            least  five  minutes.   All  users logging in
                            receive a message stating the time  at  which
                            timesharing   will   end.    Logged-in  users
                            receive  similar  messages  when  the   :KSYS
                            command is given, one hour before timesharing
                            ends, then at 30, 15, 8, 4, 2, and 1  minutes
                            before timesharing is scheduled to stop.  The
                            messages are of the form:   TIMESHARING  ENDS
                            IN  n  MIN.  :KSYS works only for a [1,2] job
                            running at the OPR terminal.

                            Note that :KSYS without  an  argument  undoes
                            the effect of :KSYS hh:mm or :KSYS +hh:mm.

                            The  colon  in  the  time  specification   is
                            optional; both hh:mm and hhmm are valid.

        :RESTRICT dev:,...  restricts  the  specified  devices   to   the
                            operator's  use.  The operator can assign the
                            devices  to  a  user,  but  the  user  cannot
                            reassign them to anyone but the operator.

        :SET BATMAX n       sets the maximum number  (n)  of  batch  jobs
                            that  can run simultaneously.  The range of n
                            is 0 through 14 inclusive.

        :SET BATMIN n       sets the minimum number  (n)  of  batch  jobs
                            that  can run simultaneously.  The range of n
                            is 0 through 14 inclusive.

        :SET LOGMAX n       sets the maximum number (n) of jobs that  can
                            run on the system.

        :SET RUN CPUn       allows  the   operator  of  a  multiprocessor
        :SET RUN NO CPUn    system  to turn  processors on- and off-line.
        :SET RUN ONLY CPUn  The  n  is  the  CPU  number  (0 or 1).  The
        :SET RUN ALL        command :SET RUN adds the named processor  to
                            the  system  pool  of running CPUs.  The :SET
                            RUN NO command removes the named CPU from the
                            system  pool.   The  :SET  RUN  ONLY  command
                            allows only the named CPU to run.   The  :SET
                            RUN  ALL  command puts all the CPUs available
                            into the system pool.






                                    5-6
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


        :SET argument       simulates the monitor command .SET  argument,
                            where  argument  is  one  of  the  following:
                            BREAK, CORMAX, CORMIN, DATE, DAYTIME, MEMORY,
                            NOMESSAGE, OPR, SCHED, TTY, or VMMAX.

        :UNRESTRICT dev:    Returns to the  free  user  resource  pool  a
                            device that has been restricted.  :UNRESTRICT
                            is the complement of :RESTRICT.




   5.3.2  OPSER Commands for All Users

   The following OPSER commands are available to all users of the system:

        :AUTO filespec      processes  the  commands  contained  in   the
                            specified file immediately.

        :AUTO /hhmm filespec

                            processes the  specified  file  at  the  next
                            occurrence of hhmm today.  If it is past hhmm
                            today,   the   file   will    be    processed
                            immediately.

        :AUTO /<hhmm filespec

                            processes the  specified  file  at  the  next
                            occurrence of hhmm today.  If it is past hhmm
                            today, the file will not be processed.

        :AUTO />hhmm filespec

                            processes the  specified  file  at  the  next
                            occurrence  of  hhmm.  If the current time is
                            past hhmm, the file will be processed at hhmm
                            tomorrow.
















                                    5-7
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


        :AUTO /+ hhmm filespec

                            processes the file hh hours  and  mm  minutes
                            later.

                                                NOTE

                            In the above commands, "filespec" stands  for
                            file  specification and consists of a device,
                            file name, file extension,  and  a  directory
                            name in the form:

                                 dev:file.ext[PPN]

                            where:

                                 dev:   is any valid input  device  name.
                                        The default is DSK:.

                                 file   stands for any 1- to  6-character
                                        file  name.  There is no default.
                                        You must supply a file name.

                                 .ext   is any  1-  to  3-character  file
                                        name  extension.   The default is
                                        .ATO.

                                 [PPN]  is  the   directory   area   that
                                        contains  the  file.  The default
                                        is the directory indicated by the
                                        project-programmer  number  [PPN]
                                        you used to log in.

        :CLOSE              closes the disk log file  without  opening  a
                            new one.  (The disk log file is a transaction
                            file where OPSER logs its activities.)

        :CONTINUE           continues  processing  the  AUTO  file  after
                            being interrupted by a <CTRL/C>.  This allows
                            the operator to  gain  control  of  a  subjob
                            during AUTO file processing.

        :CURRENT            types the name of the current subjob  if  one
                            has been defined; if a current subjob has not
                            been defined, it  types  the  number  of  the
                            current subjob (the last one typed in).








                                    5-8
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


        :DAYTIME            types the current date and time.

        :DEFINE xxx=n       gives subjob n the name  xxx,  which  may  be
                            from one to six characters long.  In general,
                            short  names  are  recommended.   The  subjob
                            number   may  be  omitted  from  the  command
                            string, in which case OPSER assumes the  last
                            subjob you referenced.

                                            RESTRICTIONS

                            The first  character  of  the  name  must  be
                            alphabetic  and  the second through sixth (if
                            any) must be alphanumeric.  The  subjob  name
                            "B"  is  reserved  as the mnemonic for BATCON
                            and should  not  be  assigned  to  any  other
                            subjob.

        :DEVICE dev:log:n   causes OPSER to exit to  the  monitor,  where
                            you  can  ASSIGN  the device (dev:) on subjob
                            (n) and also associate a logical  name  (log)
                            with   that  device.   The  logical  name  is
                            optional, but if you omit it, you  must  tell
                            OPSER.   You  do  this  by typing a colon (:)
                            where the logical name would  have  appeared,
                            for example, :DEVICE MTB: :4.  If you issue a
                            .REENTER command before returning  to  OPSER,
                            you will abort the .ASSIGN command.  When you
                            are ready to return to OPSER, type :CONT.

        :ERROR n,m,...      silences all  output  except  error  messages
                            from  subjobs  n,m,  and  so on.  The :REVIVE
                            command will resume reporting  all  messages.
                            When  OPSER  is  first started, :REVIVE is in
                            effect.

        :EXIT or <CTRL/C>   exits  to  the  monitor  if  no  subjobs  are
                            active.

        :FREE               types the number of the first unused subjob.

        :HELP               types a text briefly explaining the  commands
                            and their formats.

        :KILL n,m,...       see :KJOB.

        :KJOB n,m,...       logs out the specified subjobs n, m,  and  so
                            on,  saving  all  their  files.  Also, the /Z
                            switch is passed to the KJOB program in order
                            to   suppress  the  normal  queuing  done  at
                            log-out time.



                                    5-9
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


        :LOGIN PPN          logs in a new subjob under project programmer
                            number  PPN.   If  PPN  is not given, OPSER's
                            project-programmer number is assumed.

        :MONITOR            exits to the  monitor  even  if  subjobs  are
                            active.

        :MSGLVL n           determines whether  or  not  the  job  status
                            (JOBSTS)  bits  appear in the response to the
                            :WHAT command.  If n equals 0, the job status
                            bits  are included in the :WHAT output.  If n
                            equals 1 (default), the :WHAT output does not
                            include these bits.  The actual letters typed
                            out represent the following:

                                 L for logged in
                                 M for monitor mode
                                 I for input wait
                                 O for output wait
                                 A for JACCT

        :QUEUE line         initiates the first free subjob and sends the
                            line as a QUEUE command to the monitor.

        :RESOURCES          lists the available system resources.

        :REVIVE n,m,...     clears   the   effects   of   the   :SILENCE,
                            :TSILENCE, and :ERROR commands for subjobs n,
                            m, and so on, and causes  normal  echoing  or
                            output   from  them.   When  OPSER  is  first
                            started, the :REVIVE command is in effect.

        :SCHED              types out the schedule bits  as  set  by  the
                            operator.  The bits are:

                            000000 Regular timesharing
                            000001 No further LOGINs except from CTY
                            000002 No   further   LOGINs   from    remote
                                   terminals,  and  no  answering of data
                                   sets
                            000004 Batch jobs only
                            000200 Unspooled jobs allowed
                            000400 No operator coverage

        :SEND line          simulates the monitor SEND command.  Refer to
                            the  TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual
                            for more information.

        :SILENCE n,m,...    suppresses all terminal and  transaction  log
                            output from subjobs n, m, and so on.




                                    5-10
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


        :SLOGIN p,pn        same  as  :LOGIN,  but  also   silences   all
                            terminal output until the job is logged in.

        :STOP n,m,...       puts the subjobs n, m, and so on into monitor
                            mode.

        :SYSTAT xxx         runs SYSTAT with the optional  arguments  xxx
                            under  the first free subjob.  For arguments,
                            see the  TOPS-10  Operating  System  Commands
                            Manual.

        :TIME n             types out the total running time  for  job  n
                            since  the  last :TIME n command, followed by
                            the integrated product of  running  time  and
                            core size.

        :TLOG dev:file.ext[PPN]

                            closes the current OPSER transaction log,  if
                            any, and opens a new log file.  If no file is
                            designated, the default is DSK:OPSER.LOG.

        :TSILENCE n,m,...   suppresses all terminal output  from  subjobs
                            n,  m, and so on, but continues output to the
                            transaction log.

        :TTYTST             types out a test pattern  consisting  of  the
                            ASCII  characters  corresponding  to octal 40
                            through 174 inclusive.

        :WHAT n,m,...       types the status of the specified  subjob(s).
                            This  typeout  includes  a SYSTAT of each job
                            with the current time, the time of  the  last
                            input  and  the last output, a linear listing
                            of the JOBSTS bits (if MSGLVL is set  to  0),
                            and the time of the next timed AUTO file.

        :WHERE devn:        types  the  physical  location   node/station
                            number of the device dev in subjob n.















                                    5-11
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


   5.4  OPSER OPERATOR MESSAGES

   The  following  messages  from  OPSER  can  appear  on  your  operator
   terminal.


   ?OPRATE Auto file read error

        OPSER encountered a read error while it was trying to process the
        auto file.


   ?OPRANI Device cannot do input

        Input cannot be performed on the specified device, either because
        it is not a valid device name, or because it is a device that can
        only do output.


   ?OPRBFS Bad file spec

        There is a syntax error in the file specification.


   ?OPRBTS Bad time specified

        There is a syntax error in the time specification.   See  Section
        5.2.1 for information about the format of the OPSER commands.


   ?OPRCKJ Cannot be KJOB'ed

        OPSER is unable to log the job out.  One cause of this  condition
        is a job being over quota.


   ?OPRCMM Cannot be put in monitor mode

        The operator  attempted  to  return  to  the  monitor  (:EXIT  or
        <CTRL/C>  but was unable to do so even after several tries.  This
        condition indicates a system or a program problem.


   ?OPRCNU Command not unique

        The operator has entered an abbreviation that does not specify  a
        unique command.







                                    5-12
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


   ?OPRCUA Cannot use all

        The operator typed a command with "ALL" as the argument.  Certain
        commands  do  not  accept  "ALL"  as  an  argument  (for example,
        :DEFINE).  Refer to Section 5.2.1 for information about the OPSER
        operator commands.


   ?OPRDCO Device cannot do output

        The device specified in  the  :TLOG  command  is  not  an  output
        device.


   %OPRDNR DAEMON not running

        The DAEMON program has not been initialized.


   ?OPRDUE DAEMON UUO error

        An error occurred when OPSER  called  DAEMON  to  do  accounting.
        Consult the system administrator.


   %OPRFMM :KSYS has a minimum of 5 min.

        The operator specified an argument that was  too  small  for  the
        :KSYS  command.   The  value  of the "+hh:mm" form of the command
        must be +00:05 or greater.   The  value  of  hh:mm  form  of  the
        command  must  be  at least five minutes later than current time.
        See Section 5.3.1 for details about the format of this command.


   ?OPRJNA No job number assigned

        This message generally occurs in response to the  :WHAT  command.
        It  happens  in  cases  where the monitor does not know about the
        subjob specified in the command.


   ?OPRJRO Job(s) running on n,m,...
        Type ":Kill all" to kill the subjobs

        The operator tried to :EXIT or <CTRL/C> from OPSER  from  subjobs
        n,m, and so on were active.  The subjos must be killed first.


   ?OPRLEF Enter failure code on log file

        An  enter  failure  occurred  when  OPSER  tried  to   open   the
        transaction log file (:TLOG).


                                    5-13
                           OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE


   ?OPRNAS No active subjobs

        The operator issued a command to a subjob  but  no  subjobs  were
        running.


   ?OPRNFP No free PTY's

        There are no more pseudo-terminals (PTYs) available  under  which
        to run subjobs.


   ?OPRNFS No free subjobs

        This message occurs in response to either the :FREE command or  a
        command  that  uses  a  free subjob (such as :QUEUE).  It happens
        when there are no free subjobs available.


   ?OPRNSM No such mnemonic

        The name specified in the command is not associated with  any  of
        the  subjobs.  This is either because it was typed incorrectly or
        because the name had not previously been associated with a subjob
        by means of the :DEFINE command.


   [OPRPAF Processing auto command file]

        OPSER is currently processing the auto file.


   ?OPRSJW  Is stuck with JACCT on

        The operator tried to return to the monitor (:EXIT  or  <CTRL/C>)
        but  was  unable  to  do  so,  even  after  several  tries.  This
        condition indicates a system or program problem.


   ?OPRSNA Subjob n is not active

        A command was given to subjob n and that subjob is not active.


   %OPRSPR superseding previous :AUTO request

        The operator issued another  :AUTO  command.   This  new  command
        supersedes the one previously issued.






                                    5-14











                                 APPENDIX A

                             OPR ERROR MESSAGES



   This appendix lists error messages you may encounter while using  OPR,
   as well as the reason for the error and recovery procedures.


   ERROR:         ?  Ambiguous

   Reason:        You issued an OPR command, but  did  not  complete  it.
                  For  example,  you  may  have  left  out  the necessary
                  keyword or switch that would make the  command  execute
                  properly.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the necessary keyword or switch.


   ERROR:         ?  Ambiguous switch or keyword

   Reason:        Same as above.

   Recovery:      Same as above.


   ERROR:         ?  CONFIRMATION Required

   Reason:        You gave a command but the command syntax is not valid.

   Recovery:      Check the command to  see  if  you  have  provided  all
                  necessary  keywords, arguments, and/or switches.  Check
                  that the hardware is available or that  the  device  is
                  ready  for  use.   Then  give  the command again.  (See
                  Chapter 2 for the commands correct keywords,  arguments
                  and switches.)







                                    A-1
                             OPR ERROR MESSAGES


   ERROR:         ?  Device Name name:  Does Not Exist

   Reason:        You specified a device name (name:) in an  OPR  command
                  that  is  currently not recognized by the system.  Such
                  devices are tape drives or disk drives.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype  the  command  and  specify  a
                  device  name  that  the  system acknowledges.  Give the
                  SHOW STATUS command to  find  those  devices  that  the
                  system recognizes.


   ERROR:         ?  Does not match switch or keyword

   Reason:        You specified a switch or keyword for  an  OPR  command
                  that can not take the switch or keyword specified.

   Recovery:      Type the command again and then specify a valid  switch
                  or keyword for that command.


   ERROR:         ?  Filename was not specified

   Reason:        You  specified  an  OPR  command  that  takes  a   file
                  specification  as  a  keyword or value to a switch, but
                  did not specify the file name.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the file name.


   ERROR:         ?  File not found

   Reason:        You  specified  an  OPR  command  that  takes  a   file
                  specification  as  a  keyword or value to a switch, but
                  the file was not found.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the correct file specification.


   ERROR:         ?  First nonspace character is not a digit

   Reason:        You specified a keyword or switch value  that  must  be
                  numeric,  but the first character is alphabetic or is a
                  special character.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
                  numeric  keyword  or  switch  value  with  any  numeric
                  characters.




                                    A-2
                             OPR ERROR MESSAGES


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid device terminator

   Reason:        You specified a device with an illegal character in its
                  name or you did not include the colon (:) at the end of
                  the device name.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the device name with the correct characters and include
                  the colon (:).


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid HELP command specified

   Reason:        You specified an invalid OPR command as  a  keyword  to
                  the HELP command.

   Recovery:      Give the HELP HELP command  to  get  a  list  of  valid
                  keywords (OPR commands) to the HELP command.


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid guide word

   Reason:        You specified a guide word that does not pertain to the
                  OPR  command  that  you  specified,  you misspelled the
                  guide word, or you  used  recognition  and  then  typed
                  <CTRL/H> before you pressed <RET>.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command.  If you must have
                  guide  words with the OPR command, use recognition with
                  the ESCape key.


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid node name

   Reason:        You specified a node name or number to the /NODE switch
                  for  a  node that has not been enabled, does not exist,
                  or has been misspelled.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the  correct  node  name or number to the /NODE switch.
                  You might have to ENABLE the node  before  you  reissue
                  the command.












                                    A-3
                             OPR ERROR MESSAGES


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid Node Terminator

   Reason:        You specified a node name or number in an OPR  command,
                  but did not specify the double colon (::) at the end of
                  the name.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command  and  include  the
                  two  colons.   Some  OPR  commands will provide the two
                  colons after the name  or  number,  if  you  press  the
                  ESCape key after typing the node name.


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid OPR command specified

   Reason:        You specified an invalid OPR command.

   Recovery:      Type a question mark to the OPR prompt to get a list of
                  valid OPR commands.


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid token found

   Reason:        You specified an OPR command, such as HOLD or  RELEASE,
                  but  did  not give one of the necessary arguments.  The
                  necessary  arguments  are  the  request-id-number,  the
                  project-programmer number, or an asterisk.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and include one of
                  the required arguments to the command.


   ERROR:         ?  Invalid wildcard designator

   Reason:        You specified a wildcard character (* or  %)  within  a
                  file specification for a keyword or switch value.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the file specification without any wildcard characters.
                  OPR/ORION does not accept wildcard characters within  a
                  file specification.


   ERROR:         ?  Negative number improper

   Reason:        You specified a negative number for a device or  stream
                  number.  OPR does not accept negative numbers.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
                  positive integer as a device or stream number.





                                    A-4
                             OPR ERROR MESSAGES


   ERROR:         ?  No such filename

   Reason:        You specified a file name as a keyword or switch value,
                  but the file name does not exist as you specified it.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the correct file name as the keyword or switch value.


   ERROR:         ?  No such file type

   Reason:        You specified a file type as a keyword or switch value,
                  but the file type does not exist as you specified it.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the correct file type as the keyword or switch value.


   ERROR:         ?  Not a quoted string - does  not  begin  with  double
                  quote

   Reason:        You specified a message text, but did  not  include  it
                  within double quotes ("message text").

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the message text within the required double quotes.


   ERROR:         ?  Not confirmed

   Reason:        You specified too many keywords or switches to  an  OPR
                  command.   OPR  expected a carriage return after one of
                  the keywords or switches specified.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>; OPR retypes the command up to the  point
                  where carriage return is expected.  Then press <RET>.


   ERROR:         ?  Only one file allowed

   Reason:        You specified the  BACKSPACE  or  FORWARDSPACE  command
                  with  the  /FILE  switch  and  a  numeric value greater
                  than 1.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>; OPR retypes the command up to the  point
                  where  you  entered  the number of files.  You can then
                  enter 1 or press <RET> .   The  /FILE  switch  defaults
                  to 1.






                                    A-5
                             OPR ERROR MESSAGES


   ERROR:         ?  Priority not in range

   Reason:        You specified a priority number in the SET JOB-PRIORITY
                  command that is not in the range from 1 to 63.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
                  priority number from 0 to 63.


   ERROR:         ?  Too many characters in node name

   Reason:        You  specified  too   many   characters   in   a   name
                  specification  to the /NODE switch.  The /NODE name can
                  have only from one to six alphanumeric characters.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and  then  specify
                  the  correct  node name for the /NODE switch.  The name
                  must be six characters or less.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command  and  then  supply
                  the two colons at the end of the node name/number.


   ERROR:         ?  Value missing in date/time

   Reason:        You specified an OPR command that requires an  argument
                  of date and/or time, such as the SET USAGE command.

   Recovery:      Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the  command  and  supply  the
                  date  and/or time as an argument.  To check whether the
                  date and/or time is needed give the "?" command to list
                  your options.






















                                    A-6
                             OPR ERROR MESSAGES
























































                                    A-7
                                        
























































                                    A-8
                                        


                                   INDEX



               -A-                     CONFIG
                                         ADD command, 3-21
   ABORT command, 2-2                    ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER command,
   ALIGN command, 2-5                        3-24
   Aligning printer forms, 2-5           AUTO-C0NFIGURE command, 3-25
   Allowing access to structures,        LOAD command, 3-26
       2-167                             REMOVE command, 3-28
   Altering memory configuration,        RETURN command, 3-30
       4-24                              SET command, 3-31
   ATTACH CPU command, 4-2               SHOW command, 3-36
   ATTACH DEVICE command, 4-3            SHUTDOWN command, 3-38
   ATTACH disk-unit command, 4-5         SNAPSHOT command, 3-39
   ATTACH JOB command, 4-7             Connecting to specified jobs, 4-7
   Attaching devices, 4-3              CONTINUE command, 2-17
   Attaching disk, 4-5                 Controlling batch output, 2-170
   Automatic OPR, 2-163                CTRL/H, 1-6
    
               -B-
    
   BACKSPACE command, 2-8
                                                   -D-
    
               -C-                     Debugging system program, 4-16
                                       DEFINE FILE-ACCESS command, 2-20
   Canceling requests, 2-11            DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE command,
   CATALOG                                 2-21
     DELETE command, 3-4               DEFINE NODE command, 2-22
     DISABLE command, 3-5              Defining
     ENABLE command, 3-6                 FAL accessibility, 2-20
     HELP command, 3-7                   nodes, 2-22
     INSERT command, 3-9                 remote printers, 2-21
     LIST command, 3-13                DETACH DEVICE command, 4-9
     MODIFY command, 3-14              DETACH disk-unit command, 4-11
     RETURN command, 3-17              Detaching devices, 4-9
     SHOW command, 3-18                DISABLE command, 2-26
   Changing CORMAX, 4-18               Dismounting structures, 2-32
   Changing CORMIN, 4-19               Displaying
   Changing OPR terminal, 4-28           batch control files, 2-128
   Changing requests, 2-56               date and time, 2-150
   Changing system date, 4-22            device information, 2-143
   Changing system lists, 2-56           mountable device allocations,
   Changing system parameters, 4-1           2-126
   Changing system schedule, 4-29        node routing tables, 2-142
   Changing system time, 4-23            operators, 2-133
   Closing ORION log file, 2-15          outstanding messages, 2-130
   Commands                              system information, 2-125,
     reprinting faulty, 1-6                  2-143
     to subjobs, 5-3                     system lists, 2-148


                                  Index-1
                                        


               -E-                     Non-privileged OPSER commands,
                                           5-7
   Enabling system features, 2-35      NQC streams, 1-10
   Entering command subsets, 2-41
   Exchanging disk packs, 4-37                     -O-
   Executing OPR, 2-163
   EXIT command, 2-43                  Obtaining subjob status, 5-3
                                       Operator privileges, 1-2
               -F-                     Operator-privileged commands, 4-1
                                       OPR, 1-2
   Forward spacing pages, 2-44           syntax errors, 1-13
                                       OPR command description headings,
               -H-                         2-1
                                       OPR help, 2-47
   HELP, 1-3, 1-4, 1-7                 OPR.ATO file, 5-1
   HELP command, 2-47                  OPSER
   HOLD command, 2-49                    command, 5-6
   Holding requests in queue, 2-49       command format, 5-2
                                         controlling program, 5-1
               -I-                       messages, 5-12
                                         prompts, 5-2
   Identifying tape mounts, 2-51         restrictions, 5-9
   INITIA command, 4-13                OPSER AUTO
                                         feature, 5-4
               -L-                     OPSER subjobs, 5-1
                                       ORION, 1-2
   LCP                                 ORION to OPR messages, 1-11
     CLEAR command, 3-45
     RETURN command, 3-48                          -P-
     SET command, 3-49
     SHOW command, 3-52                Privileged OPSER commands, 5-5
     START command, 3-56               PUSH command, 2-64
     STOP command, 3-57
     ZERO COUNTERS command, 3-58                   -Q-
   Leaving OPR command level, 2-43
   LOCK command, 2-53                  QUOTA
   Logging in subjobs, 5-4               ADD command, 3-62
                                         DELETE command, 3-64
               -M-                       HELP command, 3-65
                                         LIST command, 3-66
   MODIFY command, 2-56                  MODIFYcommand, 3-68
   Modifying terminal                    RETURN command, 3-70
       characteristics, 4-30             SHOW command, 3-71
   MOUNT command, 2-60
   Mounting structures, 2-60                       -R-
   Moving to another context, 2-64
   Multiple operators, 1-3             Recognizing labeled volumes, 2-65
                                       Releasing requests in queue, 2-67
                                       Remote node specification, 1-3
               -N-                     Removing
                                         disks, 4-11
   NEXT command, 2-62                    structures, 2-53


                                  Index-2
                                        


   Reporting to error file, 2-69       Setting (Cont.)
   Reprinting pages, 2-8                 plotter parameters, 2-103
   Rescheduling requests, 2-71           printer parameters, 2-106
   Responding to messages, 2-74          tape-drive parameters, 2-114
   Restricting the use of a device,      usage accounting, 2-122
       2-76                              virtual memory limits, 4-36
   Returning a device to general use,  SHOW ALLOCATION command, 2-126
       2-169                           SHOW command, 2-125
   Routing output requests, 2-77       SHOW CONTROL-FILE command, 2-128
                                       SHOW MESSAGES command, 2-130
               -S-                     SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES command,
                                           2-132
   SCHED bits, 4-29                    SHOW OPERATORS command, 2-133
   SEND command, 4-14                  SHOW PARAMETERS command, 2-135
   Sending messages, 2-81, 4-14        SHOW QUEUES command, 2-138
   SET BATCH-STREAM command, 2-84      SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command, 2-142
   SET BREAK command, 4-16             SHOW STATUS command, 2-143
   SET CARD-PUNCH command, 2-88        SHOW SYSTEM command, 2-148
   SET command, 2-83                   SHOW TIME command, 2-150
   SET CORMAX command, 4-18            SHUTDOWN command, 2-151
   SET CORMIN command, 4-19            Specifying
   SET CPU command, 4-20                 next request, 2-62
   SET DATE command, 4-22                OPSER subjobs, 5-2
   SET DAYTIME command, 4-23           START command, 2-154
   SET FAL-STREAM command, 2-91        Starting
   SET JOB command, 2-92                 OPSER, 5-1
   SET KSYS command, 2-94                programs automatically, 5-1
   SET MEMORY command, 4-24            STOP command, 2-157
   SET NODE command, 2-97              Stopping subjobs, 5-4
   SET NOMESSAGE command, 4-26         SUPPRESS command, 2-161
   SET NQC-STREAM command, 2-99        Suppressing device messages, 4-26
   SET OPR command, 4-28               Suppressing printer form-feeds,
   SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command,           2-161
       2-100                           SUSPEND command, 3-40
   SET PLOTTER command, 2-103
   SET PRINTER command, 2-106                      -T-
   SET SCHED command, 4-29
   SET SYSTEM command, 2-111           TAKE command, 2-163
   SET TAPE-DRIVE command, 2-114       Time stamp, 1-11
   SET TERMINAL TYPE command, 2-120    TTYs, 5-1
   SET TTY command, 4-30
   SET TTY restriction, 4-35
   SET USAGE command, 2-122                        -U-
   SET VMMAX command, 4-36
   Setting                             UNLOCK command, 2-167
     batch stream parameters, 2-84     UNRESTRICT command, 2-169
     card punch parameters, 2-88
     job characteristics, 2-92
     node parameters, 2-97                         -W-
     OPR terminal parameters, 2-120
     paper-tape-punch parameters,      WAIT command, 2-170
         2-100                         :WHAT ALL command, 5-3


                                  Index-3
                                        


               -X-
    
    
   XCHNGE command, 4-37


















































                                  Index-4